manualshive.com logo in svg

Comdial DXP Plus Series, Manual

The Comdial DXP Plus Series is a cutting-edge communication system designed for businesses. Installing and using this advanced product is made easy with our comprehensive user manual. Download it for free from our website and gain access to step-by-step instructions and helpful tips to maximize the potential of your DXP Plus Series.

Share
Download
background image

2.0 Installing the Off-Premise Extension Interface

2.1

Detailing The Mounting Considerations

•

You can attach the OPX-X to any sturdy, flat, surface. It may be vertically rack mounted if desired.

•

you must locate the OPX-X within six (6) feet of the proper electrical outlet. It requires a 117VAC circuit, with
a third-wire ground, supplied to a standard (NEMA 5-15R) electrical outlet.

•

you must keep the distance between the OPX-X and the KSU to 25 feet or less.

•

Be sure that the mounting location is secure and dry and have adequate ventilation. Be sure that the temperature
range of the location is within 32-122° F (0-50° C).

•

If the mounting surface is damp or if it is concrete or masonry material, you must attach a backboard to the
mounting surface. Suitable mounting backboards are available commercially or can be constructed out of
1/2-inch plywood cut to size.

•

Tools and hardware required for mounting the KSU cabinet include:

•

Fasteners - wood screws (1/4 x 1-inch round head), toggle bolts, or wall anchors.

•

Screwdriver - to match fasteners.

•

Electric drill - if prepared holes are required.

•

Connecting tool - for fastening wires to a type-66 connector block.

•

Crimping tool - for 623-type modular plugs.

2.2

Mounting The Cabinet

1. Unpack, and carefully inspect the OPX-X for shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately of any

damages found. Verify that the packages contain all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and
operation.

2. If a backboard is required at the mounting location, attach it securely to provide a stable KSU mounting

surface.

3. Use the base of the OPX-X as a template or measure for mounting hole locations per the dimension details

shown in Figure 1.

4. Drill holes in the mounting surface of a proper size to accommodate the hardware being used. If necessary,

prepare these holes with inserts, anchors or other attachment devices as dictated by the type of mounting
surface.

5. Attach the OPX-X to the mounting surface with four (4) screws installed through the mounting flange and

into the mounting surface holes. Note that the flange holes are elongated with an enlargement at one end of
the hole. This feature allows the mounting screws to be partially installed in the mounting surface before the
KSU is hung on them.

IMI89–209

Installing And Programming The OPX-X

4 – Installing The OPX-X

Summary of Contents for DXP Plus Series

Page 1: ...Digital Communications System R ...

Page 2: ...e combinations of accessories and features are too varied and extensive to insure total feature compatibility Accordingly some features identified in this publication will not operate if some other feature is activated Comdial disclaims all liability relating to feature non compatibility or associated in any way with problems which may be encountered by incompatible features Notwithstanding anythi...

Page 3: ...3 5 Locating The Boards 16 3 6 Using The Modem 18 3 7 Using The Ring Generator 19 3 8 Understanding Board Configuration 20 3 9 Mounting Considerations 22 3 10 Using The Power Supply 24 3 11 Using The Battery Backup 26 4 Connecting The System 28 4 1 Connecting The Lines 28 4 2 Connecting The Stations 30 4 3 Connecting The Paging Equipment And Music Sources 32 4 4 Connecting The Power Failure Teleph...

Page 4: ...one models that function on the DXP Plus This chapter also lists the major features of the telephones and it gives you diagrams and dimensions of each telephone model BULLET 2 Section Three Previewing The Hardware details all of the hardware for the DXP Plus Use this chapter to find definitions of the printed wire boards Along with general definitions section three gives the product code numbers a...

Page 5: ...unications using the latest PCM TDM pulse code modulated time division multiplexing digital switching technology The DXP Plus switching architecture provides a non blocking switching array that gives all ports simultaneous access through the system The digital technology allows simultaneous voice and data transmission using 2B D signaling CCITT specification for basic access data transfer rate for...

Page 6: ...peakerphone 8012S 12 Line LCD Speakerphone 8112S 12 Line Speakerphone 8112N Multiline Proprietary Telephone 8101N Single Line Proprietary Telephone IB64X 64 Button DSS BLF Console ExecuTech Telephones 6620E 23 Line Monitor Telephone 6714S 14 Line Speakerphone 6620T 23 Line Speakerphone 6714X 14 Line Monitor Telephone 6614E 22 Line Monitor Telephone 6614T 22 Line Speakerphone 6600E 17 Line LCD Spea...

Page 7: ...ton Places a line on hold Stores pauses in number sequences while programming Allows you to scroll through multiple held calls on display Interactive Buttons Provide quick and easy access to system and call processing features Provide straightforward button programming without dialing codes the interactive buttons themselves however are not programmable Intercom Button Selects an intercom line Ini...

Page 8: ...ancels programming Status Lights Shows status of line when next to line button Shows status of station when next to DSS button Shows status of feature when next to programmable button TAP Button Recalls dial tone or activates host system features must be programmed for either feature Retrieves held calls last call held is first call retrieved Transfer Conference Button Transfers calls Sets up conf...

Page 9: ...gure 2 shows the dimensions of the DigiTech Multiline telephone 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 OPER PRS GHI TUV JKL ABC WXY MNO DEF HOLD TAP DIGITECH COMDIAL SPKR TAP TRANS CONF MUTE HOLD ITCM 12X14LCD DIGITECH COMDIAL SPKR TAP TRANS CONF MUTE HOLD ITCM 7714X 7714S 7700S 7701X DD32X CAJS075 Figure 1 DigiTech Station Configurations GCA40 130 DXP Plus General Description 6 Telephone Features ...

Page 10: ...8 625 6 451 7 658 8 625 4 983 4 069 1 112 1 251 2 887 4 007 CAJS045 7714X 7714S 7700S 7701X Figure 2 DigiTech Station Outline Dimensions DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Telephone Features 7 ...

Page 11: ...TUV OPER JKL TRNS CNF HOLD TAP INTERCOM MUTE SHIFT SPEAKER INTERCOM TRNS CNF TAP HOLD OPER TUV PRS WXY DEF ABC QZ MNO JKL GHI MUTE SHIFT SPEAKER INTERCOM TRNS CNF TAP HOLD OPER TUV PRS WXY DEF ABC QZ MNO JKL GHI MUTE SHIFT SPEAKER INTERCOM TRNS CNF TAP HOLD OPER TUV PRS WXY DEF ABC QZ MNO JKL GHI MUTE SHIFT SPEAKER INTERCOM TRNS CNF TAP HOLD OPER TUV PRS WXY DEF ABC QZ MNO JKL GHI 8012S 8112N IB64...

Page 12: ...8012S 8112S 8101N 8112N 8024S 8124S 4 640 10 750 9 080 7 130 8 900 8 900 3 731 1 034 8 900 CAJS077 Figure 4 Impact Station Outline Dimensions DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Telephone Features 9 ...

Page 13: ...14E TAP MUTE SPKR HOLD I TCM TRANS CONF ABC GHI PRS SYS JKL TUV OPER MNO WXY RDL DEF 6600E DB70 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 OPER PRS GHI TUV JKL ABC WXY MNO DEF HOLD TAP CAJS046A 6701X DB32X EB32X TAP SYS RDL SPKR MUTE TRANS CONF HOLD I TCM OPER TUV JKL ABC PRS GHI WXY MNO DEF 6700S TAP SYS RDL SPKR MUTE TRANS CONF HOLD I TCM OPER TUV JKL ABC PRS GHI WXY MNO DEF 6702X SYS RDL HOLD I TCM OPER TUV JKL ABC P...

Page 14: ...Figure 6 ExecuTech Station Outline Dimensions 8 625 6 451 7 658 8 625 4 983 4 069 1 112 1 251 2 887 4 007 CAJS045 DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Telephone Features 11 ...

Page 15: ...wo serial data ports which have been dedicated for PC based programming and a remote maintenance modem Conference Board Provide additional conference capability Each board provides 5 additional 3 way conferences Interface Boards Ties the main cabinet to the expansion cabinet Each expansion cabinet has an interface board that connects the main cabinet with the expansion cabinets Interface boards ar...

Page 16: ...ce for loop start lines Loop start lines are the most common CO line type loop start lines do not usually offer disconnect supervision Multi Purpose Line Board The multipurpose line board provides system interface for ground start lines loop start lines and E M Tie lines these are typically the three line types that the central office CO makes available for connection The multipurpose line board i...

Page 17: ...rovided for board removal or insertion without system power down Digital Station Board The digital station board provides support for Comdial s proprietary digital telephones such as the Impact and DigiTech Each board supports either 8 or 16 stations A precharge port is provided for board removal or insertion without system power down Industry Standard Telephone Board The industry standard station...

Page 18: ...nly Communications Card The optional communications card provides extra serial ports for the DXP Plus The communications card contains four serial communication ports and is attached to either the Auxiliary board the interface boards or the Services board You can install two communications cards onto the lower two slots of any of these boards The system supports a maximum of 18 serial data ports D...

Page 19: ...t The 12 board capacity of the upper expansion cabinet breaks down as follows 1 interface board slot 2 auxiliary universal slot for auxiliary boards station boards conference boards or line boards 9 universal slots for station conference or line boards Lower Expansion Cabinet The 11 board capacity of the lower expansion cabinet breaks down as follows 1 interface board slot 2 auxiliary universal sl...

Page 20: ... Slot 1 CPU Slot 1 Services Slot 1 Aux Universal Slot 8 Universal Slots 1 Interface Slot 2 Aux Universal Slots 8 Universal Slots Main Cabinet Lower Expansion Cabinet Upper Expansion Cabinet Figure 7 Board Locations DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Reviewing The Hardware 17 ...

Page 21: ...d power port for the modem If you connect the modem to a serial data port on one of the communications cards you will have to program the system for modem operation on that port Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products SERIAL Status PWR Line PLUS013 Power Cord Serial Port Cord Figure 8 Modem GCA40 130 DXP Plus General Description 18 Reviewing The Hardware ...

Page 22: ...age waiting voltage to the industry standard telephones Regardless of the number of installed industry standard telephones you will need to install one ring generator assembly in each common equipment cabinet that has IST telephones connected Power Supply Assembly Ring Generator Assembly Ring Generator Cable Power Cable PLUS030 Figure 9 Ring Generator DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Reviewi...

Page 23: ... first universal slot in the main cabinet and move from left to right The first universal slot in the upper expansion cabinet is physical slot number 10 and the first universal slot in the lower cabinet is physical slot 21 Installers need to know the physical location of the boards in order to properly wire the lines and stations The logical location of a station or a line corresponds to its relat...

Page 24: ... logically from left to right in each cabinet throughout the system Adding boards without renumbering When you install additional boards or relocate existing boards after the system is in service the logical numbers of the stations or lines on the added board continue from the last assigned logical number For example if your last assigned station number was 16 the next station number will be 17 re...

Page 25: ...rd wire ground supplied to a standard electrical outlet NEMA 5 15R Locate the equipment within 25 feet of the TELCO PBX jacks this is an FCC requirement A nominal distance of seven feet is ideal Use a reliable earth ground a metal cold water pipe or a metal building frame ground Use a backboard of at least 3 4 inch thick plywood to mount the DXP Plus common equipment It is a good practice to make ...

Page 26: ...ews Panel Retaining Screws Typical Backboard 48 X 96 3 4 Plywood Sheet Main Cabinet Expansion Cabinet 2 12 3 4 10 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 2 4 3 4 4 3 4 48 PLUS024 Figure 11 Mounting The Cabinets DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Reviewing The Hardware 23 ...

Page 27: ...ansion cabinets must be different from the dedicated AC circuit that you provide for the main cabinet Where to connect the power supply If you install the optional battery back up assembly you can use the main cabinet s electrical outlet to supply AC power to that assembly s battery charger To provide protection against surges and spikes that may appear on the AC line install a plug in power line ...

Page 28: ...Two Dedicated 117 VAC 15 Amp NEMA 5 15R Electrical Outlets With Third Wire Ground Each Is Protected By Its Own Circuit Breaker PLUS038 Two 15 AMP Circuit Breakers Ganged Together Figure 12 Power Connections DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Reviewing The Hardware 25 ...

Page 29: ...ial product code BT000 141 charger unit and interface cables Metal enclosure with wire harness includes combination circuit breaker on off switch How to calculate backup time Calculate the minimum battery backup time provided by a battery backup assembly to a fully configured DXP Plus system using the following formula T Back up time in hours K 0 85 Constant e 50 ampere hour capacity of battery ba...

Page 30: ...Figure 13 Battery Backup Connections PLUS004 Circuit Breaker Power Line Surge Protector Dedicated AC Outlet DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Reviewing The Hardware 27 ...

Page 31: ...figure 14 for line board connections How to protect the lines Transient voltage spikes if induced onto CO or CENTREX lines can travel through the cable and into the common equipment The telephone company offers basic protection against this condition but it is usually designed to protect the central office circuits While this CO or CENTREX service will also provide some protection to the common eq...

Page 32: ...Connect Line Cable to Outside Line Termination Ferrite Collar PLUS033 Figure 14 Typical Line Connections loop start board shown DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Connecting The System 29 ...

Page 33: ...Feet Protecting the connections If spare conductors exist in the cables that are run between the station boards and the 66M xx connector blocks it is a good practice to connect them to earth ground to help prevent them from inducing radio frequency and or AC interference into the system Each station interface board is shipped with an appropriate supply of ferrite collars Snap one of these around e...

Page 34: ...41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 CLIP TERMINALS 50 26 1 25 Typical Station Connector Block Ferrite Collar Female 50 pin Cable Connector J1 Male 50 pin Connector Typical Analog Station Board J2 Male 50 pin Connector PLUS031 Figure 15 Station Connections DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Connecting The System 31 ...

Page 35: ...Jack Front View Of Jacks External Loudspeaker External Paging Port Pin No 3 4 1 6 2 5 Signal Paging Music 2 Music 2 Audio Input To Paging Amplifier Relay 1 Relay 3 Relay 2 Relay 4 Services Board Enable Input If Required External Paging Amplifier SPKR Output Common Audible Interface Relays Relay Jack J3 J4 Pin No 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 No Contact No Contact No Contact No Contact Relay 1 Relay 2 Re...

Page 36: ...dustry standard telephone for power failure operation to line 1 of that board see Figure 17 for jack details 6 5 4 3 2 1 Typical Industry Standard Non Electronic Telephone Front View Of Jack Line Board PLUS065 Figure 17 Line Board Power Fail Telephone Connection DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Connecting The System 33 ...

Page 37: ...s on the services board Serial Data Ports 11 18 Lower two slots of one of the following The interface board in the upper expansion cabinet The interface board in the lower expansion cabinet The auxiliary board in the main cabinet In order to use all 16 non dedicated serial data ports you must install four communications cards PLUS044 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Serial Modem Port Maintenance Port Modul...

Page 38: ...ices Board Wiring shown for low current application see caution text Wire to Common Audible Interface Relay Wire to Common Audible Interface Relay Signalling Device Signalling Device Power Source for Signalling Device AC or DC Input as Required AC or DC Input as Required AC or DC Input as Required 24V 1A Max 48V 5A Max 24V 1A Max 48V 5A Max Wiring shown with slave relay connection for high current...

Page 39: ... uses a separate station port Intercom Conversations Simultaneous Non blocking Paths Non blocking Stations Assigned To Same Group 480 Intercom Number Simultaneous Rings On Same Group 480 Intercom Number Lines 72 main cabinet 88 expansion cabinet 1 80 expansion cabinet 2 Line Groups With unlimited members 16 Paging External Paging Ports 1 plus 4 relays Internal External Paging Zones or All Call 8 S...

Page 40: ...ies 36 CCS 1 Erlang non blocking Power Requirements Domestic AC Power Supply 87 130 VAC Single phase all models 6A maximum AC current 600W 700VA International Power Supply 87 130 VAC at 50 60 Hz externally switchable 187 264 VAC at 50 60 Hz 5A maximum AC current 600W 700VA Approved to IEC 950 International Safety Standards Battery Back up Reserve Powers 1 Hour minimum for fully loaded system main ...

Page 41: ...y analog telephones 6 wire 3 pair twisted non shielded for proprietary analog telephones with SOHVA Maximum Length With 20 AWG With 22 AWG With 24 AWG Digital Telephone 2500 feet 2000 feet 1500 feet Analog Multiline Telephone 2500 feet 2000 feet 1500 feet Analog Single Line Proprietary Telephone 4000 feet 3500 feet 3000 feet IST Telephone 4000 feet 3500 feet 3000 feet Switching Principle Digital p...

Page 42: ...edicated serial ports on CPU board 50 feet com card on services board at 19 200 baud 500 feet com card on auxiliary or interface boards at 9600 baud Music Interfaces Two Inputs Input Level 3 Volts peak to peak maximum Input Impedance Approximately 500 Ohms Connector Modular jack PA Port Output Level 400 Millivolts peak to peak typical speech Output Impedance Approximately 500 Ohms Connector Modula...

Page 43: ...oard DXAUX Conference Boards DXCNF DID Board DXPCO DD8 DD4 E1 Board international applications DXPE1 PLSxxx T1 Board domestic U S A applications DXPT1 Total Control PC Attendant DXPTC PLS Multipurpose Line Board DXPCO GD4 GD8 Communications Card DXOPT COM Digital Station Board DXDST 8 DXDST 16 Analog Station Board DXAST 8 DXAST 16 Industry Standard Station Board DXIST 8 DXIST 16 Line Board DXPCO L...

Page 44: ... interface board and power supply Ringing Cadences Digital Intercom Ring 150 msec on 75 msec off 4 sec between rings Digital Trunk Ring 450 msec on 75 msec off 4 sec between rings Digital Recall Ring 275 msec 300msec on 4 sec between rings Digital Camp on Recall Ring 150 msec on 75 msec off Analog Intercom Ring 300 msec on 150 msec off 3 5 sec between rings Analog Trunk Ring 900 msec on 125 msec o...

Page 45: ...e operating company can temporarily discontinue service and make changes which could affect the operation of this equipment They must however provide adequate notice in writing of any future equipment changes that would make the system incompatible Installation Requirements Connection of the electronic key system to the telephone lines must be through a universal service order code USOC outlet jac...

Page 46: ...f and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient the television or radio s receiving antenna and or relocate the DXP Plus the individual telephone stations and the radio or TV with respect to each other If necessary the user should consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions Th...

Page 47: ...Transfer Unscreened With Automatic Camp On Call Waiting Tone Caller ID Caller ID RNA Camp On With Automatic Call Back Camp On Call Waiting Camp On No Answer Clear Major Alarm Ring Central Message Desk Central Processor Switched Data Port Configuration Centrex Compatible Common Audible Ringer Interface Conferencing Multiline Conference Advisory Tone Console Support Console Less Operation Communicat...

Page 48: ...ng Access Periodic Line Tone Personal Intercom Number Preference Personalized Ringing Tone Pooled Line Access Power Failure Transfer Preselection Prime Line Printer Interface Privacy Privacy Release Private Lines Program Printout Programmable Button Flexibility Programming Port Pulse Tone Switchable Quick Transfer Remote Programming and Diagnostics Remote Station Disable Release Button Reminder Al...

Page 49: ...des to identify calls by category or special grouping for call accounting purposes All calls with the same account code are reported together by the station message detail accounting SMDA feature The system attendant can obtain a separate printout of calls assigned to one account without causing any other calls to print or be deleted The programmer can arrange for the system to verify that the use...

Page 50: ...essage display Adjunct Feature Module Support When the installer includes a 16 button adjunct feature module with certain model Comdial proprietary telephones that module extends the programmable buttons of the telephone by 16 buttons and status lights The users can program these buttons for speed dialing and direct station selection DSS with busy lamp field BLF status lights All Call Paging Refer...

Page 51: ...call processing These special purpose buttons are described below Alternate Button When an attendant presses this button all calls that are normally routed to his or her telephone now route to an alternate attendant s telephone instead Both Button The both button provides a means for attendants to conference between themselves a current call and the last call that they placed on hold Overflow Butt...

Page 52: ...n code at any system telephone the code alerts the system as to what features to make available to the user The user can use the telephone for anything allowed by his or her personal intercom number however a user cannot disturb the last number redial stored there by the normal user Once a user accesses his or her telephone features those features remain in effect until any idle time exceeds the a...

Page 53: ...es it through the use of the add on conference feature In the non private mode any stations with that line appearance can gain access at the same time sometimes known as common line pickup Users may add up to five parties into one conversation Also see the discussions titled Conferencing Multiline and Privacy Release Automatic Redial With this feature the system automatically redials a busy or una...

Page 54: ...d up to a maximum of six times Each route is programmed from least to most costly The more costly the route the higher the access level needed to access it and the greater the chance that the station will be denied access If ARS selects a more costly route because the least costly one is busy a station user receives a warning tone when a call is attempted Since this tone indicates that a more expe...

Page 55: ...ogrammer must save the database programming to make the relocation permanent This relocation feature only applies to digital telephones Users must ensure that the vacated port remains unused until they complete a relocation If someone connects a telephone to the vacated port before users complete a relocation the relocated telephone will not retain its original programming When the user accept the...

Page 56: ... be different from the music provided to held calls if the system installer connects two different sources to the system When the two different choices are available station users can dial a code to choose either source for their background music Also refer to the discussions titled Music Interface and Music On Hold Battery Back Up Chassis Cable and Batteries Battery back up assemblies that includ...

Page 57: ... makes a call announce intercom call to the personal intercom number of another telephone the user of that telephone can make a handsfree response to the call If the personal intercom number is forwarded or is in a hunt group the intercom call will appear as a tone signaled intercom call at the telephone to which the calls are forwarded A tone burst programmable by the installer precedes the call ...

Page 58: ...sonal Station users can forward the calls that normally ring at their telephones to another telephone for answering They can forward just their prime line and intercom calls or forward every call that rings at their station If users forward calls while the attendant has enabled the night transfer of ringing mode the night mode ringing assignments at their stations are forwarded There are multiple ...

Page 59: ...al calls immediately follow the station s forwarding assignment When a busy station receives a call on a line for which it has an appearance the call will forward immediately If the station does not have a line appearance but does have an idle intercom in its hunt list the call will subdue ring at the idle intercom for the programmed number of rings before it forwards When a busy station receives ...

Page 60: ... for calls on incoming lines programmers must enable those lines for CFOS capability Before a CFOS enabled station can forward a call outside the system the system must be able to associate the call receiving line with the station Programmers can take action to associate a CFOS enabled line with an individual CFOS enabled station With this arrangement this station is the only one that can forward ...

Page 61: ... that telephone includes an LCD display a message appears on it that shows the park orbit number of the returning call as well as the line number The system programmer sets the call park recall times Prior to software release 3A he or she could choose a minimum time of one minute however beginning with software release 3A the minimum call park recall time that the programmer can choose is 30 secon...

Page 62: ...other station and encountering a busy signal or a ring with no answer a user can camp on to that station hang up and wait to be called back by the system when that station becomes idle or when the user returns Likewise a user can camp on to a busy line hang up and wait to be called back when it becomes idle When the busy station becomes idle the system rings the originating station and starts a ti...

Page 63: ...he DXP Plus provides the following data parameters Parameter Maintenance Port Modem Port Baud Rate In 9600 2400 Baud Rate Out 9600 2400 Data Bits 8 8 Stop Bits 1 1 Parity Bits None None Flow Control None None Common Audible Ringer Interface Relay connections that provide dry contact closure whenever ringing occurs are available on the central processor unit circuit board The relay closure tracks t...

Page 64: ...art lines without disconnect supervision Both distant parties can leave an unsupervised conference thus leaving the line unused yet still active The line will remain active until the person that set the conference rejoins it to disconnect the line Conference Advisory Tone Beginning with software release 4A the conference advisory tone feature allows programmers to configure the system to provide a...

Page 65: ... number for the held party 2 effect a conference by pressing the TRANS CONF button putting the held call the consulted party and the station user in conference 3 hang up and effect a transfer of the held party to the consulted party If the user encounters a busy or a ring no answer he or she may press the TAP button to return to the held party Transfer considerations The system default denies line...

Page 66: ... reprogramming the database the system allows users to continue to use their telephones but prevents them from making changes that affect the database s structure As the installer makes the changes to the database the VMMI program sends these changes back to the DXP Plus memory Day One And Day Two Ringing Refer to the discussion titled Flexible Ringing Assignments Day Restriction Level Refer to th...

Page 67: ...r that particular model of telephone This means that all unique button functions are erased When the table defaults are programmed all customized data that the programmer has entered in any tables such as SOHVA groups and toll restriction tables are erased See also Master Clearing The System Delayed Ringing Ringing assignments are programmable A programmer can program a station to provide delayed ...

Page 68: ...ty to service a DID caller Coupling this flexibility with the station s call forwarding ability provides many chances for system users to service DID calls A programmer could program a hunt list and a call forwarding scheme to an unassigned station and provide a designated DID termination and routing center There would be no need to connect a telephone to the station port to use the feature in thi...

Page 69: ... DISA callers can pre select the gain on a DISA line before they select the line for use They can dial a code to select either 0dB 3dB or 6dB of gain It is important to note that uncompensated line to line DISA connections often exhibit low audio levels due to double loop copper losses While adding gain to these connections will sometimes improve audio signal levels the added gain may also result ...

Page 70: ... is enabled When synchronized ringing is enabled the central office ringing pattern is tracked on external calls Incoming calls transferred by an attendant always ring as an external call Do Not Disturb DND Users can set any multiline telephone to a do not disturb mode DND using the designated programmable button The associated indicator turns on as an indication of active DND Plus an appropriate ...

Page 71: ... he or she has installed at any other station port The system supports the use of up to four consoles for each telephone and there is no limit to the maximum number of consoles that it will support The DSS BLF console provides a one button direct station selection DSS intercom an associated busy lamp field BLF and additional autodial capability to the telephone user DSS Status Button When the prog...

Page 72: ...les following this description You control the day versus night messages by programming the day 1 day 2 and night ringing begin and end times in the system parameters menu The system goes into the night mode either manually by the attendant or automatically each day when the programmed times occur When the system is in the night mode the night menu message plays versus the day menu message likewis...

Page 73: ...siness hours have ended Example Our office hours are from eight to five Please call back tomorrow Recall no answer messages Whenever a station is dialed from a DISA line and is not answering the system plays a recall no answer message to the caller Example 1 The party you have reached is unavailable at this time Example 2 The party you have reached is unavailable at this time Dial 1 followed by yo...

Page 74: ...ted not enough system resources available wrong access code dialed or feature dialed is busy NOTE The call is not routed to the attendant the message plays then reorders Example Your call cannot be completed at this time Please try again DVA DISA You can enhance the security of DISA by using the DVA The DXP Plus seizes the incoming call based on the DISA assignment parameters and the DVA plays the...

Page 75: ... Recall No Answer For example Main Number xxx xxxx You have reached ABC company Dial 1 for Service Dial 2 for Advanced Features Dial 3 for Assistance 1 Group ITCM 2 DISA Access 3 station Index Prompt 10 Welcome Greeting Service Department All phones ring and flash group ITCM Dial your Authorization Code Dial your Feature Access Code Station Number Index Prompt 31 Password Index Prompt 33 Dial Feat...

Page 76: ...the extension number at any time Index Prompt 10 Welcome Greeting Index Prompt 14 Day Night Menu I m sorry that extension doesn t answer Dial 1 to Track Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant Dial 3 to leave a message in the voice mail box 1 8 2 Extension Number 3 Voice Mail Port number Index Prompt 22 Recall No Answer I m sorry that extension doesn t answer Dial 1 to Track Dial 2 to leave a...

Page 77: ... occurs by activating an external customer supplied audible or visual alarm The external alarm connects to one of the relay jacks J3 or J4 on the front of the CPU board Make sure the alarming device complies with system voltage and power requirements You determine when a major alarm alerting condition should occur by programming threshold values and corresponding time periods for each type of alar...

Page 78: ...tion centers to service different extension numbers Each extension number could represent different calling categories and ring at different blocks of system stations Also see Multipurpose Line Board Support End to End DTMF Signaling The system accepts DTMF tones or digital signals from proprietary telephones and sends them as DTMF tones through the public telephone network where they are received...

Page 79: ... 4A the executive advisory tone allows programmers to configure the system to provide an audible tone whenever a system user activates the executive override feature Programmers can select this tone as either a one time tone or as a periodic reoccurring tone If they choose a reoccurring tone they must select the time interval between the reoccurring tones Executive Override Block As a class of ser...

Page 80: ...nswer From Any Station and Night Transfer Of Ringing F Feature Inhibit The programmer can disable a large array of individual features to provide a very basic telephone system when it is necessary A basic system might be necessary at a site where a large proportion of the telephones are accessible to unauthorized users that may use them to tamper with the system or such a system may be necessary f...

Page 81: ... dialing a code or pressing a preprogrammed button While this feature is active calls on lines assigned to delayed and night ringing both ring at the various stations however no other ringing occurs Also refer to the discussions titled Auxiliary Ringer Interface Common Audible Ringer Interface External Paging Interface Line Answer From Any Station and Night Transfer Of Ringing Flexible Ringing Ass...

Page 82: ...nually by pressing a HOLD button or automatically if programmed by pressing another line button Further when a user presses the TRANS CONF button to transfer a call the system places the call on hold The user can place a call on hold in either an exclusive or non exclusive manner Exclusive hold prevents a user at another telephone from retrieving a call held on a shared line Non exclusive hold all...

Page 83: ...f a hot transferred call is using a speakerphone he or she merely begins the conversation with the distant party If the recipient of the hot transfer is using a monitor telephone he or she must lift the handset to reply to the distant party Also refer to the discussion titled Call Transfer Screened I I Hold And I Use Indications The light associated with a line button provides a visual indication ...

Page 84: ...back while on hold Offhook Treated As Busy When an industry standard telephone user takes the telephone s handset off hook the IST station appears busy to the system This feature prevents the system from ringing an IST station while the station is idle and off hook making it unable to sound audible ringing Message Wait Retrieval Access Code This feature allows IST station users to respond to a mes...

Page 85: ...om any telephone to an industry standard telephone if the installer has programmed the IST in the SOHVA tables according to the SOHVA feature Users can SOHVA the IST whenever it is busy on a line or the intercom The IST user can not respond to a SOHVA call and his or her outside party will hear the SOHVA caller s voice Station Lock This feature allows you to lock any local industry standard teleph...

Page 86: ...t list at a time When a user selects a group intercom and dials a line group code to select a line or dials a code to retrieve a call from a park orbit the system places the subsequent line appearance on the group intercom that the user preselected the line appearance remains at that group intercom until the user finishes his or her call parks it or transfers it to another telephone Station Monito...

Page 87: ...s at a called station and returns to the caller as ring back voice signaled internal call sounds a single tone burst at a called station and returns to the caller as two tone bursts busy tone sounds one half second on and one half second off at the calling station and do not disturb tone sounds a fast busy tone when the called station is in the do not disturb mode The system only supplies OPX port...

Page 88: ...explain to the users which dialing code answers which external ringer Also refer to the discussions titled Auxiliary Ringer Interface Common Audible Ringer Interface External Paging Interface Flexible Ringing Assignments and Night Transfer Of Ringing Line Appearance Enhanced When a telephone user selects a group intercom and dials a line group code to select a line or to retrieve a call from a par...

Page 89: ...hat meets specifications set forth by that nation s technical standards Also see the discussions titled Conference Advisory Code Executive Override Advisory Tone and Line Out Softkey Option Location Code 1 USA Standard system default codes for all system features Location Code 2 South Africa Standard system default codes for all system features except transmission and receive levels set to meet lo...

Page 90: ...irect selection or prime line access Further an out of service line is available for all inbound calls unless it is a DID line The CO will not send a call over a disabled DID line Users can not mark a line during a conference call or when they are DISA callers When users mark a line during an active call the system records the mark for the active line If users take marking action during an idle co...

Page 91: ...at turned it on Stations that include an LCD display show the source of the message The programmer can program one station as the central message desk and arrange it for exclusive message waiting control The central message desk user can control message waiting lights and deliver messages to and from all other stations in the system The programmer can also provide a programmable button for placing...

Page 92: ...er to the discussions titled Background Music and Music On Hold Music On Hold MOH When an installer connects a customer supplied music source to the system and the programmer enables the feature music is provided to outside lines and intercom calls while they are on hold Music on hold can be turned on or off system wide by attendant action Also see discussions titled Music Interface and Background...

Page 93: ...conveys the following system ringing status day 1 ringing steady on day 2 ringing wink with off time night ringing continuous wink and manual night transfer of ringing flutter Also refer to the discussions titled Auxiliary Ringer Interface Common Audible Ringer Interface External Paging Interface Flexible Ringing Assignments and Line Answer From Any Station O Off Premise Extension OPX Installers c...

Page 94: ...tions except those major changes just mentioned When the system is initially installed and programmed or at any later time as needed the installer programmer can make the two passwords different to limit subsequent access to either programming level to certain special or authorized people The system also provides two entry levels for main station database programming and provides a different featu...

Page 95: ...g tones to aid in distinguishing one ringing station from another Pooled Line Access Refer to the discussion titled Line Group Access Power Failure Transfer A power failure line connection is available on each line interface board for connecting industry standard telephones such as a Comdial ATC or MaxPlus model The system automatically connects these power fail telephones directly to certain line...

Page 96: ...it to provide a printout of all or selected database data and the system administrator or attendant can command it to print selected data Programmable Button Flexibility The programmable buttons accommodate any combination of line appearances features speed dial numbers and other intercom numbers A shift operation permits the station user to program speed dial numbers on the second level Through t...

Page 97: ... access code for the transfer location The system begins the call transfer process as soon as the user dials a digit on his or her dial pad and effects the transfer as soon as the user hangs up or presses his or her telephone s RELEASE button When installers activate this feature it greatly reduces the keystrokes that users must take to transfer calls over a tie line R Recall Refer to the discussi...

Page 98: ...make a non verbal response to subdued off hook voice announce calls or intercom calls using the attendant prepared response messages Restricted Dialing Error Tone When you dial a toll restricted number from your telephone you will hear an intercom error tone frequency with a continuous pattern of 250 ms on and 250 ms off With earlier software no audible error indication is given If you have a LCD ...

Page 99: ...ging line is automatically connected to a station when the user takes the handset off hook or presses the speaker button No manual line selection is required S Save Button Dial Storage A user can dial digits and save them while on a call which is useful should the distant party tell the user of a number to call and the user wishes to save that number for later redial Saved Number Redial Refer to t...

Page 100: ...ted to 25 feet of cable The undedicated serial ports on the services board are limited to 500 feet of cable when operated at the 19200 baud rate The undedicated serial ports on the auxiliary and interface boards are limited to 50 feet when operated at the 9600 baud rate For related information refer to the feature description titled Communications Card Support Service Observing Service observing i...

Page 101: ...are not deleted after they are printed a later command to delete records will delete all records at that point and not just the ones that were printed in the previously generated reports The programmer can arrange for the system to always delete the records after they have been printed The attendant can request particular reports at any time they are required If the programmer arranges the system ...

Page 102: ... discussions titled Call Transfer Unscreened Call Transfer Screened Station Camp On Callback Refer to the discussion titled Camp On With Automatic Callback Station Class Of Service The programmer can enable or disable a group of features and parameters to provide a particular class of service COS The system permits the arrangement of up to 32 different classes of service After programming the COS ...

Page 103: ... DNIS translation table When station hunting is used with DISA the pilot extension can be the extension number assigned to the signals digit translation for the digital voice announce DVA message associated with the DISA line Name The hunt group s name is the seven character alphanumeric name of this group that is used for LCD display and reference Full Name The hunt group s full name is the 20 al...

Page 104: ...within the programmed call advance time the system delivers the call to the next sequential idle station programmed in the hunt group This hunting method is a linear search through the programmed list however the search starts wherever it left off after the previous call Longest Idle Station Hunting Longest idle station hunting delivers a call to the station that has been idle for the longest peri...

Page 105: ... Plus supports a maximum of 64 hunt groups Each hunt group can include the maximum number of stations that the system can support however due to system memory limitations all hunt groups can not contain all stations simultaneously Since the system makes a total of 32 Kbytes of memory available for station hunt groups you can use the following formula to determine possible station hunt group capaci...

Page 106: ...p to 16 digits Plus trunk or intercom number selection Stored digits include 0 9 and A pause is stored at any point where the HOLD button is pressed and a hookflash is stored at any point where the TAP button is pressed Also refer to the discussion titled Automatic Pause Insertion There are two levels of storage on speed dial buttons To access the second level the user must press the programmed SH...

Page 107: ... two paired station ports In addition to the wiring connections associated with the installation the installer must take certain programming actions He or she must mark the telephone type for the odd numbered station port to support the connected telephone and mark the telephone type for the even numbered station port undefined Busy On SOHVA A default a system returns a ring back tone to users who...

Page 108: ...e E1 or T1 option is installed you can also view the status log from an LCD speakerphone in the same manner Your LCD speakerphone must have a pre programmed system status button to enter the status log viewing mode The status button is programmed using the button mapping procedure in the Programming Instructions The LCD status log viewing feature allows you to view the log only The installer must ...

Page 109: ... external customer supplied audible or visual alarm The external alarm connects to one of the relay jacks J3 or J4 on the front of the DXCPU board Installers must make sure the alarming device complies with system voltage and power requirements Programmers determine when a major alarm alerting condition should occur by programming threshold values and corresponding time periods for each type of al...

Page 110: ...ll Inc Orem UT Through Dialing An installer can connect external telephony equipment to the DXP Plus through a proprietary interface device or through an IST port When the programmer enables the through dialing feature DTMF tones that the external device generates pass through the interface equipment the DXP Plus system and any line connection Also see the paragraph titled Off Premise Extension Ti...

Page 111: ...ique They can enter the same digits without the pause but instead followed by additional digits as another unique number They can assign different routing and toll restriction parameters to each of these entries There are several applications for this feature One application is in international dialing where different toll restriction parameters apply depending upon whether the caller dialed 0 or ...

Page 112: ...em mode of operation RNA Or Busy Tracking If the called station fails to answer or is busy the caller can activate the Tracker Paging System by pressing the TRACK button on his or her telephone The TRACK button is one of the telephone s interactive buttons On telephones not equipped with interactive buttons the caller activates the Tracker Paging System by dialing the Tracker access code defaults ...

Page 113: ...system In the local mode the attendant assigns pagers to intercoms and selects pager types This programming is transparent to the DXP system and does not alter any Tracker programming done at the DXP system level In the system mode of operation all Tracker operating parameters and pager to intercom assignments are as programmed into the DXP system by the installer or system programmer The system m...

Page 114: ...mail transferred call This action can alert the voice mail system to disconnect and leave the parties connected Busy If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is busy on a call the DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice system When the voice mail system receives this digit it can abandon the transfer reconnect to the call and offer the caller whatever options the the voice m...

Page 115: ...ents to and from a particular group of stations or to all stations This feature also arranges for all call and zone paging to an external paging device The programmer can assign stations to particular paging zones up to eight zones to permit station users to make announcements to one particular site or he or she can assign all stations to the same zone to permit users to announce all areas at once...

Page 116: ... Tone Bursts 55 Call Announce With Handsfree Answerback 55 Call Costing And Station Message Detail Accounting Reports 55 Call Forward Call Forward All Or Personal 56 Call Forward Busy Or Ring No Answer All Or Personal 57 Call Forward Immediate 57 Call Forward Outside System 58 Call Forward Recall 59 Call Park 59 Call Pick Up Directed 59 Call Pick Up Group 59 Call Pick Up System 59 Call Transfer Un...

Page 117: ...y 87 Enhanced Line Appearance 76 86 Exclusive Hold 76 81 ExecuMail Integration 77 ExecuTech Telephones 10 Executive Override Block 77 Exectuive Override Advisory Tone 77 Executive Override 77 Extended DTMF Tones For ExecuMail 77 Extended DTMF Tones 77 Extension Hunting 76 External Paging Interface 78 External Paging Port 78 F FCC Rules And Regulations Knowing The 43 Feature Inhibit 78 Feature Renu...

Page 118: ...Time 91 Overflow Button 49 P Pad Level Transmit Receive 75 107 Paging Access 92 Paging Equipment And Music Sources Connecting The 32 Password Protection 92 Pause Time 92 PBX CENTREX Central Office Compatible 93 PC Attendant Position 50 PC Attendant 93 PC Attendant Creating Tracker Messages 110 Periodic Line Tone 93 Personal Intercom Number Preference 93 Personal Intercom Number 84 93 Personalized ...

Page 119: ...m Status And E1 T1 Status Log Viewing 106 T T1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option 107 TAFAS 86 TAP Flash Recall 108 Telephone Features Understanding The 3 Telephone Features Using The 4 Telephones Using The Comdial 3 Telephones Using The DigiTech 6 Telephones Using The ExecuTech 10 Telephones Using The Impact 8 Telephony Services Application Programming Interface Support 108 Test Busy Button 48 T...

Page 120: ...ews Flat blade screwdriver to match front panel retaining screws Electric drill if prepared holes are required Connecting tool for fastening wires to a type 66 connector block Crimping tool for 623 type modular plugs Static discharge wrist strap and conductive floor mat 1 3 Complying With Underwriters Laboratories Regulations Per The Underwriters Laboratories regulation 1459 2nd edition be aware o...

Page 121: ...ge of the cabinet Note that these holes are elongated with an enlargement at one end This feature allows the cabinet to slide down on the screws to secure the mounting when the cabinet is hung on them 7 Use the openings for the middle and lower set of mounting screws as a guide and mark the location for the remaining screws 8 Lift the cabinet from the top screws and set it aside while preparing th...

Page 122: ...0 1 2 22 5 16 Retaining Screws Two Places Typical Backboard 48 X 96 X 3 4 Plywood Sheet PLUS025 Mounting The Common Equipment Cabinet Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet IMI66 105 Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet 3 ...

Page 123: ...abinet provides a ground stud on its cabinet for access to its frame ground Effective grounding requires that you connect the frame ground to a good earth ground A good earth ground is one such as the ground bus in the premises AC power panel or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters pumps or insulating sections that have be...

Page 124: ...No 6 Solid Copper Wire Grounding Terminal Typical Earth Ground PLUS040 Grounding The System Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet IMI66 105 Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet 5 ...

Page 125: ... Be sure to save the small bag containing the mounting hardware 3 Slide the power supply assembly into the opening at the top right side of the common equipment main cabinet until the assembly s front panel contacts the side of the cabinet 4 Locate the power cable routed from the backplane and connect it to the power supply s connector 5 Remove the 6 thread forming screws from the hardware bag and...

Page 126: ...AC power to that assembly s battery charger To provide protection against surges and spikes that may appear on the AC line install a plug in power line surge protector between the AC power cord of the installed equipment and the AC outlet CAUTION DO NOT attach or secure the line cord to the surface of the mounting location in any manner Typical Earth Ground Power Cable PLUS041 Two 15 AMP Circuit B...

Page 127: ... Measurement details are shown in the illustration CAUTION Once you have measured the power supply voltages turn off the AC power switch and disconnect the AC line cord from the AC outlet Leave the AC power disconnected until you have installed the circuit boards in the main cabinet 2 3 Identifying The Fuse The power supply fuse is a slow blow type rated at 8 AMPS and 250 VOLTS A replacement fuse ...

Page 128: ... 5 V nominal thermal overload condition press Reset switch On 36 VDC On 5 VDC On 5 VDC On Thermal Overload On Battery Backup Connected Pins 1 2 36 V Ground Pins 3 4 36 VDC Pin 5 5 VDC Pin 6 5 VDC Pin 7 Digital Analog Ground Pin 8 Thermal Overload Signal On Off Switch Fuse 8A 250V Slow Blow Type Reset Switch Press If Thermal Overload Indicator Turns On Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet IMI66 105...

Page 129: ...n provides installation instructions for the CPU and services boards Since you will install line and station boards as well as auxiliary boards and other optional circuit boards on an as needed basis each of these boards include its own installation instruction for your reference 3 1 Creating A Static Safe Work Area When servicing the common equipment cabinet at the installation location it is a g...

Page 130: ...ommon Point Ground Creating A Static Safe Work Area Backboard Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS034 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet IMI66 105 Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet 11 ...

Page 131: ...olated by clothing Connect the wrist strap cord between the wrist strap and an AC or earth ground 3 Remove the CPU board and system software card from their static protection bags orient them as shown in the illustration and attach them with the supplied hardware Assembling The Software Board To The CPU Board 4 Nut 4 Star Washer 4 X 1 2 Standoff 4 40 X 3 8 Machine Screw CPU Board System Software C...

Page 132: ... the main cabinet board cage and press it in firmly until the board edge connector properly mates with the backplane connector CAUTION When pressing the board and card assembly into place press it only at the extractor lever locations If you apply pressure at other locations you may damage the board assembly 8 Make a final inspection to ensure that the board and card assembly is in the correct slo...

Page 133: ...round 3 When you are ready to install the circuit board remove it from its static protection bag 4 Locate the proper board slot Remember the service board plugs into into a unique slot 5 Orient the circuit board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet s backplane CAUTION When p...

Page 134: ...ist Strap Services Board Slot CPU Board Slot Typical Extractor Lever Press boards into place by pressing at the extractor lever locations Clip to Grounding Terminal PLUS043 Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet IMI66 105 Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet 15 ...

Page 135: ...equipment RD data from device to common equipment connection to the device TD transmit data connection Wire the common equipment TD data to device from common equipment connection to the device RD receive data connection Wire the common equipment SG signal ground connection to the device SG signal ground connection If required for proper operation wire the common equipment CTS clear to send status...

Page 136: ...ve Data Pin 4 Transmit Data Pin 5 Signal Ground Pin 6 Frame Ground Front View of Jacks NOTES 1 2 Some data devices require CTS signal for proper operation Route to device as needed Maximum distance between each ofthe two dedicated serial data ports and its external data equipment is 25 feet Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet IMI66 105 Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet 17 ...

Page 137: ...t Condition CPU Board Steady On Normal Operation Steady Off System Malfunction Services Board Green Steady On Normal Operation Green Steady Off System Malfunction Yellow Off Red Off Normal Operation Yellow On Red Off Main Cabinet Using Battery Back Up Operation Yellow Off Red On Main Cabinet Out Of Service Locating The Status Lights PLUS045 Green LED Yellow LED Red LED Services Board Green LED CPU...

Page 138: ... Of Jacks Common Audible Interface Relays Relay Jack J3 J4 Pin No 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 No Contact No Contact No Contact No Contact Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 2 Relay 1 Relay 3 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 4 Signal Relay 1 Relay 3 Relay 2 Relay 4 Services Board Wiring shown for low current application see caution text Wire to Common Audible Interface Relay Wire to Common Audible Interface Relay Signalling D...

Page 139: ... from the paging port This is useful for turning the amplifier on and off to sound these ringing signals CAUTION Do not exceed a 1 amp at 24 volts 0 5 amp at 48 volts load on these control terminals If the load requirements exceed this limit connect the load through an external slave relay DO NOT CONNECT THESE CONTROL TERMINALS DIRECTLY TO THE 120VAC LINE Making A Typical External Paging Connectio...

Page 140: ...ile on hold and another for internal background music if desired The input impedance of the music interface is approximately 500 ohms Use the volume control on the audio source s to adjust the audio level of the music source s as required Installing An External Audio Source PLUS062 Page Music 1 Music 2 Front View Of Jack Music Source For Music On Hold Music Source For Background Music Pin No Signa...

Page 141: ...equate notice in writing of any future equipment changes that would make the system incompatible Installation Requirements Connection of the DXP Plus system to the telephone lines must be through a universal service order code USOC outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating company If the installation site does not have the proper outlet ask the telephone company business office to install on...

Page 142: ...Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00345 4 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate ra...

Page 143: ... Crimping tool for 623 type modular plugs Static discharge wrist strap and conductive floor mat 1 3 Complying With Underwriters Laboratories Regulations Per The Underwriters Laboratories regulation 1459 2nd edition be aware of the following precautions when installing telephone equipment that is to be directly connected to the telephone company network Never install telephone wiring during a light...

Page 144: ... an enlargement at one end This feature allows the cabinet to slide down on the screws to secure the mounting when the cabinet is hung on them 7 Use the openings for the middle and lower set of mounting screws as a guide and mark the location for the remaining screws 8 Lift the cabinet from the top screws and set it aside while preparing the holes for the remaining screws 9 Rehang the cabinet as d...

Page 145: ...Panel Retaining Screws Panel Retaining Screws Typical Backboard 48 X 96 3 4 Plywood Sheet Main Cabinet Expansion Cabinet 2 12 3 4 10 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 2 4 3 4 4 3 4 48 PLUS024 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66 106 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet 3 ...

Page 146: ...arth ground A good earth ground is one such as the ground bus in the premises AC power panel or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters pumps or insulating sections that have been added for vibration reduction Avoid using the premises structural steel frame as it may not be at earth ground potential Use 10 12 or larger insula...

Page 147: ...re Cabinet to Cabinet No 10 or 12 Solid Copper Wire Cabinet to Cabinet Grounding Terminal Grounding Terminal Two Grounding Terminals No 6 Solid Copper Wire Cabinet to Earth Ground PLUS039 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66 106 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet 5 ...

Page 148: ...e the power supply assembly from the carton Be sure to save the small bag containing the mounting hardware 3 Slide the power supply assembly into the opening at the top right side of the common equipment main cabinet until the assembly s front panel contacts the side of the cabinet 4 Locate the power cable routed from the backplane and connect it to the power suppy connector 5 Remove the 6 thread ...

Page 149: ...Typical Common Equipment Cabinet Power Supply Assembly Machine Screw 4 Places Installing The Power Supply Assembly Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66 106 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet 7 ...

Page 150: ...dicated AC circuit that you provide for the main cabinet For best results wire the expansion cabinet s dedicated AC circuit from a power phase that is opposite from the one that supplies the main cabinet s AC circuit Connecting too much electrical equipment to one power phase may overload that power phase and cause a drop in the supplied AC voltage Install a plug in power line surge protector betw...

Page 151: ...VAC 15 Amp NEMA 5 15R Electrical Outlets With Third Wire Ground Each Is Protected By Its Own Circuit Breaker PLUS038 Two 15 AMP Circuit Breakers Ganged Together Making the AC Power Connections Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66 106 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet 9 ...

Page 152: ...ement details are shown in the illustration CAUTION Once you have measured the power supply voltages turn off the AC power switch and disconnect the AC line cord from the AC outlet Leave the AC power disconnected until you have installed the circuit boards in the main cabinet 2 3 Identifying The Fuse The power supply fuse is a slow blow type rated at 8 AMPS and 250 VOLTS A replacement fuse must ha...

Page 153: ...nominal thermal overload condition press Reset switch On 36 VDC On 5 VDC On 5 VDC On Thermal Overload On Battery Backup Connected Pins 1 2 36 V Ground Pins 3 4 36 VDC Pin 5 5 VDC Pin 6 5 VDC Pin 7 Digital Analog Ground Pin 8 Thermal Overload Signal On Off Switch Fuse 8A 250V Slow Blow Type Reset Switch Press If Thermal Overload Indicator Turns On Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66 106...

Page 154: ...terface board Since you will install line and station boards as well as auxiliary boards and other optional circuit boards on an as needed basis each of these boards include its own installation instruction for your reference 3 1 Creating A Static Safe Work Area When servicing the main or expansion common equipment cabinets at the installation location it is a good practice to place a conductive m...

Page 155: ... Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66 106 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet 13 ...

Page 156: ...d bottom guides in main cabinet board cage and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet s backplane CAUTION When pressing circuit boards into place press them only at the extractor lever locations If you apply pressure at other locations you may damage the board assembly 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all circuit boards are installed 7 Route...

Page 157: ...net Interface Board Expansion Cabinet 2 Interface Cable for Expansion Cabinet 2 Interface Cable for Expansion Cabinet 1 Interface Cable Access Holes Two Places Interface Cable Access Holes Two Places PLUS028 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66 106 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet 15 ...

Page 158: ...et locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines R This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation the Company and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel The inform...

Page 159: ... practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe wo...

Page 160: ...Ground Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The Analog Station Board IMI89 173 Installing The Analog Station Board 3 ...

Page 161: ...on boards connect to any universal slot NOTE On DXP Plus systems do not install a station board at the right most board slot in the second or lower expansion cabinet The system reserves this slot for internal use 5 If you are installing the station board in an operating system connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 to the precharge jack on the station board 6 Orien...

Page 162: ...ge Wrist Strap Power Supply Pre charge Port Analog or Digital Station Board Station Board Pre charge Port Pre charge Cable For Station Board Installation During Power Up PLUS029 Installing The Analog Station Board IMI89 173 Installing The Analog Station Board 5 ...

Page 163: ...frequency and or AC interference into the system Remember you should snap a ferrite collar around each station cable to provide protection against radio frequency interference CAUTION The polarity between the individual wires in a particular voice or data pair is not critical however do not connect the voice circuits to the data circuits 3 1 Installing DSS BLF Consoles Install a DSS BLF Console at...

Page 164: ...3 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 CLIP TERMINALS 50 26 1 25 Typical Station Connector Block Ferrite Collar Female 50 pin Cable Connector J1 Male 50 pin Connector Typical Analog Station Board J2 Male 50 pin Connector PLUS031 Installing The Analog Station Board IMI89 173 Installing The Analog Station Board 7 ...

Page 165: ...lack Blue 11 36 21 Voice Path Green 6 Blue Black 11 22 Red Black Orange 12 37 23 Data Path Yellow Orange Black 12 24 Black Black Green 13 38 25 Voice Path Green 7 Green Black 13 26 Red Black Brown 14 39 27 Data Path Yellow Brown Black 14 28 Black Black Slate 15 40 29 Voice Path Green 8 Slate Black 15 30 Red Yellow Blue 16 41 31 Data Path Yellow Blue Yellow 16 32 Black Yellow Orange 17 42 33 Orange...

Page 166: ... Voice Path Green 14 Blue Black 11 22 Red Black Orange 12 37 23 Data Path Yellow Orange Black 12 24 Black Black Green 13 38 25 Voice Path Green 15 Green Black 13 26 Red Black Brown 14 39 27 Data Path Yellow Brown Black 14 28 Black Black Slate 15 40 29 Voice Path Green 16 Slate Black 15 30 Red Yellow Blue 16 41 31 Data Path Yellow Blue Yellow 16 32 Black Yellow Orange 17 42 33 Orange Yellow 17 34 Y...

Page 167: ... The DXP Plus Logical Numbering Because there are no dedicated station or line ports in the DXP Plus the system uses an automatic configuration method to logically number its stations and lines Automatic configuration occurs after you perform a master clear on the system How automatic configuration works With automatic configuration the system does a search for all installed station and line board...

Page 168: ...rd that board s stations or lines assume logical numbers in sequence after the system s last assigned logical station or line number For example if the system s last logical station number is 24 the logical numbers of the newly installed board s stations begin at logical number 25 After you remove a board and delete it through programming that board s logical numbers are available for reassignment...

Page 169: ...nalog station connector block identify an odd numbered port and its even numbered counterpart such as ports 103 and 104 2 Use 6 wire twisted pair house cable and make the following connections a connect pins 3 and 4 the inside pair of a 625A2 6 station jack to the voice pair of the odd numbered station port b connect pins 2 and 5 the outside pair of the 625A2 6 station jack to the data pair of the...

Page 170: ... 1 25 6 5 4 3 2 1 FRONT VIEW OF JACK 1 VOICE PAIRED STATION 2 DATA 3 VOICE 4 VOICE 5 DATA 6 VOICE PAIRED STATION Typical Station Connector Block Type 625A2 6 Connector Typical Voice Pair Paired Station Data Pair Typical Paired Station Ports No Connection Voice Pair 6 Wire Twisted Pair Cable 6 Wire Line Cord To Secure Off Hook Voice Announce Telephone PLUS012 Installing The Analog Station Board IMI...

Page 171: ...own in the chart below Making Resistance Measurements Measured Pair Resistance In Ohms Multiline Telephone Single Line Telephone DSS BLF Console Common Equipment Voice Pair 40 150 40 150 0 3 100 40 50 Data Pair 0 3 100 0 3 100 0 3 100 1 2 5 2 Making A Voltage Check Make the following voltage measurements at the station connector blocks under the following conditions Bridging clips installed AC pow...

Page 172: ...ows 1 Disconnect console line cord plug from line 2 Press and hold console button C10 while reconnecting line cord plug to line NOTE The companion station will be disabled during the time that the console is being disconnected and reconnected 3 Release console button C10 and note that BLF indicators will each turn on in sequence beginning with station 10 indicator Indicators will then turn off and...

Page 173: ...acks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines R This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation the Company and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel T...

Page 174: ...practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe wor...

Page 175: ...round Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The Digital Station Board IMI89 174 Installing The Digital Station Board 3 ...

Page 176: ...rotection bag 4 Locate the proper board slot On DXP Plus systems the station boards connect to any universal slot NOTE On DXP Plus systems do not install a station board at the right most board slot in the second or lower expansion cabinet The system reserves this slot for internal use 5 If you are installing the station board in an operating system connect the free end of the precharge cord that ...

Page 177: ...e Wrist Strap Power Supply Pre charge Port Analog or Digital Station Board Station Board Pre charge Port Pre charge Cable For Station Board Installation During Power Up PLUS029 Installing The Digital Station Board IMI89 174 Installing The Digital Station Board 5 ...

Page 178: ...the spare connectors from inducing radio frequency and or AC interference into the system Remember you should snap a ferrite collar around each station cable to provide protection against radio frequency interference 3 1 Installing DSS BLF Consoles Install a DSS BLF Console at any station port in the system as a companion to a system telephone The DXP Plus systems support a maximum of four console...

Page 179: ... 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 CLIP TERMINALS 50 26 1 25 Typical Station Connector Block Ferrite Collar Female 50 pin Cable Connector J1 Male 50 pin Connector Typical Digital Station Board PLUS068 Installing The Digital Station Board IMI89 174 Installing The Digital Station Board 7 ...

Page 180: ... 10 Slate Red 10 20 Black Black Blue 11 36 21 Signal Path Green 11 Blue Black 11 22 Red Black Orange 12 37 23 Signal Path Yellow 12 Orange Black 12 24 Black Black Green 13 38 25 Signal Path Green 13 Green Black 13 26 Red Black Brown 14 39 27 Signal Path Yellow 14 Brown Black 14 28 Black Black Slate 15 40 29 Signal Path Red 15 Slate Black 15 30 Green Yellow Blue 16 41 31 Signal Path Yellow 16 Blue ...

Page 181: ...art line board requires eight circuits and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits In the DXP Plus each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot you can place any station or line board at any slot location with no restrictions Adding boards without renumbering If you install or relocate a station or line board this board...

Page 182: ...ngle Line Analog Speaker Analog Monitor Analog Single Line PC Atten Scout 900MX Industry Standard Digital Speaker YES YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO Digital Monitor YES YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO Digital Single Line YES YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO Analog Speaker YES YES NO YES YES NO NO NO NO Analog Monitor YES YES NO YES YES NO NO NO NO Analog Single Line YES YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO PC Atten YES YES NO...

Page 183: ...lowing limits 4 40 50 Ohms 4 2 Making A Voltage Check Make the following voltage measurements at the station connector blocks under the following conditions Bridging clips installed AC power connected to the common equipment Measure the voltage across the signal pair The measured voltage must be within the following limits 4 28 36 VDC 4 3 Causing A Digital Station To Self Test The multiline statio...

Page 184: ...to where to install them 1 The best and recommended choice is to add one receiver card to top position on the main cabinet s services board NOTE You can add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board however you must take specific programming action to enable their use the name of this program option is Services DTMF Highway If you add these two cards and take t...

Page 185: ... Services DTMF Highway With these additional two cards the services board supports simultaneous dialing of 13 industry standard telephones You can install three receiver cards on the expansion cabinet interface boards With three receiver cards installed each expansion cabinet s interface board supports simultaneous dialing of 12 industry standard telephones CAUTION If you add two additional receiv...

Page 186: ...not sure how many telephones will dial at the same time in your system you can use the following typical system averages and formula to arrive at an usable estimate A typical telephone system experiences the following call traffic percentages Your system may be similar Light Call Traffic up to 15 percent of the telephones dial simultaneously Moderate Call Traffic up to 20 percent of the telephones...

Page 187: ...ood practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe...

Page 188: ...nt Ground Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The IST Station Board IMI89 184 Installing The IST Station Board 5 ...

Page 189: ...ternal use 6 If you are installing the station board in an operating system connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 to the precharge jack on the station board 7 Orient the station board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet s backplane If you c...

Page 190: ...e Wrist Strap Power Supply Pre charge Port Typical Industry Standard Station Board Station Board Pre charge Port Pre charge Cable For Station Board Installation During Power Up PLUS026 Installing The IST Station Board IMI89 184 Installing The IST Station Board 7 ...

Page 191: ...stry standard telephone per EIA specs cannot exceed 300 ohms maximum DC load resistance of the wiring between the common equipment and the industry standard telephone Plus the DC resistance of telephone itself can not exceed 460 ohms maximum If spare conductors exist in the cables that you run between the station boards and the 66M xx connector blocks it is a good practice to connect the spare con...

Page 192: ... 48 49 50 CLIP TERMINALS 50 26 1 25 Typical Station Connector Block Ferrite Collar Female 50 pin Cable Connector J1 Male 50 pin Connector Typical Industry Standa Station Board J2 Male 50 pin Connector PLUS027 Connecting Telephones To The IST Station Board Installing The IST Station Board IMI89 184 Installing The IST Station Board 9 ...

Page 193: ...ed Black Blue 11 36 21 No connection Blue Black 11 22 Black Orange 12 37 23 Orange Black 12 24 Black Green 13 38 25 Tip Lead Green 5 Green Black 13 26 Ring Lead Red Black Brown 14 39 27 No connection Brown Black 14 28 Black Slate 15 40 29 Slate Black 15 30 Yellow Blue 16 41 31 Tip Lead Green 6 Blue Yellow 16 32 Ring Lead Red Yellow Orange 17 42 33 No connection Orange Yellow 17 34 Yellow Green 18 ...

Page 194: ...d Black Blue 11 36 21 No connection Blue Black 11 22 Black Orange 12 37 23 Orange Black 12 24 Black Green 13 38 25 Tip Lead Green 13 Green Black 13 26 Ring Lead Red Black Brown 14 39 27 No connection Brown Black 14 28 Black Slate 15 40 29 Slate Black 15 30 Yellow Blue 16 41 31 Tip Lead Green 14 Blue Yellow 16 32 Ring Lead Red Yellow Orange 17 42 33 No connection Orange Yellow 17 34 Yellow Green 18...

Page 195: ...board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity For example a 16 station board requires 16 timing circuits an eight line loop start line board requires eight circuits and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits In the DXP Plus each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot you can place any station or line board at a...

Page 196: ...he Tip and Ring leads for each installed telephone with a DC voltmeter Then call the industry standard telephone to stimulate the ring generator assembly and measure the AC ringing voltage across the Tip and Ring leads for each installed telephone with an AC voltmeter The measured voltages must be within the limits shown in the chart below If your measured readings are different from these charted...

Page 197: ... is to be directly connected to the telephone company network Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch un insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephon...

Page 198: ...t is a good practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a sta...

Page 199: ...round Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The Loop Start Line Board IMI89 172 Installing The Loop Start Line Board 3 ...

Page 200: ...proper board slot On DXP Plus systems the loop start line boards connect to any universal slot NOTE On DXP Plus systems do not install a line board at the right most board slot in the second or lower expansion cabinet The system reserves this slot for internal use 5 If you are installing the line board in an operating system connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 t...

Page 201: ...scharge Wrist Strap Line Board Pre charge Jack Power Supply Pre charge Port PLUS032 Loop Start Line Board Pre charge Cable For Line Board Installation During Power Up Installing The Loop Start Line Board IMI89 172 Installing The Loop Start Line Board 5 ...

Page 202: ...n 3 1 No Connection 2 Line 4 Tip 3 Line 3 Tip 4 Line 3 Ring 5 Line 4 Ring 6 No Connection 4 1 No Connection 2 Auxiliary Line 2 Tip 3 Line 1 Tip 4 Line 1 Ring 5 Line 2 Ring 6 Auxiliary Line 2 Ring 5 1 No Connection 2 No connection 3 Power Fail Line 1 Ring 4 Power Fail lIne1 Tip 5 No Connection 6 No Connection NOTE If the system operation includes the direct inward station access DISA feature on a p...

Page 203: ...Connect Line Cable to Outside Line Termination Ferrite Collar PLUS033 Viewing A Typical Line Connection Installing The Loop Start Line Board IMI89 172 Installing The Loop Start Line Board 7 ...

Page 204: ...d requires timing circuits equal to its capacity For example a 16 station board requires 16 timing circuits an eight line loop start line board requires eight circuits and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits In the DXP Plus each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot you can place any station or line board at any s...

Page 205: ...ack up power to the system Connect an industry standard single line telephone to the power failure jack and use it to provide basic communications capability until the AC power to the system is restored The bottom jack on the line board provides the power failure connection 6 5 4 3 2 1 Typical Industry Standard Non Electronic Telephone Front View Of Jack Line Board PLUS065 Making A Power Failure S...

Page 206: ...liary equipment connection available for use This connection is at pins 1 and 6 of the lines 1 2 jack and is associated with line 2 of that line board Charlottesville Virginia 22901 2829 R World Wide Web http www comdial com Accredited by the Dutch Council for Certification for certification and registration activities Comdial s Quality Management System Is Certified To The ISO 9001 Standard 6 5 4...

Page 207: ...e to ring or route to a programmed ring no answer RNA destination If there is no forwarding or the RNA routing destination is available the system provides no routing Users can place DID calls on hold however if they press TAP the system will generate an internal hookflash signal instead of one that the CO will recognize The system returns a ring back signal to DID calls made to a station in the d...

Page 208: ... the digits based on the appropriate DID block translation table and attempt to place the call to the desired station To assure that the caller will always hear ring back prior to the call being answered for example when answered by voice mail the system delays the station ringing until it applies ring back tone During station ringing the called station will sound a distinctive ringing based on th...

Page 209: ...er The CO signals a line disconnect condition to the DXP Plus by opening the loop When the DXP Plus detects the CO disconnect it returns the line to idle polarity and changes the line from busy to idle The DXP Plus signals a line disconnect condition to the CO by returning the supervision battery polarity to the on hook state Wink and delay start lines maintain the busy status until the DXP Plus d...

Page 210: ...ation it is a good practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepar...

Page 211: ...Point Ground Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The DID Line Board IMI89 191 Installing The DID Line Board 5 ...

Page 212: ...5 Locate the proper board slot On DXP Plus systems the DID line boards connect to any universal slot NOTE On DXP Plus systems do not install a DID line board at the right most board slot in the second or lower expansion cabinet The system reserves this slot for internal use 6 If you are installing the line board in an operating system connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed i...

Page 213: ...d Static Discharge Wrist Strap Power Supply Pre charge Port DID Line Board Pre charge Port Pre charge Cable For DID Board Installation During Power Up PLUS021 Installing The DID Line Board IMI89 191 Installing The DID Line Board 7 ...

Page 214: ...3 Using the data base programming procedure program the system for DID line operation 4 Connect a buttset or an industry standard telephone IST to a line port on the DID line board 5 Take the buttset or ISToff hook and listen for relay click on both wink start and delay start lines 6 Dial a CO digit string to determine if you can make a call Have someone answer your call to determine if you have a...

Page 215: ...20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 CLIP TERMINALS 50 26 1 25 Connector Block Typical Earth Ground No 6 Solid Copper Wire Grounding Terminal Ferrite Collar Male 50 pin Connector DID Line Board Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 PLUS022 Installing The DID Line Board IMI89 191 Installing The DID Line Board 9 ...

Page 216: ...ed board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity For example a 16 station board requires 16 timing circuits an eight line loop start line board requires eight circuits and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits In the DXP Plus each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot you can place any station or line board a...

Page 217: ... Black 11 22 Red Black Orange 12 37 23 Data Path Yellow Orange Black 12 24 Black Black Green 13 38 25 Voice Path Green Green Black 13 26 Red Black Brown 14 39 27 Data Path Yellow Brown Black 14 28 Black Black Slate 15 40 29 Voice Path Green Slate Black 15 30 Red Yellow Blue 16 41 31 Data Path Yellow Blue Yellow 16 32 Black Yellow Orange 17 42 33 Orange Yellow 17 34 Yellow Green 18 43 35 Green Yell...

Page 218: ...oduction date of the system Notification To Telephone Company Unless a telephone operating company provides and installs the system the telephone operating company which provides the lines must be notified before a connection is made to them The lines telephone numbers involved the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number must be provided to the telephone company The FCC registrat...

Page 219: ...nvironment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and television reception in which case the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct...

Page 220: ... then causes its ring generator to generate ringing to the station being called When a station answers the ringing the circuit is completed as it is for outgoing calls Because ground start lines are controlled at both ends they are capable of release supervision that provides a sure means of determining when a distant party hangs up his or her telephone This is very important in applications where...

Page 221: ...med for pulse dialing Wink Signalling With this signalling method the called DXP Plus places a momentary signal reversal wink on its M lead to alert the calling DXP Plus system that it is ready to receive information The calling DXP Plus controls the status of the M lead and watches for a return signal from the called DXP Plus on the E lead A wink occurs when the called DXP Plus is ready to receiv...

Page 222: ...eptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe work area on which to place the cabinet You should supply yourself with a static discharge wrist strap and wear it every time you handle electronic circuit boards eit...

Page 223: ...ultipurpose line boards connect to any universal slot NOTE On DXP Plus systems do not install a multipurpose line board at the right most board slot in the second or lower expansion cabinet The system reserves this slot for internal use 6 If you are installing the line board in an operating system connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 to the precharge jack on the ...

Page 224: ...c Discharge Wrist Strap Power Supply Pre charge Port Multipurpose Line Board Pre charge Port Pre charge Cable For Board Installation During Power Up PLUS054 Installing The Multipurpose Line Board IMI89 192 Installing The Multipurpose Line Board 5 ...

Page 225: ...ils Rapid Flash Malfunctioning on board processor Off with repeated 5 second blink on Normal operation with all idle lines On with repeated 5 second blink off Normal operation with at least one busy line lf a line is active but the LED is showing off with repeated 5 second blink on check the wiring for poor connections Three Rapid Flashes On Followed By 2 5 seconds Off One or more lines out of ser...

Page 226: ...ose Line Board Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Line 2 Line 1 Line 3 Line 4 Loop Start and Ground Start Loop Start and Ground Start Loop Start Gnd Start and E M Voice Loop Start Gnd Start and E M Voice Loop Start and Ground Start Loop Start and Ground Start Loop Start and Ground Start Loop Start and Ground Start E M Control For Line 3 E M Control For Line 4 Auxiliary Equipme...

Page 227: ...requires timing circuits equal to its capacity For example a 16 station board requires 16 timing circuits an eight line loop start line board requires eight circuits and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits In the DXP Plus each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot you can place any station or line board at any slo...

Page 228: ...und Start Green Red 8 16 Ring Red Brown 9 34 17 Brown Red 9 18 Red Slate 10 35 19 Slate Red 10 20 Black Blue 11 36 21 Blue Black 11 22 Black Orange 12 37 23 Orange Black 12 24 Black Green 13 38 25 M 3 E M Control for Line 3 Green Black 13 26 E Black Brown 14 39 27 M 4 E M Control for Line 4 Brown Black 14 28 E Black Slate 15 40 29 Slate Black 15 30 Yellow Blue 16 41 31 Blue Yellow 16 32 Yellow Ora...

Page 229: ...er is required to notify the telephone company when final disconnection of this equipment from the telephone company line occurs Compatibility With Telephone Network When necessary the telephone operating company provides information on the maximum number of telephones or ringers that can be connected to one line as well as any other applicable technical information The telephone operating company...

Page 230: ...t Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and television reception in which case the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the inte...

Page 231: ...lus Typically you will need one DTMF receiver for every six lines This ratio indicates that you need to add one DTMF receiver card for each DXPT1 board that is configured for 24 DID or E M lines In high traffic situations you may need additional DTMF receiver cards For information on DTMF receiver card installation see IMI89 186 Installing A DTMF Receiver In The DXP Plus Digital Communications Sys...

Page 232: ...and immediate dial dial pulse only Dialing can be tone or dial pulse 1 2 Understanding The DXOPT SYN Synchronization Card The DXOPT SYN card uses a reference timing frequency of 8 KHz that it derives from the 1 544 MHz frequency supplied to the DXPT1 board by the central office CO or other external source By referencing this 8 KHz with 8 KHz timing derived internally the master 16 384 MHz voltage ...

Page 233: ... an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe work area on which to place the cabinet You should supply yourself with a static discharge wrist strap and wear it every time you handle electronic circuit boa...

Page 234: ...e standard superframe SF configuration for most customer applications However special customer needs may require that you reset one or more of these switches using the procedure given below 1 Obtain a static discharge wrist strap supplied with the main DXP cabinet and attach it to one of your wrists Make sure to adjust the strap for a snug fit against your skin do not apply the strap over any of y...

Page 235: ...d Hole LIU SW1 SW2 0 0 0 1 1 1 Default 1 2 3 4 Default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 See Table 3 See Table 1 See Table 2 Diagnostic Switches and LEDs For Factory Use Only Installing The DXPT1 Line Board IMI89 193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board 5 ...

Page 236: ...respectively The extended superframe format extends the framing boundaries to include 24 frames The ESF format provides improved maintenance capability over the SF format In this format 24 framing bits or 8 Kb s are available to provide the following framing synchronization 2 Kb s facility data link FDL 4 Kb s CRC 6 error check 2 Kb s The robbed bits from the 6th 12th 18th and 24th frames are used...

Page 237: ...rror free digital data transmission Both ends of the communications link must be configured to use B8ZS B8ZS is a feature designed for future requirements 3 1 6 Fractional T1 Fractional T1 is when you use only a portion of a T1 trunk as needed On the DXP Plus you must set DIP switches SW1 7 and SW1 8 for 24 channel operation This setting allows the system to pass error information end to end when ...

Page 238: ...y the T1 signal origin as being either from customer premise equipment CPE or carrier equipment such as a CSU Set C R to be a zero 0 bit for customer premise equipment CPE or when using an external CSU default Set C R to be a one 1 bit if the network requires the T1 internal CSU to be classified as carrier equipment 3 2 3 Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC 6 This is a method for checking the accuracy of ...

Page 239: ... default 1 FDL YELLOW ALARM DURING ANSI MESSAGES disabled enabled 6 0 default 1 B8ZS COFA LED DEFINITION COFA change of frame alignment B8ZS detect 7 8 0 0 default 0 1 1 0 1 1 MANUAL loopback REQUEST no loopback local loopback request remote loopback request payload loopback request ESF only NOTE When changing DIP switch SW2 2 or SW2 5 you must reset the board before the switch is read With power ...

Page 240: ...XPT1 line boards connect to any universal slot NOTE On DXP Plus systems do not install a DXPT1 line board at the right most board slot in the second or lower expansion cabinet The system reserves this slot for internal use 6 If you are installing the DXPT1 line board in an operating system connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 to the precharge jack on the line boa...

Page 241: ...p Connect board to any universal board slot Universal board slots 1 9 Universal board slots 1 10 DO NOT install boards in last slot on right in lower expansion cabinet Static discharge wrist strap Pre charge jack PLUS011A Installing The DXPT1 Board Installing The DXPT1 Line Board IMI89 193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board 11 ...

Page 242: ...rive the repeater Repeaters normally operate best with 7 5 to 23 dB input signals Arrange LIU switches 2 3 and 4 to set the transmit signal level 0 dB is default IMPORTANT CAUTION To help ensure that external over voltage surges do not damage the system Comdial engineers suggest that you install a properly grounded gas discharge tube or a similar primary protection device on the T1 trunk where it ...

Page 243: ...oard No connections are allowed to pins 7 or 8 Issue 2 boards ONLY NOTE 1 R1 R C1 Receive C1 Transmit T1 T 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Connecting The TI Trunk To The DXPT1 Circuit Board Installing The DXPT1 Line Board IMI89 193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board 13 ...

Page 244: ...than 200 feet use a low capacitance cable data grade cable having two twisted solid conductor wire pairs with shielding The type of cable with metal shielding covering each twisted pair provides the best immunity from electrical interference Only connect the shielding to earth ground at one end of the cable do not ground the shielding at the other end of the cable When connecting the local DXP Plu...

Page 245: ... board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity For example a 16 station board requires 16 timing circuits an eight line loop start line board requires eight circuits and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits In the DXP Plus each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot you can place any station or line board at ...

Page 246: ...ay from the common equipment cabinet NOTE With the common equipment in the installed position the ground lug on the side of the cabinet is an appropriate grounding point since it should have a heavy ground wire connected between it and a good earth ground CAUTION Do not remove or install the services board while the DXP Plus is powered on or severe system problems may occur 4 Locate the services b...

Page 247: ...Installing The Synchronization Card On The Services Board Installing The DXPT1 Line Board IMI89 193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board 17 ...

Page 248: ...the T1 lines supplied by the primary CO supplier Designate the primary board by placing straps on the DXSRV PLS services board and by setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface boards If you system has only one CO supplier you do not need to designate a secondary board however if the system has a second CO supplier of T1 lines you must designate one DXPT1 board as the secondary board ...

Page 249: ... K 8 Upper Expansion UNV9 J or K 9 Upper Expansion UNV10 J or K 10 Upper Expansion UNV11 J or K 11 Lower Expansion UNV1 L or M 1 Lower Expansion UNV2 L or M 2 Lower Expansion UNV3 L or M 3 Lower Expansion UNV4 L or M 4 Lower Expansion UNV5 L or M 5 Lower Expansion UNV6 L or M 6 Lower Expansion UNV7 L or M 7 Lower Expansion UNV8 L or M 8 Lower Expansion UNV9 L or M 9 Lower Expansion UNV10 L or M 10...

Page 250: ...ll one DXPT1 board in the main cabinet you must strap one pin pair A I on the services board s PRIMARY strap block This strap designates the main cabinet slot where you installed the DXPT1 board Example If you install a DXPT1 board in universal slot two in the main cabinet you must strap pin pair B on the PRIMARY strap block b If you install two or more DXPT1 boards in the main cabinet you must de...

Page 251: ...if you use both expansion cabinets Example If you install two DXPT1 boards in universal slots two and three in the upper expansion cabinet and you designate these boards primary and secondary respectively you must strap pin pair J on the PRIMARY strap block and strap pin pair K on the SECONDARY strap block You also must close SWA 2 and SWB 3 on the upper expansion cabinet s interface board 5 If th...

Page 252: ...lock Strapping Pairs A B C D E F G H I J K L M Secondary Clock Strapping Block PLUS009 J6 J7 Upper Cabinet Lower Cabinet Locating The Services Board Strapping Blocks IMI89 193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board 22 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board ...

Page 253: ...2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 PLUS010 SWA SWB Note SWA 12 and SWB 12 are not used on Interface 2 upper cabinet SWA 11 12 and SWB 11 12 are not used on Interface 3 lower cabinet SWA and SWB switches not in use must be in off open position Locating The Interface Board DIP Switches Installing The DXPT1 Line Board IMI89 193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board 23 ...

Page 254: ...t s backplane CAUTION When pressing circuit boards into place press them only at the extractor lever locations If you apply pressure at other locations you may damage the board assembly 4 Make a final inspection to ensure that the board assembly is oriented correctly and mated properly 5 Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the board assembly to the board cage 6 If applicable plug the...

Page 255: ...rd PAGE BGM MOH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 COMDIAL OPBD3 OUT MAIN CABINET BATTERY OPBD2 ON OK STATUS OPBD1 PLUS006 PRI PRI SEC SEC UNLOCKED SOURCE DXOPT SYN MODE MANUAL AUTO MAN Installing The Services Board Assembly Installing The DXPT1 Line Board IMI89 193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board 25 ...

Page 256: ...link Sync Alarm red LED This LED labeled SYNC LOSS when lit indicates that the frame bit in the received data cannot be found Signal Alarm red LED The signal alarm labeled SIG LOSS turns on to indicate that the DXP has lost its incoming signal Blue Alarm red LED When this alarm indicator is lit the alarm indication signal AIS consisting of all one 1 bits is being received to indicate that the far ...

Page 257: ...W2 8 is indicated by the appropriate LED being lit PRI and SEC green LEDs The PRI and SEC LEDs on the DXOPT SYN card light to indicate where the receive clock reference is originating from the primary or secondary DXPT1 board location When two or more DXPT1 boards are installed you make the primary and secondary assignments via jumpers on the the DXAUX board If only one DXPT1 board is installed yo...

Page 258: ... alignment per SW2 6 l RLB Remote loopback active l LLB Local loopback active l PAYL Payload loopback active Diagnostics codes for factory test only Diagnostics codes for factory test only Diagnostics codes for factory test only Diagnostics codes for factory test only Diagnostics codes for factory test only Diagnostics codes for factory test only Diagnostics codes for factory test only Diagnostics...

Page 259: ...Loopback Local Loopback Payload Loopback Primary Secondary Unlocked Status Manual DXOPT SYN Card Diagnostic Switches and LEDs for Factory Use Only DXPT1 Board PLUS007 Viewing DXPT1 And DXOPT SYN Alarms And Indicators Installing The DXPT1 Line Board IMI89 193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board 29 ...

Page 260: ... adequate notice in writing of any future equipment changes that would make the system incompatible 7 3 Installation Requirements Connection of the electronic key system to the telephone lines must be through a universal service order code USOC outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating company If the installation site does not have the proper outlet ask the telephone company business office ...

Page 261: ...o Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00345 4 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment...

Page 262: ...8 Doc FCC Part 15 UL 1489 CSA safety Yellow Alarm Type Superframe Mode Bit 2 zero in all channels or Japanese 12th frame method selectable Extended Superframe Mode Alternating bytes all zeros and all ones prohibiting ANSI FDL messaging during yellow alarms is selectable Signaling Signaling Protocols Loop Start subscriber end Ground Start subscriber end E M Direct Inward Dial DID Dialing DTMF or Di...

Page 263: ...XPT1 indicates whether the network source or the network span caused the last frame synchronization This indication disregards the first re sync at cold start or a system reset cold start and reset causes the network source to re sync A COFA occurs if the network source does a re sync The COFA is a diagnostic tool that identifies the source of the loss of frame synchronization CPE Carrier Equipmen...

Page 264: ... error packets to the network once a second The packets contain alarm history in accordance with the ANSI T1 403 specification Fractional T1 Fractional T1 is a T1 span where the user uses less than 24 channels The DXPT1 board allocates eight or 16 channels to a fractional T1 but does not reallocate unused channels in the eight 16 or 24 mode to other resources A fractional T1 in ESF mode will nulli...

Page 265: ...ing stream and converting bipolar Alternate Mark Inversion AMI to 5 volt digital logic The LIU also supports the automatic line build out that regulates the transmit level according to the receive strength LIU 2 switch Loop Start T1 Trunk Loop Start T1 Trunk is a network protocol that monitors outbound digits to the DXPT1 board This protocol does not support disconnect supervision Loop start proto...

Page 266: ...op creating the transmit 1 544 MHz frequency is defective For this indicator to be meaningful the DXOPT SYN card must be synchronized no red LEDs on If the DXOPT SYN card is not synchronized you must correct that situation Wink E M DID Protocol State This effect is a quick response by a called system A 1 B 1 to a calling system that seized the line The response indicates that the called system is ...

Page 267: ...Serial Data Modem This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation the Company and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel The information in this manual is subject to change without notice While every effort has been made to eliminate errors the Company disclaims liability for any difficulties arising from the interpretation of the information contained herein The info...

Page 268: ... board This is the default port for the modem When you use this connection you will not need to take any programming action Alternately you can connect the modem to one of the serial data ports provided by the communications card installed on the auxiliary board if one is installed on your system If you use a a serial data port other than the default port you must assign it for modem operation usi...

Page 269: ... Modem In The Main Cabinet Equipment Shelf Serial Port Cord Power Cord Telephone Line Jack Modem Power Jack Default Modem Communications Jack DIP Switches CPU Board PLUS015 Figure 2 Viewing Modem Position And Connection Locations Installing The Serial Data Modem IMI89 185 Installing The Serial Data Modem 3 ...

Page 270: ...tion is Services DTMF Highway If you add these two cards and take this program option you can only add one card to the lower expansion cabinet s interface board discussed in step 2 below 2 The second best choice is to add up to three receiver cards to each expansion cabinet s interface board if one or both is available Remember add only one card to the lower expansion cabinet s interface board if ...

Page 271: ...s DTMF Highway With these additional two cards the services board supports simultaneous dialing of 13 industry standard telephones You can install three receiver cards on the upper and lower expansion cabinet interface boards With three receiver cards installed each interface board supports simultaneous dialing of 12 industry standard telephones CAUTION If you add two additional receiver cards to ...

Page 272: ...w many telephones will dial at the same time in your system you can use the following typical system averages and formula to arrive at a usable estimate A typical telephone system experiences the following call traffic percentages Your system may be similar Light Call Traffic up to 15 percent of the telephones dial simultaneously Moderate Call Traffic up to 20 percent of the telephones dial simult...

Page 273: ...od practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe ...

Page 274: ...t Ground Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The DTMF Receiver Card IMI89 186 Installing The DTMF Receiver Card 5 ...

Page 275: ...rdware and lift the front panel away from the common equipment cabinet 5 Loosen the retaining hardware and remove the services board from the cabinet place it in a static protection bag and transport the board to the static safe work area Do the same for the interface board if you plan to add a receiver card to it Further if the common equipment cabinet contains an auxiliary board and you plan to ...

Page 276: ...nsion Cabinet Interface Board Receiver Card 1 Place Receiver Card 2 Places See Text Details Services Board Receiver Card 1 Place DXOPT TON 2 Places If Programmed See Text Upper Expansion Cabinet Interface Board Receiver Card 3 Places Installing The DTMF Receiver Card IMI89 186 Installing The DTMF Receiver Card 7 ...

Page 277: ... Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines R This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation the Company and is intended for the use of its custome...

Page 278: ...ounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe work area on which to place the cabinet You should supply yourself with a static discharge wrist strap and wear it every time you handle electronic circuit boards either at the cabinet mounting lo...

Page 279: ...und Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The Ring Generator Assembly IMI89 187 Installing The Ring Generator Assembly 3 ...

Page 280: ...nel away from the common equipment cabinet 4 Loosen the retaining screws and remove the power supply assembly from the common equipment cabinet 5 Connect the ring generator assembly to the side panel of the power supply chassis and secure it with the supplied hardware 6 Slide the attached assemblies into the opening at the top right side of the common equipment main cabinet until the assembly s fr...

Page 281: ...g The Ring Generator To The Power Supply Power Supply Assembly Ring Generator Assembly Ring Generator Cable Power Cable PLUS030 Installing The Ring Generator And Power Supply Installing The Ring Generator Assembly IMI89 187 Installing The Ring Generator Assembly 5 ...

Page 282: ...dditional conferencing 1 2 Complying With Underwriters Laboratories Regulations Per The Underwriters Laboratories regulation 1459 2nd edition be aware of the following precautions when installing telephone equipment that is to be directly connected to the telephone company network Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack...

Page 283: ...good practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static saf...

Page 284: ...int Ground Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The Conference Board IMI89 188 Installing The Conference Board 3 ...

Page 285: ...or safe keeping When you are ready to install the circuit board remove it from its static protection bag 5 Locate an unused board slot for conference board installation NOTE On DXP Plus systems do not install a conference board at the right most board slot in the second or lower expansion cabinet The system reserves this slot for internal use 6 If you are installing the conference board in an oper...

Page 286: ...ic Discharge Wrist Strap Power Supply Pre charge Port Conference Board Conference Board Pre charge Port Pre charge Cable For Conference Board Installation During Power Up PLUS023 Installing The Conference Board IMI89 188 Installing The Conference Board 5 ...

Page 287: ...ary board installed in the main cabinet You must take programming action to match the data port number with the installation location that you choose for the communications card The full compliment of 16 undedicated serial data ports requires four installed communications cards 1 1 Communications Card Connections The interface connector between the external device and the communications card is a ...

Page 288: ...d practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe w...

Page 289: ... Ground Creating A Static Safe Work Area Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Earth Ground 1 Meg Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS035 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing The Communications Card IMI89 190 Installing The Communications Card 3 ...

Page 290: ... have a heavy ground wire connected between it and a good earth ground 3 Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back up assembly from the cabinet power supplies 4 Loosen the retaining hardware and remove the host circuit board or boards from the equipment cabinet place it in a static protection bag and transport the board to the static safe work area 5 ...

Page 291: ...ions Card PLUS017 Supplied Hardware 8 Places Interface Board For Upper Expansion Cabinet Communications Card PLUS016 Supplied Hardware 8 Places Interface Board For Lower Expansion Cabinet Communications Card PLUS019 Installing The Communications Card IMI89 190 Installing The Communications Card 5 ...

Page 292: ...o specific locations and you must take programming action to match the data port number with the installation location that you choose for the communications card Serial Data Port Designation DXOPT COM Location Serial data ports 3 10 Lower two slots on the services board Serial data ports 11 18 Lower two slots on upper expansion cabinet interface board or lower expansion cabinet interface board or...

Page 293: ...r Expansion Cabinet Serial Ports 3 6 Serial Ports 7 10 Serial Ports 11 14 Serial Ports 15 18 Services Board Interface Board For Upper Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board Main Cabinet Location ONLY Installing The Communications Card IMI89 190 Installing The Communications Card 7 ...

Page 294: ...verrun and data loss Serial Data Port DXOPT COM Location Maximum Baud Rate Serial data ports 3 10 Lower two slots on the services board 19 200 Baud Serial data ports 11 18 Lower two slots on the upper expansion cabinet interface board or the lower expansion cabinet interface board or the auxiliary board installed in the main cabinet 9600 Baud The maximum distance from a serial data port that you c...

Page 295: ...ear to send status from device to common equipment connection to the device RTS request to send connection NOTE The common equipment requires a positive voltage with respect to signal ground in order to send data If the cable has spare wires be sure to ground them so that they will not act as antennas and induce interference into the system Further if there is a source of RF power nearby such as a...

Page 296: ... Wide Web http www comdial com Accredited by the Dutch Council for Certification for certification and registration activities Comdial s Quality Management System Is Certified To The ISO 9001 Standard IMI89 190 Installing The Communications Card ...

Page 297: ... with three cabinets supporting 472 telephones and containing one line board along with a battery assembly to provide back up power During AC operation the battery assembly accepts re charging current to maintain the voltage potential of its batteries at an operational level NOTE The external battery assembly requires approximately 10 hours to completely re charge to full potential after it has be...

Page 298: ...und path must be of sufficient current carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages which may result in circuit noise hazard to personnel or equipment damage An acceptable earth ground is one such as the service ground for the AC power or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters pumps or insulating sections that have be...

Page 299: ...rminal Grounding Terminal Typical Earth Ground No 6 Solid Copper Wire To Earth Ground From Main Cabinet No 10 or 12 Solid Copper Wire Between Cabinets Grounding The System Installing The External Battery Assembly IMI89 189 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 3 ...

Page 300: ...he battery cabinet on the back side of a standard 23 inch double equipment rack with the common equipment cabinets mounted to the front side of the rack you must attach the charger with its cables pointing away from you to the to the left end of the battery cabinet as you face the cabinet s battery opening To mount the charger chassis 1 Choose the method of battery cabinet mounting and orient the ...

Page 301: ...Mounting the Charger For Double Rack Installations bb480L Screws 3 Places Charger Chasis Wiring Access Plate Battery Cabinet Mounting The Charger For Below Main Cabinet Installations Installing The External Battery Assembly IMI89 189 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 5 ...

Page 302: ...ackboard that supports the DXP Plus common equipment cabinet Be sure that this backboard bridges the studs that support the underlying wall material Securely attach the backboard to the mounting surface Suitable backboards are available commercially or you can construct one out of 3 4 inch plywood You must drive the hardware that secures the backboard to the mounting surface into the underlying wa...

Page 303: ...Mounting The External Battery Assembly BB480a Installing The External Battery Assembly IMI89 189 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 7 ...

Page 304: ...nstall the batteries in the cabinet with their terminals facing the cabinet opening The batteries set in place and you do not need to anchor them to the cabinet PLUS003 Installing The Batteries IMI89 189 Installing The External Battery Assembly 8 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly ...

Page 305: ...h strapping location and install the hardware as shown in the illustration 10 32 Machine Screw 10 Flat Washer Battery Straps Battery Terminal 10 Flat Washer 10 Lockwasher 10 Hex Nut bb480h Attaching The Strapping Hardware BB480c Strapping The Batteries Installing The External Battery Assembly IMI89 189 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 9 ...

Page 306: ...ve terminals to the positive battery post The individual wires that you use to connect the circuit breaker to the battery post are also terminated with a large terminal on one end and a small terminal on the other Connect the smaller terminals to the circuit breaker and the larger terminals to the negative battery post Wire the batteries as shown in the schematic Use the supplied hardware to conne...

Page 307: ...10 32 Machine Screw Wire Terminal Battery Terminal Wire Terminal 10 Flat Washer 10 Lockwasher 10 Hex Nut bb480i Attaching The Wiring Hardware Installing The External Battery Assembly IMI89 189 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 11 ...

Page 308: ...cabinets 3 The battery assembly includes a charger that maintains the batteries at full charge Once you have installed the battery assembly connect its AC power cord to the same AC outlet surge protector that powers the DXP Plus main common equipment cabinet Connecting The Battery Back Up Assembly To The System PLUS004 Circuit Breaker Power Line Surge Protector Dedicated AC Outlet IMI89 189 Instal...

Page 309: ...ging voltage must be 35 volts maximum If the charging voltage is low or if the voltage of a freshly charged battery assembly is no greater than 30 volts contact your technical service representative Green Status Lights On Batteries fully charges 32 V On AC power on 34 5 GND 34 5 GND 34 5 Volts 34 5 Volts Fuse 5 AMP slow blow type On Batteries low 27 V On Batteries under charged 30 V PLUS002 Measur...

Page 310: ...l communications system only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this publication Observe proper polarity orientation when installing the batteries Do not mix old and new batteries in the external battery assembly Do not mix batteries of different sizes or from different manufacturers in this product NOTICE This symbol when encountered on the equipment cabinet or on ot...

Page 311: ...ly assembly is protected with a 6 3A 250V slow blow fuse A replacement fuse must have the same rating NOTE Both the switchable power supply assembly employ electronic switching circuitry in their design During operation power supplies of this type generate an audible sound from their switching regulators This sound is normal and is not an indication that the power supply is operating improperly R ...

Page 312: ...earth ground A good earth ground is one such as the ground bus in the premises AC power panel or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters pumps or insulating sections that have been added for vibration reduction Avoid using the premises structural steel frame as it may not be at earth ground potential Use 10 12 or larger insul...

Page 313: ...Terminal Grounding Terminal Typical Earth Ground No 6 Solid Copper Wire To Earth Ground From Main Cabinet No 10 or 12 Solid Copper Wire Between Cabinets Grounding The System Installing The Switchable Power Supply IMI89 196 Installing The Switchable Power Supply 3 ...

Page 314: ...the power supply assembly Slide the switch actuator to the setting that matches the AC source voltage available at the installation site CAUTION Be sure that you set the power supply for the proper source voltage An improper setting can result in equipment damage Voltage Selector Switch Slide Actuator To Setting That Matches The AC Source Volage PLUS076 Matching The Source Voltage IMI89 196 Instal...

Page 315: ...ccording to the requirements for your plug open the plug and slide its outer shell onto the line cord connect the ground neutral and line wires according to the requirements for your plug if your plug includes a clamp tighten it on the line cord reassemble the plug Test the installation for open and short circuits using an ohm meter L3 L1 L2 Neutral Blue Ground Green Yellow Line Brown L1 L2 and L3...

Page 316: ...hardware 3 Slide the power supply into the opening at the top right side of the common equipment main cabinet until the assembly s front panel contacts the side of the cabinet 4 Locate the power cable routed from the backplane and connect it to the power supply s mating connector 5 Remove the four 6 thread forming screws from the hardware bag and secure the power supply assembly to the equipment c...

Page 317: ...same outlet to supply AC power to that assembly s battery charger To provide protection against surges and spikes that may appear on the AC line install a plug in power line surge protector between the AC power cord of the installed equipment and the AC outlet CAUTION DO NOT attach or secure the line cord to the surface of the mounting location in any manner Plug In Power Line Surge Protectors Typ...

Page 318: ...tails are shown in the illustration CAUTION For new installations once you have measured the power supply voltages turn off the AC power switch and disconnect the AC line cord from the outlet Leave the AC power disconnected until you have installed the circuit boards in the equipment cabinet 8 0 Identifying The Fuse The power supply fuse is a slow blow type rated at 6 3 AMPS and 250 VOLTS A replac...

Page 319: ...h On 36 VDC On 5 VDC On 5 VDC On Thermal Overload On Battery Backup Connected Pins 1 2 36 V Ground Pins 3 4 36 VDC Pin 5 5 VDC Pin 6 5 VDC Pin 7 Digital Analog Ground Pin 8 Thermal Overload Signal PLUS070 On Off Switch Fuse 6 3A 250V Slow Blow Type Reset Switch Press If Thermal Overload Indicator Turns On Source Voltage Switch Measuring The Power Supply Voltages Installing The Switchable Power Sup...

Page 320: ... with three cabinets supporting 472 telephones and containing one line board along with a battery assembly to provide back up power During AC operation the battery assembly accepts re charging current to maintain the voltage potential of its batteries at an operational level NOTE The BB480 external battery assembly requires approximately 10 hours to completely re charge to full potential after it ...

Page 321: ...ath must be of sufficient current carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages which may result in circuit noise hazard to personnel or equipment damage An acceptable earth ground is one such as the service ground for the AC power or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters pumps or insulating sections that have been ad...

Page 322: ...l Grounding Terminal Typical Earth Ground No 6 Solid Copper Wire To Earth Ground From Main Cabinet No 10 or 12 Solid Copper Wire Between Cabinets Grounding The System Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly IMI89 197 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 3 ...

Page 323: ...t set the voltage selection switch for that input The switch is located at the lower left edge of the charger chassis Slide the switch actuator to the setting that matches the AC source voltage available at the installation site Voltage Select Switch PLUS074 Matching The Source Voltage IMI89 197 Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly 4 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly ...

Page 324: ... the requirements for your plug open the plug and slide its outer shell onto the line cord connect the ground neutral and line wires according to the requirements for your plug if your plug includes a clamp tighten it on the line cord reassemble the plug Test the installation for open and short circuits using an ohm meter L3 L1 L2 Neutral Blue Ground Green Yellow Line Brown L1 L2 and L3 strip leng...

Page 325: ...ttery cabinet on the back side of a standard 23 inch double equipment rack with the common equipment cabinets mounted to the front side of the rack you must attach the charger with its cables pointing away from you to the to the left end of the battery cabinet as you face the cabinet s battery opening To mount the charger chassis 1 Choose the method of battery cabinet mounting and orient the charg...

Page 326: ...ing the Charger For Double Rack Installations bb480L Screws 3 Places Charger Chasis Wiring Access Plate Battery Cabinet Mounting The Charger For Below Main Cabinet Installations Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly IMI89 197 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 7 ...

Page 327: ...kboard that supports the DXP Plus common equipment cabinet Be sure that this backboard bridges the studs that support the underlying wall material Securely attach the backboard to the mounting surface Suitable backboards are available commercially or you can construct one out of 3 4 inch plywood You must drive the hardware that secures the backboard to the mounting surface into the underlying wall...

Page 328: ...Mounting The Battery Cabinet BB480a Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly IMI89 197 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 9 ...

Page 329: ...l the batteries in the cabinet with their terminals facing the cabinet opening The batteries set in place and you do not need to anchor them to the cabinet PLUS003 Installing The Batteries IMI89 197 Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly 10 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly ...

Page 330: ...apping location and install the hardware as shown in the illustration 10 32 Machine Screw 10 Flat Washer Battery Straps Battery Terminal 10 Flat Washer 10 Lockwasher 10 Hex Nut bb480h Attaching The Strapping Hardware BB480c Strapping The Batteries Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly IMI89 197 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 11 ...

Page 331: ...rminals to the positive battery post The individual wires that you use to connect the circuit breaker to the battery post are also terminated with a large terminal on one end and a small terminal on the other Connect the smaller terminals to the circuit breaker and the larger terminals to the negative battery post Wire the batteries as shown in the schematic Use the supplied hardware to connect th...

Page 332: ...ery Terminal Wire Terminal 10 Flat Washer 10 Lockwasher 10 Hex Nut bb480i Attaching The Wiring Hardware BB480e Installing The Front Cover Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly IMI89 197 Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly 13 ...

Page 333: ...e between the charger cabinet and the power supplies in the DXP Plus main and expansion cabinets 3 The battery back up assembly includes a charger that maintains the batteries at full charge Once you have installed the cabinet assembly connect its AC power cord to the same AC outlet surge protector that powers the DXP Plus main common equipment cabinet Connecting The Battery Assembly To The System...

Page 334: ...ing voltage must be 35 volts maximum If the charging voltage is low or if the voltage of freshly charged batteries is no greater than 30 volts contact your technical service representative Green Status Lights On Batteries fully charges 32 V On AC power on 34 5 GND 34 5 GND 34 5 Volts 34 5 Volts Fuse 5 AMP slow blow type On Batteries low 27 V On Batteries under charged 30 V PLUS002 Measured Voltage...

Page 335: ...gital communications system only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this publication Observe proper polarity orientation when installing the batteries Do not mix old and new batteries in the assembly Do not mix batteries of different sizes or from different manufacturers in this product NOTICE This symbol when encountered on the equipment cabinet or on other installed...

Page 336: ...ormation About Channel State 19 4 8 Using The Hexadecimal Codes For Remote Diagnostics 20 5 Selecting The T1 PAD Settings 21 5 1 Setting T1 Transmit Level 21 5 2 Setting T1 Receive Level 21 6 Solving T1 Problems 21 A APPENDIX A Superframe and Extended Superframe Formats 22 Referring To Other Documents Installing The DXPT1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option IMI89 193 Carrier To Customer Installati...

Page 337: ...icates whether the network source or the network span caused the last frame synchronization This indication disregards the first re sync at cold start or a system reset cold start and reset causes the network source to re sync A COFA occurs if the network source does a re sync The COFA is a diagnostic tool that identifies the source of the loss of frame synchronization CPE Carrier Equipment The DX...

Page 338: ...packets to the network once a second The packets contain alarm history in accordance with the ANSI T1 403 specification Fractional T1 Fractional T1 is a T1 span where the user uses less than 24 channels The DXPT1 board allocates eight or 16 channels to a fractional T1 but does not reallocate unused channels in the eight 16 or 24 mode to other resources A fractional T1 in ESF mode will nullify the ...

Page 339: ...ream and converting bipolar Alternate Mark Inversion AMI to 5 volt digital logic The LIU also supports the automatic line build out that regulates the transmit level according to the receive strength LIU 2 switch Loop Start T1 Trunk Loop Start T1 Trunk is a network protocol that monitors outbound digits to the DXPT1 board This protocol does not support disconnect supervision Loop start protocol su...

Page 340: ...T1 board the unlock alarm LED is always off If this LED is on it indicates that the phase lock loop creating the transmit 1 544 MHz frequency is defective For this indicator to be meaningful the DXOPT SYN card must be synchronized no red LEDs on If the DXOPT SYN card is not synchronized you must correct that situation Wink E M DID Protocol State This effect is a quick response by a called system A...

Page 341: ...or 1 on frames 4 8 12 16 20 24 2 Kbps 12 maintenance bits m 4 Kbps 6 CRC error checking bits c if enabled 2 Kbps Therefore all of the 24 non user bits frame maintenance and error checking use a bandwidth of 8 Kbps out of the total bandwidth of 1 544 Mbps The A and B signalling bits are inserted over the least significant bits LSB of each channel in the 6th and 12th frame respectively This does not...

Page 342: ...th modular jacks to connect to the DXPT1 See section 4 in Installing The DXPT1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option IMI89 193 for more instructions Pins 7 and 8 must be open at the DXP Plus end for DXPT1 Issue 2 while Issue 3 boards and above will not require pins 7 and 8 to be open A smart jack often connects pins 7 and 8 to chassis ground If the chassis ground is connected at the smart jack the D...

Page 343: ...mode only and it will always be off default unless the network requires the facility data link messages to be a different ID The default is customer premise equipment If the network requests that the messages have a carrier type header ID turn the switch on and reset the board This will probably never need to be on SW2 4 is for reporting CRC errors in the ESF mode if the network has the ability to...

Page 344: ...d is presented You can strap the board so that one T1 clock source is the primary clock reference and another T1 source is the secondary clock reference The secondary clock reference is then used in case the primary span fails If only one T1 board is installed we recommend that you strap the auxiliary board so that the one T1 source is serving as both the primary and secondary reference Otherwise ...

Page 345: ...wing tables When the function involves a user dialing a number with a rotary dial the signalling bit designated by DP in the following tables represents the dial pulse make 1 break 0 For a ground start protocol the signalling bit representing a dial pulse will be a digital one 1 when a tone dial is used in place of a rotary dial NOTE In the table below an X is a don t care Signalling can be a 1 or...

Page 346: ... ring ground PBX loop closed Dial pulsing Dialing CMPL INCOMING CALL Idle CO grounds tip Ringing interval PBX presents call PBX answers call Normal talking STAT DISCONNECT PBX Talking state PBX opens loop CO removes tip ground CO ABANDONS INCOM Talking State CO removes tip ground PBX opens loop PBX ABANDONS BEFORE CO HAS RETURNED TIP GROUND PBX waiting tip ground PBX removes ring ground 0 0 0 0 1 ...

Page 347: ...BX presents call PBX answers call Normal talking STAT DISCONNECT PBX PBX opens loop Idle CO ABANDONS INCOM CO applies ring Interval between ring CO abandons PBX stop presenting 0 1 DP 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 X X X 1 0 1 1 1 Waiting for dial tone 1 vs DP for DTMF IMI89 207 Troubleshooting The DXPT1 Installation 12 Tro...

Page 348: ... the clear pushbutton Leaving any of the switches on will not cause any operational problems Since the operation is cryptic the customer normally doesn t use the diagnostic monitor Functions of the port are to simplify problem solving in the field 4 1 1 Determining Channel Number The letters ABCDE in switch positions 4 through 8 are used to designate a channel number in many of the tables used on ...

Page 349: ...1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Provide results of all self tests run during system start up cold start E1 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 4 2 2 Reading The Cold Start Information From The LEDs The Table below shows the cold start information that is revealed by the LEDs LED 1 is at the top LEDs LED DEFINITIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON Not used SF mode ESF mode Always ...

Page 350: ...F REQUEST HEX CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Provide the dB range of the received signal strength FF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 4 3 2 Reading The Received Signal Strength Information From The LEDs The Table below shows the received signal strength information that is revealed by the LEDs LED 1 is at the top LEDs LED DEFINITIONS HEX CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LEDs 1 through 4 not used off OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON...

Page 351: ... SW1 Provide the DIP switch settings for SW1 Provide the DIP switch settings for LIU Provide the DIP switch settings for the diagnostic switches the diagnostic LEDs simply mirror the switch settings that is LEDs 5 and 8 should be lit 01 03 07 09 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFFO OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 4 4 2 Reading The DIP Switch Sett...

Page 352: ...hip between the 24 different letter groups and channel numbers For remote operation determine the corresponding hex code from Table 1 SWITCH SETTINGS TYPE OF REQUEST HEX CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Provide AB signalling on the channel designated by ABCDE See section 4 1 1 see Table 1 OFF OFF ON A B C D E 4 5 2 Reading The AB Signalling Information From The LEDs The Table below shows samples of the AB sig...

Page 353: ...t letter groups and channel numbers For remote operation determine the corresponding hex code from Table 1 Switch 1 is the top switch SWITCH SETTINGS TYPE OF REQUEST HEX CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Provide information about trunk assignments on the channel specified by the letters ABCDE see the table in section 4 1 1 see Table 1 ON OFF ON A B C D E 4 6 2 Reading The Trunk Assignment Information From The ...

Page 354: ...ction 4 1 1 for the relationship between the 24 different letter groups and channel numbers For remote operation determine the corresponding hex code from Table 1 Switch 1 is the top switch SWITCH SETTINGS TYPE OF REQUEST HEX CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Provide information about the state of the channel specified by the letters ABCDE see the table in section 4 1 1 see Table 1 ON ON OFF A B C D E 4 7 2 Re...

Page 355: ... 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 01 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 ...

Page 356: ... T1 option is first installed The SLIP red LED on the DXPT1 board is lit indicating frame slips are occurring Echos are heard Associated multiplexer mux equipment may be defective if installed between the DXP and the central office CO Incorrect trunk assignments For example ground start idle bits will cause seizes on DID and E M trunk assignments Channel not assigned and not disabled All LEDs will...

Page 357: ... Options Frame Number Bit Term Signal Traffic SignalTT signalling Number Frame Frame Channel F1 F2 1 0 1 1 8 2 193 0 1 8 3 386 0 1 8 4 579 0 1 8 5 772 1 1 8 6 965 1 1 7 8 A 7 1158 0 1 8 8 1351 1 1 8 9 1544 1 1 8 10 1737 1 1 8 11 1930 0 1 8 12 2123 0 1 7 8 B NOTES 1 Frame 1 transmitted first 2 Frames 6 and 12 are denoted signalling frames 3 Option T Traffic bit 8 not used for robbed bit signalling ...

Page 358: ...1 7 8 A A C 19 3474 m 1 8 20 3667 1 1 8 21 3860 m 1 8 22 4053 C6 1 8 23 4246 m 1 8 24 4439 1 1 7 8 A B D NOTES 1 Frame 1 transmitted first 2 Frames 6 12 18 and 24 are denoted signalling frames 3 FPS Framing Pattern Sequence 001011 4 DL 4KBits s Data Link Message Bits m 5 CRC CRC6 Cyclic Redundancy Check Bits C1 C6 6 Option T Traffic Bit 8 not used for Robbed Bit signalling 7 Option 2 2 State signa...

Page 359: ...without notice While every effort has been made to eliminate errors the Company disclaims liability for any difficulties arising from the interpretation of the information contained herein The information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment or to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation operation or maintenance S...

Page 360: ...ery byte in the the scratch RAM area If an error occurs the system displays a message stating that the test failed Scratch RAM is considered the working area of memory for the DXP s microprocessor This area of memory is volatile which means that any data in this area is lost when the system loses power 2 4 NonVolatile RAM test This test checks the integrity of the NOV RAM area of memory The NOV RA...

Page 361: ... in the following chart Receiver Card Location Main Cabinet Auxiliary Board Services Board see note Upper Expansion Cabinet Interface Board Upper Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board 1 Upper Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board 2 Lower Expansion Cabinet Interface Board see note Lower Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board 1 Lower Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board 2 CPU Board no receiver card required NOTE If...

Page 362: ...em will re initialize the modem after a loss of power or reset The standard Hayes compatible initialize string that the system sends is AT SO 1 M0 Q1 E0 Programmers can alter this string if needed through system programming Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products Switch 8 Used for software upgrades At initial power up after a software up grade this switch causes the system ...

Page 363: ...Automatic Call Distributor Technical Manual R QuickQ DXP ...

Page 364: ...al Communications Commission helpful How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00345 4 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection again...

Page 365: ...Personal Computer To The DVA 3 2 Connecting The Personal Computer To The DXP 3 4 Connecting The DXP To The DVA 3 6 Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY 3 8 Connecting AC Power To The DVA 3 8 Reviewing The System Interconnection 3 9 Section 4 Programming The DXP Digital Communications System 4 1 Programming The DXP System Parameters 4 1 Programming the DXP Line Parameters 4 2 Programming The Serial Data...

Page 366: ...ponents 6 1 DVA Motherboard 6 1 IDE Controller 6 1 Floppy Back Up 6 1 Power Supply 6 1 Reviewing The Voice Channel Card 6 2 Reviewing The I O Board 6 4 Section 7 Testing And Troubleshooting 7 1 Testing The DVA Installation 7 1 Testing Voice Channel Cards 7 2 Testing The QuickQ Software 7 2 During Initial QuickQ Programming 7 2 During QuickQ Operation 7 2 Examining The Enable QuickQ Status Utility ...

Page 367: ...upervisor manager Sign in Window 5 3 Figure 5 4 Viewing The Technician Window 5 3 Figure 5 5 Viewing The System Setup Window 5 4 Figure 5 6 Viewing The ACD Line Setup Window 5 5 Figure 5 7 Viewing The LCD Line Setup Add Window 5 6 Figure 5 8 Viewing The Edit QuickQ Line Setup Window 5 7 Figure 5 9 Viewing The Voice Port Configuration Window 5 9 Figure 5 10 Viewing The Printer Setup Window 5 10 Fig...

Page 368: ... the description of the QuickQ DVA components Section 7 Testing and Troubleshooting Provides the test procedure to setup QuickQ and provides information on troubleshooting problems on QuickQ Section 8 Installing The New Voice Channel Cards Provides information on how to install additional cards Appendix 1 Using QuickQ With A Mouse Describes mouse usage with the QuickQ system Appendix 2 Reviewing T...

Page 369: ... The four primary functions of QuickQ are as follows 1 It provides a waiting queue to ensure that callers are answered in the order that they are received and with the appropriate priority Because of this the system handles calls in a more timely and efficient manner 2 The system can provide a number of pre recorded announcements to play to the calling customers if no agent is available to entice ...

Page 370: ...cation link allows the PC to control the messages being played on the voice channels Detailing The QuickQ Basic Options QuickQ is available in two packages The station capacity of the two packages differ but the feature availability of each package is the same Both packages include real time status display screen of information that the system continuously updates every three seconds This display ...

Page 371: ...g calls and plays out pre recorded voice announcements The Central Call Processor The Central Call Processor is the brain of the QuickQ It is a DOS based 486 type computer system that controls and monitors call traffic throughout the QuickQ system with special purpose software programs Refer to Section 2 for a detailed description of the Central Call Processor hardware requirements The ACD Telepho...

Page 372: ... F10 F11 F12 Tab Cap Lock Shift Ctrl Alt Back Space Insert Home PgUp Delete End PgDn Q W E R T Y U I O P A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M Enter Shift Alt Ctrl _ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Num Lock Caps Lock Scroll Lock Digital LCD speakerphones with interactive buttons Central Call Processor Central Office Lines Station ports Serial Data port Serial Data port Serial Data port Introducing The QuickQ System...

Page 373: ... and memory Those product codes are as follows ACDXP KIT for DXP DXP Software card ACPLS KIT for DXP Plus DXP Plus software DXP Plus memory board Installation cable kit product PK030 000 that includes the following packaged assemblies Package Item Contents PK030 001 ACD Mod Jack 1 Standard six position modular jack 1 Standard three pair line cord six wires with the standard roll in the pin out fro...

Page 374: ...t flow for cooling purposes Because of the current listing requirements of UL 1459 the length of the AC line cord on the equipment cabinet is a maximum length of five feet therefore the cabinet must be located within four feet of a proper electrical outlet The equipment requires a dedicated 117VAC 15 AMP circuit with a third wire ground supplied to a standard electrical outlet NEMA 5 15R Be sure t...

Page 375: ...t and mark the location of the two upper mounting holes 4 Drill holes in the mounting surface of a proper size to accommodate the hardware being used If necessary prepare these holes with inserts anchors or other attachment devices as dictated by the type of mounting surface 5 Insert the two top screws into the mounting surface and tighten them to within approximately 3 16 inch of the surface 6 Ha...

Page 376: ...tion modular jack 1 Modular to 25 pin EIA adapter with female DB25 connector 1 Standard three pair line cord six wires with the standard roll in the pin out from one end to the other PK030 003 ACD DB9S 1 Standard six position modular jack 1 Modular to 9 pin EIA adapter with female DB9 connector 1 Standard three pair line cord six wires with the standard roll in the pin out from one end to the othe...

Page 377: ...d modular to 9 pin EIA adapter to the jack you installed in step 1 per the following house wiring table House Wiring Table QuickQ 66 Type Connector Block Kit Supplied Type 625A 6 Moduar Jack Clip Terminal Terminal Name Pins 45 RXD 4 46 TXD 3 47 no connection 2 48 GND 5 49 DTR 1 50 DSR 6 QUICK004 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 Front View of 6 Conductor Modular Jack Rear View of 9 Pin Female EIA Conn...

Page 378: ...28 29 30 31 32 45 46 48 49 50 Station 1 Station 1 Station 2 Station 2 Station 3 Station 3 Station 4 Station 4 Station 5 Station 5 Station 6 Station 6 Station 7 Station 7 Station 8 Station 8 Station 9 Station 9 Station 10 Station 10 Station 11 Station 11 Station 12 Station 12 Station 13 Station 13 Station 14 Station 14 Station 15 Station 15 Station 16 Station 16 RXD TXD GND DTR DSR B W W B O W W O ...

Page 379: ...the PC to a serial data port on a communications card for more information on communications card installation see IMI89 190 7 Using a kit supplied line cord connect the modular to 25 pin EIA adapter that you installed in step 5 to the modular jack you installed in step two 8 Connect the QuickQ PROTECKEY to the computer s 25 pin parallel connector House Wiring Table Link Assembly From DXP To 66 Bl...

Page 380: ... 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTE When using the 9 pin connector install a 9 to 25 pin adapter between connector and software key Customer Supplied 9 to 25 Pin Adapter Typical 14 25 1 1 6 9 5 13 VIEW C VIEW C VIEW C VIEW B VIEW A VIEW D Standard 6 conductor Line Cord 1 NC 2 GND 3 RD 4 TD 5 RTS 6 CTS 1 NC 2 TD 3 RD 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 7 GND 20 DTR 1 NC 2 RD 3 TD 4 DTR 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 9 NC 1 6 14 ...

Page 381: ...n step 1 DXP Station Connector Block Clip Terminals Typical 25 Pair Cable QuickQ Supplied Connector Block Clip Terminals DVA Voice Port DVA Voice Channel Card 1 white blue 1 1 1 2 blue white 2 3 white orange 3 2 4 orange white 4 5 white green 5 3 6 green white 6 7 white brown 7 4 8 brown white 8 9 white slate 9 5 2 10 slate white 10 11 red blue 11 6 12 blue red 12 13 red orange 13 7 14 orange red ...

Page 382: ...O G W W G W B B W W O O W W G G W QuickQ Supplied Connector Block QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Station 1 Station 1 Station 2 Station 2 Station 3 Station 3 Station 4 Station 4 Station 5 Station 5 Station 6 Station 6 Station 7 Station 7 Station 8 Station 8 St...

Page 383: ...ground supplied to a non switched standard electrical outlet NEMA 5 15R for the AC power connection For added equipment protection connect a plug in power line surge protector between the power cord and the AC outlet Be sure that the DVA is switched off and connect the AC power per this procedure 1 plug the female end of the AC power cord into the power supply receptacle located on the left side o...

Page 384: ...n 15 Station 16 Station 16 RXD TXD GND DTR DSR B W W B O W W O G W W G W B B W W O O W W G G W QuickQ Supplied Connector Block QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Station 1 Station 1 Station 2 Station 2 Station 3 Station 3 Station 4 Station 4 Station 5 Station 5 S...

Page 385: ...cations system Programming The DXP System Parameters Feature Name QuickQ Parameter Synchronized Ringing No Auto Attendant Immediate Transfer No Automatic Route Selection Disabled System Status Reporting Disabled Central Message Desk None IST Ringing Per Phase 8 Operator Station Master Line Disconnect Automatic Camp On Disabled Automatic Station Relocation Disabled Default Relocation Response Yes D...

Page 386: ...coming No Incoming Cost Delay No Delay Incoming Cost Route 32 Dialing Mode Tone Abandon Hold Release 350 Ms Positive Disconnect Time 2 Sec Toll Groups 1 DTMF Level Normal Disconnect Supervision Yes Caller ID Active Yes ExecuMail ID Line Group 1 16 Highlighted Features Critical Settings Programming The Serial Data Ports Feature Name Port Baud Out Baud In Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Flow Control Quic...

Page 387: ...e No Exclusive Hold No Executive Override No Executive Override Block No Idle Line Preference No IST Distinctive Ringing No LCD Messaging No Meet Me Page No Message Deposit No Message Wait Originate No Music On Intercom Hold No Music Paging Receive No Paging Transmit No Ringing Preference No Day Route Access 4 Night Route Access 4 Day Restriction Level 1 Night Restriction Level 1 System Speed Dial...

Page 388: ...e No Exclusive Hold No Executive Override No Executive Override Block No Idle Line Preference No IST Distinctive Ringing No LCD Messaging No Meet Me Page No Message Deposit No Message Wait Originate No Music On Intercom Hold No Music Paging Receive No Paging Transmit No Ringing Preference No Day Route Access 4 Night Route Access 4 Day Restriction Level 1 Night Restriction Level 1 System Speed Dial...

Page 389: ... Observe No Service Observable No Day Exception Number 1 3 Night Exception Number 1 3 SOHVA Beeps 6 SOHVA Groups None Busy On SOHVA No Pick Up Groups 1 Through Dialing No Single Line TAP Call Wait Answer Ring On Busy Yes Allow Ringer Off No Disabled No Consoles Installed No Console Ports None Programming Port No Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy No Headset No Recall Call Forward No Attendant No...

Page 390: ...ception Number 1 3 Night Exception Number 1 3 SOHVA Beeps 6 SOHVA Groups None Busy On SOHVA No Pick Up Groups 1 Through Dialing No Single Line TAP Call Wait Answer Ring On Busy Yes Allow Ringer Off No Disabled No Consoles Installed No Console Ports None Programming Port No Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy No Headset No Recall Call Forward No Attendant No Alternate Attendant None Overflow Atten...

Page 391: ...ing On Busy Yes Allow Ringer Off No Disabled No Consoles Installed No Console Ports None Programming Port No Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy No Headset No Recall Call Forward No Attendant No Alternate Attendant None Overflow Attendant None Extended DTMF Dialing No Softkeys Setup No IST Hold Configuration No Transfer Ring Cadence Cadence 1 Highlighted Features Critical Settings QuickQ uses 16 ...

Page 392: ...A Groups None Busy On SOHVA No Pick Up Groups 1 Through Dialing No Single Line TAP Call Wait Answer Ring On Busy Yes Allow Ringer Off No Disabled No Consoles Installed No Console Ports None Programming Port No Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy No Headset No Recall Call Forward No Attendant No Alternate Attendant None Overflow Attendant None Extended DTMF Dialing No Softkeys Setup No IST Hold Co...

Page 393: ... L11 L23 L12 L24 Ensure that the DVA stations have no lines or features assigned to them blank or unassigned buttons Button Designation Feature Mnemonic Button Designation Feature Mnemonic L01 Group Intercom L13 Headset L02 Group Intercom L14 L03 Line Group 1 L15 L04 Park Orbit 1 L16 L05 Park Orbit 2 L17 L06 Page 1 L18 L07 L19 L08 L20 L09 L21 L10 L22 L11 L23 L12 L24 OAI01 QuickQ button Programming...

Page 394: ...ess to close a message or error window or to close the current window ARROW Press to move the cursor ALT Press and hold while typing an underlined letter to open a window For example to access the sign in menu you can press and hold ALT and then type S The ALT key will move the control from a window back to the menu title bar without closing the window F1 Press to cause a help window to appear CAU...

Page 395: ...lue of 100 will also be in the ID box See Figure 5 2 for an illustration of this 2 Type the technician s ID number default 832 and press the ENTER key The highlight will move to the password box 3 Type the technician s password default 832 and press the ENTER key The supervisor manager sign in window will appear see Figure 5 3 NOTE The system hides the password digits when you type them Figure 5 2...

Page 396: ...r shows a series of four options see Figure 5 4 Selecting agent title manager will allow access to the manager window Further description shown in System Manager s Guide Figure 5 3 Viewing The Supervisor Manager Sign In Window Figure 5 4 Viewing The Technician Window Setting Up The Personal Computer IMI66 109 Section Five Setting Up The Personal Computer 5 3 ...

Page 397: ...DXP digital station port then press the ENTER key For the Master 2 extension enter the intercom number of a second unassigned DXP digital station port The cursor will advance to the OAI code option Select the OAI code to use for QuickQ 01 64 The number that you use here must match the number that you assigned to the agent and supervisor s telephone in station class of service button mapping 3 To s...

Page 398: ...of unscreened transfers 3 Subgroup This catagory usually remains at its default value of LNGP1 unless the site has several line types such as WATS FX Local and you must differentiate between them 4 Line Number This is the DXP line port enter it in a four character format for example line 1 L001 Use this procedure to add lines to the QuickQ system 1 Open the technician access level and select the s...

Page 399: ...eports and displays it on the ACD agents telephones when QuickQ presents the line to the telephone These line names do not affect the DXP names for the lines 6 Highlight the Line No box enter the three digit number for the DXP line port where you have physically connected the line and press the ENTER key Make sure that the line number matches the name you assinged in the DXP 7 To save the line pro...

Page 400: ...s the arrow keys to highlight the line to be deleated and press the ENTER key The edit QuickQ line setup window will open see Figure 5 8 4 To delete the selected line press and hold the ALT key and press the D key The delete line window will open Highlight Yes and press the ENTER key to delete the line 5 Press and hold the ALT key and then press the S key to save programming to the hard drive Sele...

Page 401: ... selection press the ENTER key and press the TAB key to select the group required 5 To move the selected line to a different line subgroup press the TAB key once to advance the highlight to the subgroup column Press the arrow keys to change between the subgroups Press the TAB key to select the subgroup required Alternately you can press the ENTER key to display the list of the subgroups use the ar...

Page 402: ...tween the not used and voice option press the up or down arrow key Press the TAB key to select the option required Alternately press the ENTER key and the not used and voice options will appear Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the selection required and press the ENTER key Press the TAB key to select the option required NOTE Not used disables the voice port and voice enables the voice p...

Page 403: ...red printer and press the TAB key to select it The highlight will move to the printer port selections CAUTION To ensure reliable printout results only use those data printers that the menu lists Data printers other than the ones listed on the menu may not interface properly with the QuickQ software 4 To select the printer port press the up or down arrow keys to highlight the required port and pres...

Page 404: ...er call processing occurs outside the QuickQ environment 1 After you have opened the technician access level use the arrow keys to highlight the integration setup option and press the ENTER key to select the feature 2 The display highlights the external overflow selection Press the ENTER key to select the feature 3 To assign the overflow extensions press the TAB key to select the desired overflow ...

Page 405: ...e with Close Up software are shown in the following list echo off prompt p g PATH C DOS C C quickq C qemm loadhi c mouse mouse loadhi c closeup6 chostl comx combase 3e8 comirq 5 Noterm cd quickq delay 120 IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO EXIT quickq EXIT The contents of the AUTOEXEC BAT file without Close Up software are shown in the following list echo off prompt p g PATH C DOS C C quickq C qemm loadhi c mou...

Page 406: ...rorlevel 1 goto exit scandisk c autofix nosummary datechk if errorlevel 1 goto month1 goto month0 month1 defrag c f month0 booting goto begin data echo Restoring data files copy a dat if exist bak del bak goto begin exit scandisk c autofix nosummary Setting Up The Personal Computer IMI66 109 Section Five Setting Up The Personal Computer 5 13 ...

Page 407: ...e DVA motherboard This card provides the interface between the DVA motherboard and the computer s RS 232 serial communication link and also provides the control on the Floppy Back up Floppy Back Up The floppy back up is used to store the digital announcements on a 3 1 2 1 44 Megabyte MB floppy disk in the case of a power failure to the DVA The DVA automatically restores messages from the floppy di...

Page 408: ...eans that you can not skip a channel If you need to add or replace a voice channel card you must turn the power off while you make the installation By changing the card select jumper J2 and J3 Figure 6 3 you can select the different voice channels see Table 6 1 for details Example If you set the jumpers for CARD 0 the first of four voice channels becomes Voice Channel 1 This corresponds to voice c...

Page 409: ...J3 Exploded Side View Jumper Strap 1 0 LSB 1 0 MSB LED Power Indicator Voice Channel Connector QVCC Figure 6 2 Reviewing The QuickQ Voice Channel Card Reviewing The QuickQ Components IMI66 109 Section 6 Reviewing The QuickQ DVA 6 3 ...

Page 410: ...mmunication link to the computer through a male 50 pin connector There is lightning surge protection built in the I O board to protect the DVA components QIOC SERIAL AMPHENOL CONNECTOR VOICE CHANNEL SERIAL CONNECTOR 1 2 3 4 Figure 6 3 Reviewing The QuickQ I O Board IMI66 109 Section 6 Reviewing The QuickQ Components 6 4 Reviewing The QuickQ DVA ...

Page 411: ...cording Quit stop the test Recording STOP STOP stop recording Listen for tone that indicates stop recording You can play a recorded message to verify that a voice card is functioning properly Message 1 REC PLAY Quit PLAY play message 1 Playing STOP Record and play back a message at each voice channel of every voice channel card Examining Typical Problems Problem 1 When selecting VOICE to test voic...

Page 412: ...e ID and press the ENTER key Problem 2 After you have entered the proper ID and password the system access window will not open Solution You may have entered an extra digit into the ID or password Press the ESC key to close the Sign In window and clear the ID and password Re open the Sign In window re enter the ID and press the ENTER key Then re type the password and press the ENTER key During Qui...

Page 413: ...a problem with the RS 232 serial data communication link Check all serial communication wiring plus be sure the DVA is powered on Voice Ports not initializedThis indicates a problem with a voice port card that you have programmed as a message channel Check the wiring between the DVA and the DXP station port Also check the QuickQ message channel and extension length programming for the voice port e...

Page 414: ...r supervisor entering password REJECT Supervisor reject request for help SIGN_IN Agent or supervisor signing in S_MODE Supervisor changing mode of operation S_PLAY Supervisor playing message S_RECORD Supervisor recording message S_STOP Supervisor stop playing or recording message WRAP_UP Agent has ended call and is in wrap_up state The call state that will appear are shown below C_ANSWER_STATE Cal...

Page 415: ...one C_HOLD_STATE Call on hold by agent C_IDLE_STATE No call activity NO CALL No call activity C_MESSAGE_STATE Call listening to announcement C_MUSIC_STATE Call listening to music On hold tone or silence C_OUT_STATE Outgoing call by agent C_RING_STATE Call processor detects ringing on line Examining The Voice Port Status Utility The voice port status scan is a real time voice port status window Thi...

Page 416: ... voice channel card straight down until it is snugly in place and the metal bracket is flush with the securing bracket 6 Use the two 6 32 1 4 inch machine screws to secure the voice channel card to the DVA chassis 7 Connect the ribbon cable to the voice channel connector Figure 6 4 The red stripe on the ribbon cable indicates Pin 1 on the ribbon connector The voice channel connector on the voice c...

Page 417: ...the left button and immediately release it By clicking you can select an item such as a menu or an icon Note that the top left corner of the screen has a sign in label Use it to perform the following exercise Place the pointer at the sign in title and click the mouse button The QuickQ opens a window Dragging Moving a window Dragging consists of three steps 1 pressing and holding the left mouse but...

Page 418: ...ost horizontal bar of a window contains the name of the window You can drag the title bar to move the window around The Close Box This is the box in the upper left corner You click your computer s mouse on this box to quickly close the window The Zoom Box This box may appear in the upper right corner If the icon in that corner is an up arrow you can click on the arrow to enlarge the window If the ...

Page 419: ...affic Analysis Account Code Report Format Numerical Graphical Note Print Daily Report Type Answer Bins Abondon Bins Incoming Calls Total Time Average Time SystemCcapacity Traffic Analysis Account Code Report Format Numerical Graphical Note Print Configuration Group System Technician Print Group Supervisor s Screens Group Setup Overflow Threshold MM SS Redirect Threshold MM SS Alarm Threshold MM SS...

Page 420: ...omputer To The DXP 3 4 Connecting The Personal Computer To The DXP 3 5 Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY 3 8 Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY 3 8 D Defining The QuickQ System 1 2 Deleting Lines From QuickQ 5 6 Describing The QuickQ Functions 1 3 Detailing The Kit Supplied Modular To 25 Pin EIA Adapter 3 4 Detailing The Kit Supplied Modular To 9 Pin EIA Adapter 3 2 Detailing The QuickQ Basic Options 1...

Page 421: ...rforming Initial Programming For QuickQ 5 1 Personal Computer Connections 3 2 3 4 Personal Computer Setup 5 1 Power Supply 6 1 Printer Setup Window 5 10 Programming Class Of Service For Master Channel 1 4 3 Programming Class Of Service For Master Channel 2 4 4 Programming Initial Performing For QuickQ 5 1 Programming Road Map Reviewing The A3 1 Programming the DXP Line Parameters 4 2 Programming T...

Page 422: ...connection 3 9 Reviewing The Voice Channel Card 6 2 Road Map Reviewing The Programming A3 1 S Setting Up The Personal Computer 5 1 Signing Into The Technician Access Level 5 2 Supervisor Manager Sign in Window 5 3 System Access Window 5 2 System Components Understanding The 1 4 System Setup Window 5 4 T Technician Access Level Signing Into The 5 2 Technician Window 5 3 Testing And Troubleshooting ...

Page 423: ...ow 5 3 Viewing The System Access Window 5 2 Viewing The System Setup Window 5 4 Viewing The Technician Window 5 3 Viewing The Voice Port Configuration Window 5 9 Voice Card Package Contents 2 2 Voice Channel Board Reviewing The 6 2 Voice Channel Cards Installing The New 8 1 Voice Channel Cards Testing 7 2 Voice Port Configuration Window 5 9 Voice Port Status Utility Examining The 7 5 W Window Grap...

Page 424: ...Automatic Call Distributor System Manager s Guide R QuickQ DXP ...

Page 425: ... 1 5 Management Information System MIS Reporting 1 5 Describing QuickQ Agent Features 1 6 Account Codes 1 6 Calls Waiting Indication 1 6 Log in Log out 1 6 Make Set Busy 1 6 Supervisor Help and Monitoring 1 6 Wrap up Time 1 6 Describing QuickQ Group Features 1 7 Alarm Threshold Time 1 7 Alarm Threshold Calls in Queue 1 7 Automatic Day to Night Mode 1 7 Automatic Night to Day Mode 1 7 Automatic Ans...

Page 426: ...ring The Group 3 14 Configuring the Agent Group Setup 3 16 Configuring the Line Group Setup 3 18 Management Information 3 20 System Backup 3 21 Announcement Backup 3 21 Configuration Backup 3 22 Stats Backup 3 23 Operating The QuickQ System 4 1 Logging In and Out of QuickQ 4 1 Operating As An Agent 4 3 Answering Automatically 4 3 Answering Manually 4 3 Wrapping Up A Call 4 3 Making Your Telephone ...

Page 427: ...uration Reports 5 6 Selecting QuickQ MIS Reports 5 7 Viewing Typical MIS Reports 5 7 Appendix A A 1 Using QuickQ With a Mouse A 1 Clicking Selecting an Item A 1 Dragging Moving a Window A 1 Understanding QuickQ Window Graphic A 2 Title Bar A 2 Close Box A 2 Selection Key A 2 Scroll Bar A 2 Re size Edges A 2 Appendix B A 3 System Layout Worksheet A 3 Appendix C A 5 Group Layout Worksheet A 5 Append...

Page 428: ...oup Window 3 16 Figure 3 15 Add Agent Window 3 17 Figure 3 16 Line Group Window 3 18 Figure 3 17 Message Backup and Restore Window 3 21 Figure 3 18 System Program Back up Restore Window 3 22 Figure 3 19 Report Back Up Clean Up Window 3 23 Figure 3 20 Report Backup Cleakup Confirmation Window 3 23 Figure 5 1 System Manager s Real Time Report 5 1 Figure 5 2 Real Time Parameter Setup 5 2 Figure 5 3 S...

Page 429: ...te box means that you should type the characters exactly as shown but type your password means that you should type the actual digits of your password Keys that you are required to press are shown as for example Enter Note On some keypads the Enter key may be called Return The word select is used to describe the use of either the mouse or the direction arrow keys to highlight an option on the scre...

Page 430: ...people is a potential candidate for the considerable cost savings and service benefits of the QuickQ In an automatic call distribution ACD application a calling customer needs to reach a service person in a particular area but does not need to reach a specific individual For example the customer may be calling a company to place an order check a reservation or talk to a support or help desk In all...

Page 431: ...s often referred to as a Customer Service Representative CSR and is mainly responsible for a particular group of telephone lines or a certain type of call however the system allows assignment of multiple group agents that are a part of more than one group Describing The System Components NOTE You can ensure continuous QuickQ operation by adding an uninterruptable power source to both the digital v...

Page 432: ...ults are zero By setting time frames in the abandoned bins the Manager can determine how tolerant customers are of the waiting time to which they are being subjected An example of a typical abandoned bin is shown below Abandoned Number of Time Definition Bin Calls Bin 01 0 00 10 The number of calls abandoned between 0 and 10 seconds 0 Bin 02 11 00 30 The number of calls abandoned between 10 and 30...

Page 433: ...in sequence and that they should wait and not hang up Without this announcement most people will hang up after five or six rings Note Be creative with your messages provide important information advertise special promotions and in general keep your customers entertained and informed while they are waiting Management Information System MIS Reporting The QuickQ system provides both real time and his...

Page 434: ...ual basis Each Agent has his or her own three digit user ID and password Agents log into the system at the start of their day and log out of the system at the end of their day When they take lunch or coffee breaks they use the make set busy feature Make Set Busy An Agent can manually make their telephone busy by pressing the BUSY interactive button This allows the Agent to temporarily leave the sy...

Page 435: ...be collected for MIS Reports Automatic Day to Night Mode Each Group Supervisor can set their group to automatically switch from day mode to night mode In night mode the system answers the incoming calls plays the prerecorded night announcement and releases the call The system will automatically log all agents out when all calls holding prior to night mode are answered Automatic Night to Day Mode Q...

Page 436: ...This is important as billing starts as soon as the QuickQ answers the call Individual Agents can have a priority status 01 to 04 The system assigns calls to Agents with the highest priority before it assigns calls to lower priority Agents Example Assign Agent 200 a priority of 01 and Agent 209 a priority of 04 Agent 200 will receive incoming calls before Agent 209 receives any regardless of idle t...

Page 437: ... If you are unsure how to navigate the QuickQ menus and enter data or select items refer to Appendix A for a description of the QuickQ graphical windowing environment and details for using the mouse and keyboard If you are confident that you can use these techniques adequately go on to QuickQ programming GCA70 271 Using the Mouse and Keyboard Using The Mouse and Keyboard 2 1 ...

Page 438: ...32 System Manager ID 900 System Manager Password 900 Group Supervisor ID 901 to 916 Group Supervisor Password 901 to 916 Agent s ID No default Agent Password No default Overflow Threshold 210 seconds Overflow Group No overflow Alarm Threshold 45 seconds Redirect Threshold 20 seconds Priority Override 2 minutes Alarm Threshold Calls in Queue 0 Automatic Force Call No Call Screening No Day to Night ...

Page 439: ...Appendix B Programming The System Level Configuration Performing Initial Sign In Use the following steps to gain access to the system 1 Press Esc to close the QuickQ Status window Figure 3 1 2 On the main system window select the Sign In menu bar option Either move the pointer to it and click the left mouse button or hold down the Alt key and press the S key Figure 3 2 Figure 3 2 Sign In Window Fi...

Page 440: ...assword both default to 900 Type 900 at the ID box and press Enter The highlight moves to the Password box Type 900 again and press Enter 5 The Supervisor Manager Sign In window appears Highlight the Manager line and press Enter Figure 3 4 Figure 3 3 ID and Password Figure 3 4 Supervisor Sign In Window GCA70 271 Programming QuickQ Programming The QuickQ System 3 3 ...

Page 441: ...isplay a series of five options Sign out System Setup Group Programming System Backup Management Info You are now signed in to the QuickQ system For security reasons you may wish to change your ID and password at this time Programming QuickQ GCA70 271 3 4 Programming The QuickQ System ...

Page 442: ...ows automatically Selecting No or press Alt N returns to the Company Name window You can now close this window by pressing Esc or double clicking on the close box Changing Passwords and ID s Using the following procedure select the group of your choice from the ID Password window change the group names change the Supervisor names and change the ID and passwords of the Supervisors of all groups 1 P...

Page 443: ...rd box and type in the password you wish to use you can use only numeric digits for the ID and password 100 to 999 8 When you have entered the details in the boxes to your satisfaction select the Up date option from the menu bar or press Alt U to save your new details 9 The Save Changes window appears If select Yes or press Alt Y the system saves the changes and closes the Save changes window and ...

Page 444: ... This option is used to synchronize the QuickQ time and date to the Phone system This function is performed automatically every hour but can be performed manually as follows 1 Pull down the System Setup menu 2 Select Time Date A small Time Date window appears 3 If the displayed time and date are incorrect click on the Syn Clock box or press Enter This synchronizes the clock with the clock in the D...

Page 445: ... Down keys to highlight the group for which you wish to set the overflow parameters and either press Enter or click on it with the mouse to select it 3 The Edit ACD InterGroup Overflow window appears 4 Press the Up Down arrow keys to change between groups Alternately you can press the Enter key on a highlighted field to cause a pull down menu to appear then highlight the overflow option for that f...

Page 446: ...omatically Press the Esc key or double click on the close box to exit Setting Announcement Titles The integrated D V A provides voice storage for 16 messages total 5 min 20 sec recording time These messages are recorded from any telephone set logged in as a supervisor Note Describing the content of these messages can be added to the P C by the manager Use the following procedures to set the Announ...

Page 447: ...to various categories by assigning account codes to the calls Agents classify each call from their telephone using the account codes that the System Manager assigns with this procedure 1 Pull down the System Setup menu and select the Account Code option The Account Code Range window appears 2 Type the appropriate account code range and click on the Ok button The Account Code Setup window appears F...

Page 448: ...Edit Account Code Setup window and Delete Account confirmation window closes automatically Click on No or press Alt N closes the Delete Account confirmation window You are now returned to the Edit Account Code Setup window If no further changes is desired Press Esc or click on the close box to exit 9 After you finish setting up your account codes select Save To Disk on the menu bar or Press Alt S ...

Page 449: ... Disk menu bar item 5 The Save Answer Time Bin window with Yes and No option appears Click on Yes or press Alt Y saves the data entered and closes all windows Click on No or press Alt N closes the Save Answer Time Bin window and returns to the Answer Time Bin window Press Esc or double click on the close box to exit this window 6 Pull down the Stat Bin menu and select Abandon Bin option Repeat ste...

Page 450: ...takes place if you select No however you can choose another option from the Manager window menu bar 4 If you select Yes the system puts you at the Manager Supervisor level The screen will change to the Supervisor screen where you will have access to all of the group Supervisor facilities These are described in the Group Level Programming By Supervisor 5 When you sign out from the Manager Superviso...

Page 451: ...elect at the Supervisor Manager Sign In Window 3 Once you have signed into the system the Supervisor window appears and the main menu bar displays five options Group Setup Agent Group Setup Line Group Setup Management Info From here you can set certain parameters for your group and examine the Management Information System reports Preparing The Group Layout Worksheet Always prepare your Group Supe...

Page 452: ...e the previous agent Busy so calls will not be directed to this agent 4 The Alarm Threshold Time is a preprogrammed time parameter to monitor the number of calls waiting in queue default period is 45 seconds When the Alarm Threshold Time works together with the Alarm Threshold Calls in Queue the audible alarm will trigger on the Agents sets 5 The Alarm Threshold Calls In Queue specifies the number...

Page 453: ...agents have to answer calls with the handset When the Automatic Force Call is changed to No this option will be set to Yes automatically 10 Day to Night Mode specifies whether the system will automatically switch to night mode at the specified Day to Night Mode time 11 Enter the time for Day to Night Mode in the last box This time is based on a 24 hour clock 12 After finishing with the Group Setup...

Page 454: ...from the menu bar a pull down menu appears with 4 Agent Groups Select the sub group you wish to work with and the Agent Group Window appears The scrollable area the area with scroll bar on the right edge contains the Agent details If there are no agents in the group this area is blank Figure 3 14 2 If the selected subgroup does not exist the Add Agent Group Window will appear Select Yes or press A...

Page 455: ...use The Edit Agent Setup window appears and provides two options on the menu bar Up Date and Delete After changing the agent information select Update or press Alt U The Update Agent Information window appears with Yes and No option Select Yes or press Alt Y saves the changes made The Edit Agent Setup window and the Update Agent Information window closes automatically Select No or press Alt Y clos...

Page 456: ...ll appear on aIl Line Group reports However this will not affect normal operation 2 To change the name of the line group highlight the Line Group Name box and begin typing Note If you are using the keyboard use the Tab key to move from field to field and you are using the mouse click on the field you wish to work with 3 You can specify which messages 16 available messages the system will use If al...

Page 457: ... QuickQ system can store up to 16 messages The Message window refer to Setting Announcement Titles on Page 3 9 allows you to view the length and number of these messages You can enter a description to label each one if you wish The Current setting shows the length of the message in minutes and seconds The Limit setting shows the time available for the message QuickQ allows a total of 320 seconds o...

Page 458: ...atistical Reports However Statistical Reports should be backed up every 3 4 months Delete all unwanted reports and save to floppy disk important data for storage This will ensure optimum efficiency of the hard disk protect important data and ensure the hard disk has sufficient space to store future data Announcement Backup To back up the messages perform the following procedure 1 Select System Bac...

Page 459: ...on Backup 1 Select Configuration Backup on the System Backup pull down menu The System Program Back up Restore window appears Refer to Figure 3 18 2 Select the B a c k up button to send the current System Programs to the floppy disk The Back up to Floppy window appears with Yes and No option To initiate the backup process press Alt Y or use your mouse to click on Yes 3 To restore System Programs s...

Page 460: ... this function and closes the Report Back Up Clean Up window When selecting Backup the Report Backup Cleanup window appears Refer to Figure 3 20 Select the Continue button to initiate the Report Back Up function Refer to Appendix E Backup Utility section for details Figure 3 19 Report Back Up Clean Up Window Figure 3 20 Report Backup Cleanup Confirmation Window GCA70 271 Programming QuickQ Program...

Page 461: ...rect ID number or use the QUIT interactive button to exit the Log In procedure 3 Type your Agent password Remember use RETRY or QUIT if necessary 4 For Agents The system asks the agents to log into the appropriate group If the supervisors has assigned you to multiple groups use the displayed screen to locate the group into which you wish to log Press the IN interactive button to log into the displ...

Page 462: ...press the OUT interactive button to log out of the group shown on the display You can press the SKIP interactive button to display the next group Press the ALL interactive button to log out of all the groups that have more than one agent The last agent cannot log out of QuickQ if the group is in day mode The following screens will appear after 2 seconds For Supervisors Press the LOG interactive bu...

Page 463: ...usy on the display if no one is available to take the call If the display shows All Agents Busy you cannot make your telephone busy When a call has reached the preset redirect threshold time the system will forward the call to another agent and will make your set BUSY at the same time Wrapping Up A Call At the end of each call the system sets aside an installer programmed time individually program...

Page 464: ...him or her into the call conferencing or put the caller on hold and speak to the Supervisor in private 3 If you choose to speak to the Supervisor with the call on HOLD you have the option of bringing in the customer into the conversation later by pressing the CONF soft key Alternately you can press TRANS to transfer the call to the Supervisor or press RETURN to get back to the caller after receivi...

Page 465: ...p up the call in the same way as on an incoming call Entering Account Codes You can use any screen that has the ACC option to enter an account code to categorize the call according to the call type 1 Press the ACC interactive button at any time during the call or during wrap up mode Enter the three digit account code the System Manager manages the account codes If you enter an incorrect account co...

Page 466: ...e been cleared Supervisor can change the state manually Special Mode The Group Supervisor initiates the special mode for unique situations for example network problems During this mode of operation the system answers callers with the special message and disconnects them When the preset night mode time is reached the system will automatically switch from special mode to night mode Use the following...

Page 467: ...eractive button The system displays the total time remaining for the new messages 3 Dial the number of the message that you wish to record or change For numbers lower than 10 dial a leading 0 for example 01 09 Press RETRY if you enter an invalid number Press CLEAR to clear all message or QUIT to return to the main menu 4 The display shows the message length in seconds it shows 0 seconds for new me...

Page 468: ...oming call engaged on an outgoing call engaged in Make Busy Mode idle ready to receive a call Use this procedure to monitor a particular Agent 1 Press the MENU interactive button 2 Press the AGENT interactive button 3 Dial the ID of the Agent you wish to monitor or press SCAN and let the system select an Agent number for you Accept Message YES NO PLAY Accept Message YES NO PLAY Agent Id ___ SCAN R...

Page 469: ...display the current number of answered and abandoned lost calls within a group Use this procedure to view the call statistics 1 Press the MENU interactive button 2 Press the REPORT interactive button Your LCD speakerphone displays the number of answered and abandoned calls 3 Press QUIT to return to Supervisor menu Ans 123 Lost 4 QUIT Agent Name Incall SCAN SELECT QUIT Agent2 Name Idle SCAN SELECT ...

Page 470: ...ime Historical Current Configuration Selecting The Real Time Report Viewing The System Manager Real Time Report The System Manager s real time report shows information in the System Agent Status window and the System Line Status window Refer to Figure 5 1 System Manager Real Time Report The system continually updates these windows in approximately 3 second intervals so that they reflect current li...

Page 471: ...he real time report screen 1 Pull down the Management Info menu and select the Real Time Set up option The Real Time Parameter Set up window appears Refer to Figure 5 2 To move from field to field use the Tab key or press Enter After editing the parameters select Save To Disk or press Alt S The system saves the changes and closes the window automatically If no changes are necessary press Esc or do...

Page 472: ... Outgoing active outgoing calls 4 Call Waiting calls waiting to be answered 5 No Beyond Alarm calls waiting beyond alarm threshold time 6 Oldest Call time oldest call has waited to be answered Service Status Definitions 1 Time Elapsed elapsed time since the window restarted window details status in 15 minute blocks 2 Grade Of Service see the chart on page 5 13 3 Total Calls total calls serviced in...

Page 473: ...torical Reports Use this procedure to obtain historical reports 1 Select Management Info on the menu bar and click on the Historical option The calendar appears showing the current month with each day represented by a button At the bottom of the calendar window are boxes in which you can specify a new month 0 to 12 and a new year This allows you to call up any stored data by specifying that period...

Page 474: ...Format Selecting this option causes a small two option menu to drop down that allows you to specify whether you wish to view the currently selected report in either Numerical or Graphic format Highlight the format you wish to use and press Enter or click on it with the mouse Note Selecting this option from the menu bar opens up a small window that allows you to enter free form text Use this opport...

Page 475: ...rogramming and All Group Supervisors Programming This feature is useful in providing Supervisors and Agents a listing of all Account Codes programmed by printing the Managers configuration 1 Select Configuration from the Management Info pull down menu The Configuration Report window appears with three report types Group System Technician 2 Use the Up and Down arrow keys to cycle through the Report...

Page 476: ...riods hourly daily weekly monthly The system reports are categorized for the following four operational levels The System level reports show data for all lines and agents on the system The Group level reports provide data for each group programmed on the system The Line level reports provide data for each telephone line within a specific group The Agent level reports show data for each agent in a ...

Page 477: ...s within the 7 programmable time bins Shows supervisors the tolerance of callers Answer Bins Show percent of answered calls within the 7 programmable time bins Shows supervisors the response rates of their departments QuickQ Management Information GCA70 271 5 8 QuickQ Management Information ...

Page 478: ...1 Total I C total incoming calls 2 Incoming Calls ANS answered incoming calls 3 Incoming Calls ABD abandoned calls dropped by caller or connected for less than nine seconds 4 Incoming Calls NIGHT any calls at night mode ans abn msg 5 Answered Calls DIR calls answered before announcement 6 Answered Calls ANNC calls answered after announcement 7 Ans T calls answered after programmed alarm threshold ...

Page 479: ... Time total time agents are engaged in outgoing calls 4 Wrap Up Time total time agents are in wrap up state 5 Busy Time total time agent set busy agent press busy auto busy due to redirect 6 Idle Time total time agents are in idle state up dated only if agents has signed out 1 2 3 4 6 Figure 5 7 Total Time Report QuickQ Management Information GCA70 271 5 10 QuickQ Management Information ...

Page 480: ...Average average waiting time for each abandoned call Average Time Agent Report Definitions 1 Incoming Call Time Calls number of agent answered incoming calls 2 Incoming Call Time Average average connection time for each agent answered incoming call 3 Outgoing Call Time Calls number of agent placed outgoing calls 4 Outgoing Call Time Average average time for each agent placed outgoing call 5 Wrap U...

Page 481: ... seconds It also shows the total number of times that no agent was available and the total time in hours minutes and seconds Account Code Report lists the account codes with their descriptions It also shows the number of calls logged by the agents for each Account code and the average duration of that code QuickQ Management Information GCA70 271 5 12 QuickQ Management Information ...

Page 482: ...er or connected for less than nine seconds 5 Average Time Waiting average waiting time for each answered incoming call 6 Average Time Abandoned average waiting time for each abandoned call 7 GOS grade of service 3 number of calls answered after alarm threshold has expired obtained from incoming call line report 3 4 7 x 100 Figure 5 11 Traffic Analysis GCA70 271 QuickQ Management Information QuickQ...

Page 483: ...g Selecting an Item To click press the left button and immediately release it By clicking you can select an item such as a menu or an icon Note that the top left corner of the screen has a Sign In label Use it to perform the following exercise Place the pointer at the Sign In title and click the mouse button The QuickQ opens the Sign In window Dragging Moving a Window Dragging consists of the foll...

Page 484: ...l the others the foremost one All windows in QuickQ have the following things in common title bar close box selection key Title Bar The topmost horizontal bar of a window contains the name of the window You can drag the title bar to move the window around Close Box This is the box in the upper left corner You double click on this box to quickly close the window Selection key Press the Alt key with...

Page 485: ... 07 Grp 08 Grp 09 Grp 10 Grp 11 Grp 12 Grp 13 Grp 14 Grp 15 Grp 16 Intergroup Overflow Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Grp 01 Grp 02 Grp 03 Grp 04 Grp 05 Grp 06 Grp 07 Grp 08 Grp 09 Grp 10 Grp 11 Grp 12 Grp 13 Grp 14 Grp 15 Grp 16 Note Group 00 refers to the System Manager s ID and Passwords this is not one of the call processing Groups GCA70 271 Appendix A 3 ...

Page 486: ...Group Line Sub group 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Account Codes Code Description Stat Bins Answer Bins Abandon Bins Time Time Time Bin 01 Time Bin 01 Time Bin 02 Time Bin 02 Time Bin 03 Time Bin 03 Time Bin 04 Time Bin 04 Time Bin 05 Time Bin 05 Time Bin 06 Time Bin 06 Appendix GCA70 271 A 4 ...

Page 487: ...orksheet for each of your system groups Group Setup Thresholds Overflow Time Redirect Time Alarm Time Alarm of Calls Priority Override Time Mode Call Screening Yes No Automatic Force Call Yes No Manual Yes No Day to Night Yes No Time for Day to Night Mode 24 hr GCA70 271 Appendix A 5 ...

Page 488: ... Agent Name ID Password Priority Wrap up Grp 02 Group Name Agent Name ID Password Priority Wrap up Grp 03 Group Name Agent Name ID Password Priority Wrap up Grp 04 Group Name Agent Name ID Password Priority Wrap up Appendix GCA70 271 A 6 ...

Page 489: ...rp 01 Grp 02 Grp 03 Grp 04 Group Name First Message Second Message Night Message Special Message Message Delay Music Interval Priority Management Information Real Time Parameter Setup Incoming Call Parameter Time Outgoing Call Parameter Time Busy Call Parameter Time GCA70 271 Appendix A 7 ...

Page 490: ...Message Scripts Line Group 01 First Message Second Message Night Message Special Message Line Group 02 First Message Second Message Night Message Special Message Appendix GCA70 271 A 8 ...

Page 491: ...Line Group 03 First Message Second Message Night Message Special Message Line Group 04 First Message Second Message Night Message Special Message GCA70 271 Appendix A 9 ...

Page 492: ...ity Traffic Analysis Account Code Report Format Numerical Graphical Note Print Daily Report Type Answer Bins Abondon Bins Incoming Calls Total Time Average Time SystemCcapacity Traffic Analysis Account Code Report Format Numerical Graphical Note Print Configuration Group System Technician Print Group Supervisor s Screens Group Setup Overflow Threshold MM SS Redirect Threshold MM SS Alarm Threshold...

Page 493: ...ork with last months files or the previous quarters files or files from any arbitrary period such as the 15th of January to the 15th of March You then tell the Backup Utility which file types you wish to work with these may be the Hourly the Daily the Weekly or the Monthly files or all of them You then tell the Backup Utility to either perform a Backup or a Delete on those files for that period Us...

Page 494: ...he main menu to access the Help system menu where you will find help on the help system istelf on how to use the menus and how to use the mouse Selecting and using menu options in described in the next section Interacting with the Backup Utility You interact with the Backup Utility in the same manner as you do with the rest of the ACD system you can use the keyboard or the mouse or a mixture of bo...

Page 495: ...of the period you wish to delete files in When you have done that and then selected the Delete option the system will check which files are going to be deleted and will tell you how much disk space you will recover by deleting them Note Make sure you are CERTAIN that you wish to delete the files before you do so once they have been removed if you haven t already made Backups of them they will be g...

Page 496: ...the End Date must be the last day in a month but the Start Date and End Date do not need to be in the same month so 1 09 1994 and 31 10 1994 is a valid period This applies to the All Files setting too as the All Files setting includes the Weekly and Monthly data files automatically Set Start Before you can use the Backup or Delete options you must first tell the Backup Utility which type of Data F...

Page 497: ... be worked on Also if you want to work with Weekly Monthly or All Files the Start Date MUST be the first day in a month Set Path You will not need to use this option it is intended for future expansion and is not required in this release of the Backup Utility Info This option provides a window which shows the Start and End Dates if they have been set spelled out with the names of the day and the m...

Page 498: ...6 Clicking Selecting an Item A 1 Clock Synchronizing the 3 7 Close Box A 2 Company Name Setting The 3 5 Components Describing The System 1 3 Configuring the Agent Group Setup 3 16 Configuring the Line Group Setup 3 18 Configuring The Group 3 14 D Day to Night Mode Automatic 1 7 Defaults 3 1 Delay Announcements 1 5 Describing QuickQ Agent Features 1 6 Describing QuickQ Group Features 1 7 Describing...

Page 499: ...Scroll Bar A 2 Selecting Current Reports 5 5 Selecting Historical Reports 5 4 Selecting QuickQ MIS Reports 5 7 Selecting The Main Report Screens 5 5 Selecting The Real Time Parameters 5 2 Selecting The Real Time Report 5 1 Setting Announcement Titles 3 9 Setting the Company Name 3 5 Setting the Intergroup Overflow 3 8 Setting the Time and Date 3 7 Setting Up The System 3 5 Sign In Performing Initi...

Page 500: ...Wrap up Time 1 6 Wrapping Up A Call 4 3 Z Zoom Box A 2 GCA70 271 Index I 3 ...

Page 501: ...ion uses the system logic associated with one station port for communications to the DXP Plus system therefore the PC attendant position replaces one telephone from the system since you cannot connect a telephone to the station location that the Total Control PC attendant position is using 1 1 Default Locations The system default locations for the PC attendant positions are as detailed below howev...

Page 502: ...in your installation of the PC Attendant IMI66 105 Installing The DXP Plus Main Common Equipment Cabinet Instruction manual for supplied personal computer GCA70 230 Total Control PC Attendant s Console User s Guide 1 4 Upgrading Existing PC Attendant Position From DXP To DXP Plus Upgrading your existing PC attendant position requires new PC attendant software Upgrading also requires that you add t...

Page 503: ...n Volume Up Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function PUSH POWER ON ON OFF OFF CONT BRIGHT Tracker KYBOARD1 Viewing The Total Control PC Attendant Position Installing And Programming The PC Attendant Position IMI89 195 Installing The...

Page 504: ...upplied 6 conductor modular line cord and a customer provided standard 6 conductor line cord 1 Install the industry standard modular jacks at the DXP Plus location Data Jack A and at the PC attendant position location Data Jack B Route the wiring between these jacks using twisted pair wire Remember in a noisy electrical environment use shielded cable for the data communications Also keep in mind t...

Page 505: ...u located near the DXP 480 Plus Data Jack A Remember you must install a communications card in the DXP Plus system to provide a serial data port for PC attendant position use Making The Data Connections Detailing The Serial Data Port Connection Installing And Programming The PC Attendant Position IMI89 195 Installing The PC Attendant Position 5 ...

Page 506: ...that these boards provide line connections through a 50 pin connector instead of an industry standard modular jack Make line connections to these boards using a customer supplied 50 pin connector block 66 type a standard 25 pair cable a customer supplied modular jack type 625A2 6 and an equipment provided 4 conductor line cord 1 Install the 66 type 50 pin connector block at the DXP Plus location 2...

Page 507: ...6 Conductor Line Cord To PC Attendant Position Interface Board Maintain straight through wiring when you connect the jacks 1 1 No Connction 2 2 Ring 2 3 3 Tip 1 4 4 Ring 1 5 5 Tip 2 6 6 No Connection PCATND9 Making The Line Connections Ferrite Collar PCATND8 Loop Start Line Board Installing And Programming The PC Attendant Position IMI89 195 Installing The PC Attendant Position 7 ...

Page 508: ...oard Note that the interface also provides a HEADSET jack if the user requires headset operation 5 Disconnect the telephone that the PC attendant position replaces Record its physical board slot location and its logical station number for use when programming the system to accept the PC attendant position 6 5 4 3 2 1 PCATND5 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Modular Jack Pin 1 No Connection Pin 2 SG Signal Ground...

Page 509: ... In PC Manual Esc Help Mute Headset I D Split Park Both Retrieve Serial Conf Overflow Page Line TAP Intercom Pick Message Print Screen Pause Scroll Lock Page Down Page Up Home Insert Delete End Hold A n s w e r Num Lock SysReq Volume Down Volume Up Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lo...

Page 510: ...otection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the...

Page 511: ...is currently installed there 6 For line pair type odd even number pair that corresponds to location where cable was connected on common equipment for example enter 1 2 or 15 16 or 119 120 and so forth Special instruction Always type the odd line number first Remember the line numbers on each line board ascend from bottom line jack lines 1 2 to top line jack lines 7 8 and the line ports on the main...

Page 512: ...unt list Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number of PC attendant position or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for intercom hunt list and press ENTER 6 Type personal intercom number for PC attend...

Page 513: ...ons and press ENTER 11 From stations menu select station COS programming menu and press ENTER 12 Type class of service number 1 32 and press ENTER 13 From the COS programming menu type item number for line group access and press ENTER Remember use CONTROL N to find the correct screen 14 Type 16 and press ENTER 15 When finished Press ESCAPE twice 16 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to...

Page 514: ...ess to erase a message after he or she has read it or sent it to the data printer Quit button for the user to press to end a text messaging session Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the stations menu select button mapping and press ENTER 4 Type prime intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER The VDT presents a ...

Page 515: ...utton mapping and press ENTER 6 Press CONTROL E for button map of function keys and press ENTER 7 Type button number L1 L12 and press ENTER 8 Type mnemonic type for a description of mnemonic if you need it for desired feature and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 until all feature button are programmed 10 When finished press ESCAPE twice 11 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume...

Page 516: ...disables LCD message feature LNG line group button 1 16 accesses one of 16 line groups LN line button 1 240 accesses one of 240 lines LOCK lock button prevents allows station use prevents station use until someone dials an authorization code MMEPG meet me page button answers a page by meeting intercom paging party on line MSGWT message waitng button turns on turns off message waiting light at anot...

Page 517: ... file that controls the PC attendant position computer at start up This action as well as other changes that you can make in the autoexec bat file is discussed in Section 1 2 of the Total Control PC Attendant s Console User s Guide GCA70 230 If you arrange for the PC attendant position to transmit and receive data from the DXP Plus at a high baud rate engineering sources recommend that you use a c...

Page 518: ...ontrol for each serial data port in the system to match the data device that you connect there Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select serial ports and press ENTER 4 From serial ports menu type item number for main port or for auxiliary port and press ENTER 5 From serial port type menu select the serial port number and pr...

Page 519: ... Z S E 3 A W 2 Q 1 Silent M K O 9 L P 0 _ Pick Message Print Screen Pause Scroll Lock Page Down Page Up Home Insert Delete End Hold A n s w e r Num Lock SysReq Volume Down Volume Up Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function s PUSH PO...

Page 520: ...ems caused by incompatible features The possible combinations of accessories and features are far too numerous for us to document in this manual Furthermore Comdial Corporation cannot guarantee that features will operate as described in this publication when they are combined with other features Accredited by the Dutch Council for Certification for certification and registration activities Comdial...

Page 521: ...Access Window 16 2 5 Answering And Directing Calls 18 2 6 Making Calls 24 2 7 Using The Pull Down Menus 26 2 8 Setting The System Parameters 30 3 Using The Specialized Features 45 3 1 Both Feature 45 3 2 Headset 45 3 3 ID 46 3 4 Intercom 46 3 5 Message 47 3 6 Mute 52 3 7 Overflow 54 3 8 Page 54 3 9 Pick 56 3 10 Serial 56 3 11 Silent 57 3 12 Split 57 3 13 Alternate 58 3 14 Directory 60 3 15 Night 6...

Page 522: ... PC Settings Screen Saver 63 3 17 SOHVA 64 3 18 Speed Dialing 65 4 Troubleshooting Guide 67 4 1 Operation Interruptions 67 5 Glossary 69 6 Index 73 GCA 70 230 PC Attendant s Console User s Guide iv Contents ...

Page 523: ...ith the general use of the PC Attendant making calls setting the parameters Chapter Three Using The Specialized Features focuses on the specific features of the PC Attendant Message or Split for example We have explained and when needed cross referenced every feature from answering an incoming call to programming system speed dials We suggest however that you become familiar with the basics of ans...

Page 524: ...RL ALT and DELETE buttons to reboot the system 3 press the reset button to reboot the system The default number of lines displayed on the PC Attendant screen is 25 You may change the display from 25 lines to either 43 or 50 lines To change the number of lines displayed type pcattn 43 or pcattn 50 at the DOS prompt NOTE When the PC Attendant functions are transferred to an alternate attendant for a...

Page 525: ...n Additionally you can click outside any of the pull down menus or pop up windows to return to the main screen You may also use the mouse to initiate intercom calls quickly In the Intercom window a double click on an intercom number will cause you to dial that station also known as a direct station select DSS call Functionally the right mouse button is identical to the Release key so you may use t...

Page 526: ...lay the Help screen associated with a highlighted feature on a current Help screen 2 use the arrow buttons or the mouse to move the cursor to select that highlighted word or phrase press Enter To Return To A Previous Help Screen press Backspace To Exit The Help Screens press Esc This will return you to the main screen Included on every Help screen is a highlighted Help Index option that when selec...

Page 527: ...Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Pull Down Menus Help key Escape key Next Screen key Arrow keys Backspace key Enter key The help system of the Total Control PC Attendant is a series of cross indexed screens which provide information for the currently active window Each help screen provides access to this index which in turn gives access to the entire help screen Intercom Window Cu...

Page 528: ... headset is activated handset remains active for listening only Help activates context sensitive Help screens Hold places current call on hold Home moves cursor to beginning of current window I D allows you to enter a short tag or identification up to 14 characters to a current call in order to identify the call if it returns to the PC Attendant as a hold recall transfer recall park recall etc Int...

Page 529: ... to enter numbers during programming modes such as setting the time and date entering speed dial numbers etc Esc Help Mute Headset I D Split Park Both Retrieve Tracker Serial Conf Overflow Page Line TAP Intercom N J I 8 B H U 7 V G Y 6 C F T 5 X D R 4 Z S E 3 A W 2 Q 1 Silent M K O 9 L P 0 _ Pick Message Print Screen Pause Scroll Lock Page Down Page Up Home Insert Delete End Hold A n s w e r Num L...

Page 530: ...mine the status of any intercom simply by noticing how the intercom designation either name or number appears in the Intercom window The following chart lists the screen attributes that pertain to both color and monochrome monitors State Color Monitor Monochrome Monitor Idle White on Blue Regular Intensity Ringing Flashing White on Red Flashing Bar with Black Type Busy Black on Red Bar with Black ...

Page 531: ... need to view the higher numbered extensions To view these numbers at any time use the arrow keys to move the cursor beyond the right edge of the window To move the cursor to the highest numbered intercom which appears at the end of the intercom list press End To move the cursor to the lowest numbered intercom which appears at the beginning of the intercom list press Home To delete unassigned inte...

Page 532: ... the COS value change takes effect The default password is 746 To assign a new COS to a station from the Intercom Status window 1 use the arrow keys or the mouse to move the cursor to the intercom designation name or number that you want to change 2 press ENTER or click the left mouse button You will see a list of possible intercom status designations with Yes or No tags that tell you whether a fe...

Page 533: ...ENTER or click the left mouse button You will see a list of possible intercom status designations with Yes or No tags that tell you whether a feature is turned on or off for that particular extension 3 press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the name field 4 enter the new name 5 press ENTER or click the left mouse button 6 press ESCAPE to exit the intercom status window 7 enter the station 10...

Page 534: ...0 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 Tue Feb 4 2 33 PM Line 3 RINGING ABC Inc How may I help you Description Status 1 WATS 1 2 Line 6 for Ms Swartz 3 Line 8 for Mr...

Page 535: ...tatus of up to eight calls that are either ringing holding recalling or currently connected to the PC Attendant station Additional calls will not display in the Pending Calls window until one of the first eight calls is serviced The pending call count at the top of the window shows the total number of pending calls waiting to be serviced When one or more calls are ringing at the PC Attendant stati...

Page 536: ... 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253...

Page 537: ...art lists the screen attributes that pertain to both color and monochrome monitors State Color Monitor Monochrome Monitor Idle Black on Cyan Regular Intensity Ringing Flashing White on Red Flashing Reverse Video Busy Black on Red Reverse Video On Hold Cyan on Black High Intensity Recalling Flashing Red on Cyan Flashing 2 4 1 Line Status Menu The Line Status menu gives detailed information on the s...

Page 538: ...117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 ...

Page 539: ...ou wish to connect and press Enter 2 5 2 Holding Calls Current calls can be put on hold at the PC Attendant station The last call placed on hold will appear in the Pending Calls screen with an asterisk next to it and can be reconnected by pressing the Tap key To place a current call on hold press Hold The call will appear in the Pending Calls window with an asterisk next to it To reconnect to this...

Page 540: ...ome Insert Delete End Hold A n s w e r Num Lock SysReq Volume Down Volume Up Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Escape key Enter key Alternate keys 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 12...

Page 541: ...hout parking the call A parked call will remain in park orbit for a set period of time After that time is up the call will recall to the PC Attendant station 2 5 5 Retrieving Parked Calls When a parked call recalls to the PC Attendant station the Pending Calls window will display the call with the tag PARK RCL and a flashing arrow if it is the highest priority call To answer a park recall press An...

Page 542: ...lete the transfer If you attempt to make a screened transfer and there is no answer at the called station you can return to the call by pressing Tap If you make an unscreened transfer to a station that does not answer the transfer call the transfer will recall to the Attendant s station after a set period and will appear in the Pending Calls window as a transfer recall To answer a Transfer Recall ...

Page 543: ...e you select it OR type new message 5 press Enter to send the message NOTE Some pagers accept longer messages than the PC Attendant s screen allows for these pager types the message scrolls to the left as you enter message information To send a message through Tracker using the Tracker key 1 use the arrow keys or the mouse to move the cursor to the intercom designation name or number on the screen...

Page 544: ...6 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 Tue Feb 4 2 33 PM Line 3 RINGING A...

Page 545: ...on desired intercom number in Intercom window 3 press Enter twice OR use the mouse to select the intercom number from the Intercom window 5 click the left mouse button twice 2 6 2 Making Outside Calls To make an outside call 1 press Line 2 dial number from dial pad GCA 70 230 PC Attendant s Console User s Guide 24 Handling Calls ...

Page 546: ... create an unsupervised conference 1 confirm that conference is connected 2 press on the keypad To transfer a conference to another station 1 confirm that conference is connected 2 add the desired station into the conference using the steps described above 3 when called station answers announce that the conference is arranged and press on the keypad The conference will then connect to the called s...

Page 547: ... 2 press Esc to move the cursor into the pull down menu bar at the top of the main screen position the cursor on the menu you wish to view press Enter a pull down menu will appear move the cursor to the feature you wish to access press Enter A feature window will appear To exit a pull down menu press Esc Press Esc again to return the cursor to the Intercom window on the main screen NOTE You may al...

Page 548: ... 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253...

Page 549: ...ich your announcement will be heard Zone 1 is typically used for all call paging Park Retrieve activates the Park Orbits window which tells you the location of currently parked calls awaiting service For information on how to use this window to retrieve a parked call refer to the Using The PC Attendant To Answer Direct And Make Calls chapter of this guide Alternate Mode selecting Alternate Mode fr...

Page 550: ...tures in the Programming menu Quit Selecting Exit PC Attendant allows you to exit the PC Attendant system so that DXP system programming can occur this is an installer activity To exit the PC Attendant console choose EXIT PC Attendant from the Quit pull down menu Re enter the system by following the procedure outlined under Installing The Software in the chapter entitled Getting Started The PC Att...

Page 551: ...Next Screen 2nd Function Alternate keys Escape key P key Enter key Arrow keys 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 18...

Page 552: ...7 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 Tue Feb 4 2 33 PM Line 3 RINGING ABC Inc How may I help you Description Status 1 WATS 1 2 Line 6 for Ms Swartz 3 Line 8 for Mr Bolden 4 Line 3 5 Ext 243 Gay J 6 Ext 155 Tutwiler E 7 Line 2 for Mr Shifflett 8 HOLDING HOLDING HOLDIN...

Page 553: ... right arrow buttons to increase or decrease the volume for the handset headset 6 press Enter the cursor will move to the ringer volume line 7 adjust the ringer volume 8 press Enter to save the volume changes and return to the programming menu 9 press Esc twice to return the cursor to the Intercom window The change in volume will remain until you elect to change it again NOTE If you activate the V...

Page 554: ...80 155 209 243 Current Call Options Pending Calls 7 MUTE HEADSET OVERFLOW SILENT ALTERNATE NIGHT Parked Calls 1 Menu Bar Programming Pull Down Menu ILLUS12A Set Date and Time Set Volume Speed Dials Line Greetings Other Greetings Text Messaging Keyboard Macros Tracker 209 Pending Calls 7 Volume Settings Handset Headset Ringer Min Max Min Max Esc Help Mute Headset I D Split Park Both Retrieve Tracke...

Page 555: ...ld A n s w e r Num Lock SysReq Volume Down Volume Up Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Alternate keys Escape key P key Enter key 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 ...

Page 556: ... K O 9 L P 0 _ Pick Message Print Screen Pause Scroll Lock Page Down Page Up Home Insert Delete End Hold A n s w e r Num Lock SysReq Volume Volume Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Alternate keys Escape key P key Enter key 101 102 103...

Page 557: ...s 1 activate the Programming pull down menu 2 press ALT P and press Enter OR press Esc to move the cursor into the menu bar from the main screen position the cursor on Programming and press Enter 3 move the cursor to highlight Other Greetings 4 press Enter 5 type the greetings necessary for each DID number 6 press Enter cursor will move down the line list 7 type other greetings or press Esc to exi...

Page 558: ... 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 Tue Feb 4 2 33 PM Line 3 RINGING ABC Inc How may I help you Description Status 1 WATS 1 2 L...

Page 559: ...Programming and press Enter 3 move the cursor to highlight Keyboard Macros 4 press Enter 5 highlight the macro key you wish to program 6 press Enter the macro editing window for that macro appears NOTE You can give the macro a name by highlighting it and entering a name from the keyboard You can use all string editing keys backspace insert delete for example 7 from the macro editing window highlig...

Page 560: ...ATS 1 2 Line 6 for Ms Swartz 3 Line 8 for Mr Bolden 4 Line 3 5 Ext 243 Gay J 6 Ext 155 Tutwiler E 7 Line 2 for Mr Shifflett 8 HOLDING HOLDING HOLDING RINGING RINGING RINGING PARK RCL 112 108 180 155 209 243 Current Call Options Pending Calls 7 MUTE HEADSET OVERFLOW SILENT ALTERNATE NIGHT Parked Calls 1 Set Date and Time Set Volume Speed Dials Line Greetings Other Greetings Text Messaging Keyboard ...

Page 561: ... 4 Z S E 3 A W 2 Q 1 Silent M K O 9 L P 0 _ Pick Message Print Screen Pause Scroll Lock Page Down Page Up Home Insert Delete End Hold A n s w e r Num Lock SysReq Volume Down Volume Up Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Alterna...

Page 562: ... key P key Enter key Arrow keys Tracker key 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 ...

Page 563: ...down menu 2 press ALT P and press Enter OR press Esc to move the cursor into the menu bar from the main screen position the cursor on Programming and press Enter 3 move the cursor to highlight Tracker 4 press Enter 5 move the cursor to highlight Pager Numbers 6 press Enter 7 highlight the line of the desired DXP extension all currently defined DXP extensions appear 8 enter the pager number 9 press...

Page 564: ...4 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 Tue Feb 4 2 33 PM Line 3 RINGING ABC Inc How may I help you Description Status 1 WATS 1 2 Line 6 for Ms Swartz 3 Line 8 for Mr Bolden 4 Line 3...

Page 565: ...peration you will need to tell the system when you switch between the handset and headset modes NOTE Your headset must be plugged in for this feature to activate To switch from handset to headset press Headset The Headset indicator at the bottom of your main screen will be highlighted To return to the handset mode press Headset The Headset indicator will dim 3 Esc Help Mute Headset I D Split Park ...

Page 566: ...J I 8 B H U 7 V G Y 6 C F T 5 X D R 4 Z S E 3 A W 2 Q 1 Silent M K O 9 L P 0 _ Pick Message Print Screen Pause Scroll Lock Page Down Page Up Home Insert Delete End Hold A n s w e r Num Lock SysReq Volume Volume Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2n...

Page 567: ...window 2 press Enter Message waiting light will flutter at called station To turn off the message waiting light at the called station repeat above procedure NOTE A message waiting light can also be turned on at another station through the Intercom Status window Simply activate the window by moving the cursor to the desired intercom on the screen and press Enter When the Intercom Status window appe...

Page 568: ...t out all text messages as they are stored or to print selected text messages on command non LCD and single line telephone users can call the attendant who can retrieve and read the messages stored for any extension To store a text message for any station 1 position the cursor on the desired extension number in the intercom window 2 press the Message key the message pop up menu appears on the scre...

Page 569: ...ab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Message key Enter key 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 1...

Page 570: ...ges saved for that station To view subsequent messages 1 move the cursor to the Options field 2 select NEXT 3 press Enter The second saved message will appear on the screen Repeat the procedure to scroll forward through all messages saved for that extension To review previous messages press PREV The previously viewed message will reappear Repeat the procedure to scroll backward through all message...

Page 571: ... 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 Tue Feb 4 2 33 PM Line 3 RINGING ABC Inc How may I help you Description Status 1 WATS 1 2 Line 6 for Ms Swartz 3 Line 8 for Mr Bold...

Page 572: ...ou and you do not want to interrupt the distant party press Mute Mute feature is highlighted in the features bar at the bottom of your main screen To cancel the Mute feature and return to your conversation with the distant party press Mute to disengage the feature GCA 70 230 PC Attendant s Console User s Guide 52 Using PC Attendant s Specialized Features ...

Page 573: ...olden 4 Ext 106 5 Ext 243 Gay J 6 Ext 155 Tutwiler E 7 Line 2 for Mr Shifflett 8 HOLDING HOLDING HOLDING BUSY RINGING RINGING RINGING 112 108 180 155 209 243 Current Call Options Pending Calls 7 MUTE HEADSET OVERFLOW SILENT ALTERNATE NIGHT Parked Calls 1 Mute Indicator Esc Help Mute Headset I D Split Park Both Retrieve Serial Conf Overflow Page Line TAP Intercom N J I 8 B H U 7 V G Y 6 C F T 5 X D...

Page 574: ...ging announcement in a particular zone e g throughout one department or in a warehouse or in all zones of your location known as all call paging To make a paging announcement from the PC Attendant console to a particular zone 1 press Page to activate Paging pop up window 2 move the cursor to choose the zone in which your page will be heard Zone 1 typically is designated by the system as the all ca...

Page 575: ...165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 Tue Feb 4 2 33 PM Line 3 RIN...

Page 576: ...rom the first intercom in the serial the system will automatically send it to the second intercom number etc until final transfer is complete The call disconnects from the system when the final transfer is disconnected At any time during a serial transfer an intercom party may discontinue the serial by redirecting the call Tracker Esc Help Mute Headset I D Split Park Both Retrieve Serial Conf Over...

Page 577: ... like and you may handle them separately at any time transferring the current call for example releases that call from the PC Attendant console and leaves the held call on Hold Or you may want to establish a conference between these two calls using the Both key see discussion on page 25 of this guide Tracker Esc Help Mute Headset I D Split Park Both Retrieve Serial Conf Overflow Page Line TAP Inte...

Page 578: ...the cursor into the menu bar from the main screen position the cursor on Options and press Enter 3 move the cursor to highlight Alternate 4 press Enter Calls will ring at the alternate station To return call activity to the PC Attendant console from the alternate attendant repeat the above procedure The Alternate status indicator at the bottom of the main screen will be highlighted when the altern...

Page 579: ...3 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 Tue Feb 4 2 33 PM Line 3 RINGING ABC Inc How may I help you De...

Page 580: ... menu bar use the arrow keys to select Directory and press Enter 3 with the directory menu activated press Insert to activate the Directory Editing window 4 type the station user s last name 5 press Enter 6 type the station user s first name 7 press Enter 8 type the station user s middle name or initial if desired 9 press Enter 10 type the station number using the keyboard numbers 11 press Enter a...

Page 581: ...39 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 2...

Page 582: ...nsfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Alternate keys Escape key O key Enter key 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 16...

Page 583: ...kspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Alternate keys Escape key Space Bar O key Enter key 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147...

Page 584: ...k QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Enter key Arrow keys 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 16...

Page 585: ...ace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function Alternate keys Enter key S key 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153...

Page 586: ...sage Print Screen Pause Scroll Lock Page Down Page Up Home Insert Delete End Hold A n s w e r Num Lock SysReq Volume Down Volume Up Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Caps Lock Enter Backspace Ctrl Alt Alt Break QZ GHI PRS OPERATOR ABC JKL TUV DEF MNO WXY Transfer R e l e a s e Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117...

Page 587: ...ock Lock Lock 1 4 7 0 2 5 8 3 6 9 Next Screen 2nd Function 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 1...

Page 588: ...ephone Call pickup Answering a call at one telephone when it is ringing at another telephone Call transfer Transferring a call from one station to another The transfer can be screened i e you find out who is calling and announce the call to the party being called or unscreened i e you transfer the call without identifying the calling party to the called party Central message desk A station that ha...

Page 589: ...a Help screen allows attendant to move the cursor from the main screen to the pull down menus H Headset key Allows attendant to alternate between handset and headset modes When headset is activated handset remains active for listening only Help key Activates context sensitive Help screens Hold key Places current call on hold Home key Moves cursor to beginning of current window I I D Allows the att...

Page 590: ...wn menu Located in the menu bar these menus can be pulled down using the mouse or the arrow and Enter keys to access options and features R Recall A call that returns to the PC Attendant after it has been on hold or in transit through transfer conference transfer or park orbit without being answered Release key Disconnects the PC Attendant from the current call Retrieve key Retrieves a call from p...

Page 591: ...r The optional paging system that allows an attendant to send a message to a compatible pager Transfer Transfers current call to another station V Voice announce blocking A telephone can be set to block voice calls sent to it over the speaker Volume keys Control volume of ringer handset and headset Z Zone paging Paging through the intercoms of some stations or departments in the system GCA70 230 P...

Page 592: ...ry Creating and Editing 3 14 60 Directory Menu 2 7 26 Disconnecting From A Call 2 6 4 25 DXP Not Responding 4 1 2 68 E Exit PC Attendant 2 7 1 29 G Getting Started 1 2 2 Glossary 5 69 H Handling Recalling Hold Calls 2 5 3 19 Handset Volume Setting The 2 8 3 32 Headset And Handset Operation 3 2 45 Headset Volume Setting The 2 8 3 32 Help On Line 1 3 4 Help Index Window Viewing The 1 3 4 Holding Cal...

Page 593: ...Setting The 2 8 3 32 S Screen Attributes 2 1 1 9 Screen Saver Setting The 3 16 63 Screened Transfer 2 5 6 21 Serial Setting Up A Serial Transfer 3 10 56 Set Date And Time 2 8 2 31 Set Volume Programming Menu Option 2 8 3 32 Setting The System Parameters 2 8 30 Silent Silencing A Currently Ringing Call 3 11 57 SOHVA Making A 3 17 64 Speed Dial Directory Editing And Creating 2 8 4 34 Speed Dialing 3...

Page 594: ...ting 2 6 3 25 Using The Arrow Keys Or The Mouse To Move The Cursor 1 2 2 1 2 3 3 Using The PC Attendant s Specialized Features 3 45 Using This Guide 1 1 1 V Volume Setting The Headset Handset Or Ringer 2 8 3 32 PC Attendant s Console User s Guide GCA 70 230 Index 75 ...

Page 595: ...th male DB25 Connector modular to EIA 25 pin adapter plug with female DB25 Connector custom wired six position modular line jack not required with PC attendant position installations 3 pair standard line cord When using the kit supplied parts to make the system interconnections be aware of the location parameter detailed in the statement that follows The maximum distance between the Tracker base s...

Page 596: ...Plug the AC power cable from the power supply into a 120 VAC wall outlet b Turn on the base station s power switch 6 Refer to Section 3 for details and make the necessary programming arrangements program the system serial data port parameters Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity none Flow Control none enable the Tracker Paging System assign a pager number to a system intercom number progr...

Page 597: ...Installing Tracker Paging SystemTo A Common Equipment Cabinet IMI89 203 Installing And Programming The Tracker Pager System Tracker Paging System 3 ...

Page 598: ... wall outlet b Turn on the base station s power switch 6 Refer to Section 3 for details and make the necessary programming arrangements program the system serial data port parameters Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity none Flow Control none enable the Tracker Paging System assign a pager number to a system intercom number program the pager types enable the pagers for operation Detailing...

Page 599: ... Ground Pin 6 No Connection DB25 Connector Pin 2 Transmit Data Pin 3 Receive Data Pin 7 Signal Ground COM2 Serial Data Port 25 Pin D Connector Rear View of Typical Personal Computer PC Kit Supplied Modular To EIA Adapter With Female DB25 Connector Power On Off Switch Power In Jack ON OFF POWER ALARM EXTERNAL TRANSMITTER TELEPHONE EIA RS 232C ANTENNA Kit supplied Modular To EIA Adapter With Male DB...

Page 600: ...ing Tracker Paging System operation and selecting PC Attendant 1 through 4 Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select Peripherals and press ENTER 3 From peripherals menu select Tracker and press ENTER 4 From Tracker menu select Options and press ENTER 5 Enter Tracker Paging System base station number 1 through 4 and press ENTER 6 From tracker unit options menu select the s...

Page 601: ...anges n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 13 Press ESCAPE to end 3 1 3 Making Initial Tracker Pager Assignments Description Use the following programming instructions to select intercom numbers to assign pager types and to assign individual pagers to a Tracker base station Use this programming method to make many assignments quickly when first installing the system This program...

Page 602: ...ss number programming select Tracker Access 6 Toggle the SPACE bar to select yes no and press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 8 Press ESCAPE to end To assign the Tracker class of service to a station 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and pre...

Page 603: ...automatically sent to the DXP Plus The installer must program the Tracker for remote installation using the procedure detailed Section 3 1 1 Programming To enable Tracker 1 Activate the Programming pull down menu 2 Press ALT P and press Enter OR press Esc to move the cursor into the menu bar from the main screen 3 Position the cursor on Programming and press Enter 4 Move the cursor to highlight Tr...

Page 604: ... line disconnects The digital communications system stores caller ID information in its SMDA storage and makes it available in the SMDA printout R This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation the Company and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel The information in this manual is subject to change without notice While every effort has been made to eliminate errors ...

Page 605: ...P Plus For the data interface between the caller ID device and the digital communication system use any undedicated serial data port provided by a communications card installed in the DXP Plus 3 Connect the power supply to an 120 VAC electrical outlet and connect the power supply s output cable to the power connector on the rear of the caller ID device Ferrite Collar PCATND8 Loop Start Line Board ...

Page 606: ...rconnecting The Caller ID Device And The DXP Plus Stacking Caller ID Devices Wiring The Data Cable IMI89 205 Installing and Programming The Caller ID Device Installing And Programming The Caller ID Device 3 ...

Page 607: ... 6 S2 7 and S2 8 set the unit address for each caller ID device when you stack multiple devices together Switch S2 1 Switch S2 2 Baud Rate OFF OFF 1200 ON OFF 2400 OFF ON 4800 ON ON 9600 Set ON ON 9600 baud for DXP Plus operation Switch S2 3 Data Bits OFF 7 ON 8 Set ON 8 data bits for DXP Plus operation Switch S2 4 Switch S2 5 Parity OFF OFF NO PARITY ON OFF ODD OFF ON EVEN ON ON EVEN Set OFF OFF ...

Page 608: ... Dip Switch 2 Switches 1 8 Dip Switch 1 Switches 1 8 PWR DATA Caller ID S1 S2 CAJS092 Locating The DIP Switches IMI89 205 Installing and Programming The Caller ID Device Installing And Programming The Caller ID Device 5 ...

Page 609: ...m number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for feature setting 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 for each line port or press ESCAPE to end 10 Assign caller ID lines to stations enable line answer and line originate class of service 11 Assign caller ID button mnemonic CID to st...

Page 610: ... of stations any station user in the group can review the information by pressing the telephone s CID button When he or she does this the system removes the record from that telephone but continues to flash the CID button status light for other stations in the group If you enable this feature the system will remove the caller ID record from all telephones if any user in the group views a record Pr...

Page 611: ...TROL E for edit table 7 Type a to add or r to remove and press ENTER 8 Enter caller ID line port numbers 1 128 enter n nn nnn or n nnn to serve feature at this station and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE three times 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 9 for each station or press ESCAPE to end 3 6 Constructing the Local Call Table Descrip...

Page 612: ...you can assign up to ten intercom numbers or feature codes and assign a single access digit to each of these intercom numbers Each message type has a two digit system index number for example 10 Welcome Greeting 1 11 Welcome Greeting 2 and so forth You use this index number to identify the messages when you record them Many of the messages have a single digit group option number appended to their ...

Page 613: ... DISA Line 1 DISA Voice Option 1 DISA Line 2 DISA Voice Option 1 DISA Line 3 DISA Voice Option 1 Customer Service Department DISA Line 4 DISA Voice Option 2 DISA Line 5 DISA Voice Option 2 DISA Line 6 DISA Voice Option 2 1 1 2 DVA DISA Application You can enhance the security of DISA by using the DVA The DXP Plus connects to the incoming call based on the programmed DISA parameters and the DVA pla...

Page 614: ...es recall busy recall no answer You have reached ABC company Dial 1 for Service Dial 2 for Advanced Features Dial 3 for Assistance 1 Group ITCM 2 DISA Access 3 Station Number Main Number nnn nnnn DVA Index Number10 Welcome Greeting 1 Service Department All phones ring and flash group ITCM Dial your Authorization Code Dial your Feature Access Code Station Number DVA Index Number 31 Password Prompt ...

Page 615: ...nsion number at any time Main Number nnn nnnn DVA Index Number 10 Welcome Greeting 1 Index Prompt 14 Day Night Menu 1 I m sorry that extension doesn t answer Dial 1 to track Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant Dial 3 to leave a message in the voice mail box 1 8 2 Extension Number 3 Voice Mail Port number Index Prompt 22 Recall No Answer 1 I m sorry that extension is busy Dial 1 to Track D...

Page 616: ...sage plays after the caller enters password for advanced DISA features 34 37 Day Routing 1 4 If system can not provide DISA callers with the requested service it plays this message 38 41 Night Routing 1 4 42 Reminder Prompt DISA Callers who are allowed to access advance system features receive this message if they are making a line to line connection through the DXP Plus The message periodically p...

Page 617: ...one with the following specifications 3 Output 8 4 volts 100 mAh 3 Type sealed rechargeable Ni Cd battery 3 Model Varta V7 8R Varta Batteries Inc 300 Executive Blvd Elmsford NY 10523 WARNING Dispose of the used battery in accordance with local and state regulations covering safe disposal of Ni Cd rechargeable batteries 2 0 Installing The DVA Install the DVA on the DXP Plus by performing the steps ...

Page 618: ...al Station Connector Block 25 Pair Male To Female Cable Typical To Common Equipment Cabinet 6 5 4 1 2 3 Station Jack Pin Out Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 No Connection No Connection Tip 1 Ring 1 No Connection No Connection Audio Tape Recorder Typical Digital Station Board Services Board MOH BGM PAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Connecting The DVA IMI89 204 Installing and Programming The DVA Installing and P...

Page 619: ... that he or she must dial a code any single digit or be disconnected within 10 seconds Select the option to either route a DISA call or drop it after caller dials an invalid authorization code Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select Lines and press ENTER 3 From the lines menu select DISA configuration and press ENTER 4 From the DISA configuration menu select Day Routing...

Page 620: ...ess ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Enter the number for the next line you want to program or press ESCAPE to end 3 1 3 Setting Day 1 Day 2 and Night Ringing Begin and End Times Description With this programming procedure set the begin and end times of the day 1 day 2 and night ringing time periods Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for ...

Page 621: ...essage type 5 Make a single digit selection from the list 1 through 0 and press ENTER 6 Enter intercom number or feature code that you wish to assign to this message and press ENTER 7 Press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE to end 3 2 2 Obtaining DVA Status Reports Description Use this programming procedure to obtain DVA ...

Page 622: ...nt recordings with two DVAs the system distributes the messages in both units If someone later removes one unit from service the only messages that will play are those stored in the remaining DVA Programming To record a DVA message 1 Press INTERCOM and dial 0 061 2 Choose voice source dial 1 to speak message into handset dial 2 to play tape recorded message into music on hold jack dial 3 to play t...

Page 623: ...pe to copy NOTE If your installer has connected more than two DVAs to the system the system automatically selects the DVA that will receive the copied message Likewise the system automatically selects the DVA that it uses for playing back the message to a caller Additional DVAs become a shared resource for the system s memory and are not dedicated to particular lines To delete a previously recorde...

Page 624: ...minal Interface ATI D 1PT The DXP Plus can also provide industry standard telephone IST station ports if you have equipped it with IST station boards to do so When an IST port is available for ExecuMail use you do not need to install an external interface device between the ExecuMail system and the DXP IST station ports Regardless of whether you use a VMI X an ATI D 1PT or an industry standard sta...

Page 625: ... damages found Verify that the package contains all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation 2 Locate the VMI X device within 25 feet of both the common equipment cabinet and the ExecuMail system 3 If a backboard is required at the mounting location attach it securely to provide a stable mounting surface 4 Use the base of the VMI X cabinet as a template or measure for mou...

Page 626: ...0 Detailing The VMI X Dimensions BOTTOM OF HOUSING LEFT SIDE OF HOUSING A B D CLOSED OPEN AW1001 Setting The VMI X Configuration Switches Installing And Programming For ExecuMail IMI89 206 Installing And Programming For ExecuMail 3 ...

Page 627: ... AC line cord ground It provides a ground stud on the left side of its housing for this purpose Connect a 6 insulated solid copper wire between this ground stud and a reliable earth ground Plug the AC line cord for the VMI X interface into a 120 VAC outlet Observe the status light on the unit and insure that it turns on steady Inspect the wiring to verify that you have connected it properly CAUTIO...

Page 628: ...Interconnecting The VMI X Installing And Programming For ExecuMail IMI89 206 Installing And Programming For ExecuMail 5 ...

Page 629: ...I D 1PT for shipping damage Notify the shipper immediately of any damages found Verify that the package contains all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation 2 Locate the device within 25 feet of both the common equipment cabinet and the ExecuMail system 1 If a backboard is required at the mounting location attach it securely to provide a stable mounting surface 2 Use the...

Page 630: ...utline Dimensions In Inches Spacing For Mounting Hardware In Inches AW139 Detailing The ATI D 1PT Dimensions Installing And Programming For ExecuMail IMI89 206 Installing And Programming For ExecuMail 7 ...

Page 631: ...ng to verify that you have connected it properly CAUTION Do not connect an industry standard telephone in parallel with bridged across the ExecuMail equipment on the industry standard side of the ATI D 1PT Such a connection will cause the ExecuMail equipment to operate improperly 3 1 1 Verifying Proper ATI D 1PT Connection Use a voltmeter to check for the presence of voltage on the ATI D 1PT IST j...

Page 632: ...Interconnecting The ATI D 1PT Installing And Programming For ExecuMail IMI89 206 Installing And Programming For ExecuMail 9 ...

Page 633: ...ExecuMail port that you plan to connect This means that for a four port ExecuMail system you will need four IST station ports 4 1 Connecting the ExecuMail System Route the necessary cabling and connect the ExecuMail ports to the IST station ports per the connections detailed in the diagram shown on the next page Use one pair two wire cable for all connections Inspect the wiring to verify that you ...

Page 634: ...Interconnecting ExecuMail Directly To DXP Plus Installing And Programming For ExecuMail IMI89 206 Installing And Programming For ExecuMail 11 ...

Page 635: ... Connections Description You must identify the station intercom number of each voice mail connection and link these numbers together to form a circular hunt group for call handling purposes For example assign intercom numbers 121 122 123 and 124 to voice mail ports 1 2 3 and 4 then link 121 to 122 122 to 123 123 to 124 and 124 to 121 Programming Hint To make the LCD readouts at the system telephon...

Page 636: ...for desired setting and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end 5 3 2 Immediate Transfer Description You should choose the automatic attendant immediate transfer mode for voice mail transfers It allows the system to transfer a call as soon as it answe...

Page 637: ...ress ESCAPE twice 5 5 Arranging Voice Mail Ringing Options Description The DXP Plus system automatically enables ringing line preference at the voice mail station ports With this feature enabled the voice mail system s automatic attendant will answer calls You can use direct delayed or night ringing features to determine how quickly or when it does this With direct ringing calls ring at the voice ...

Page 638: ...eature and press ENTER 5 Type the identification ID number and press ENTER 6 Press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 8 Repeat steps 3 7 for each line or press ESCAPE to end 5 7 Enabling Extended DTMF Tones For Voice Mail Use Description The system provides a means by which you can set the length of the DTMF tones that it generates when ...

Page 639: ...ail transferred call This action can alert the voice mail system to disconnect and leave the parties connected Busy If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is busy on a call the DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice system When the voice mail system receives this digit it can abandon the transfer reconnect to the call and offer the caller whatever options the the voice ma...

Page 640: ...select integration digits and press ENTER 5 From the integration digits menu type row number for item and press ENTER 6 Type entry and press ENTER 7 Repeat step 6 until finished 8 When finished press ESCAPE twice 9 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 10 Press ESCAPE twice to return to main menu Installing And Programming For ExecuMail IMI89 206 Installi...

Page 641: ...e trade names of Novell Inc Orem UT R This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation the Company and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel The information in this manual is subject to change without notice While every effort has been made to eliminate errors the Company disclaims liability for any difficulties arising from the interpretation of the information conta...

Page 642: ...10 3X Novell Telephony Services 3X Runtime and the Comdial Driver 10 user ENTTS 025 3X Novell Telephony Services 3X Runtime and the Comdial Driver 25 user ENTTS 050 3X Novell Telephony Services 3X Runtime and the Comdial Driver 50 user ENTTS 100 3X Novell Telephony Services 3X Runtime and the Comdial Driver 100 user ENTTS 250 3X Novell Telephony Services 3X Runtime and the Comdial Driver 250 user ...

Page 643: ...s using screen pop ups to integrate caller ID with database records message management that gives you access to voice mail fax E Mail through a single application and PC control of desktop telephone features 1 5 Doing Telephony Services Administration Functions From the server you can do the following Telephony Services administrative functions identify the software versions used by the digital co...

Page 644: ...ded on a PC provides instructions to the PC for controlling other devices connected to the PC E Mail Electronic Mail Correspondence originated on a PC and transferred over a computer network fax an abbreviation for facsimile Facsimile is the name of equipment used for transmitting pictures and or text over a switched telephone system to be printed out at a distant location filter an operating para...

Page 645: ... on a logical COM Board example Port 0 Board 1 RAM Random Access Memory The personal computer s main memory RAM can be overwritten and is volatile data is lost on loss of power without battery backup RS 232 Serial Port an electrical connector on a computer or other communications equipment where binary data in serial form passes into or out of the device according to the Recommended Standard 232 C...

Page 646: ...and an ohmmeter to trace through all of the circuit paths between the server and system NOTE The standard 6 conductor line cord as supplied in the this kit rolls over the signals That is the signal on pin 6 on one end of the line cord appears on pin 1 on the opposite end and so forth 2 1 Connecting The Server Directly To The DXP System Install the following kit supplied items software key modular ...

Page 647: ...ion RS 232 1 Port RS 232 2 Port Software Key 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 NOTE When using the 9 pin connector install a 9 to 25 pin adapter between connector and software key Customer Supplied 9 to 25 Pin Adapter Typical 14 25 1 1 6 9 5 13 VIEW C VIEW C VIEW C VIEW B VIEW A VIEW A VIEW D Standard 6 conductor Line Cord 1 NC 2 GND 3 RD 4 TD 5 RTS 6 CTS 1 NC 2 TD 3 RD 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 7 GND 20 DTR 1 NC 2...

Page 648: ... the following kit supplied items software key modular to 25 pin EIA adapter and 6 conductor line cord for connecting the server s RS 232 port to the DXP Plus system 1 Install the software key supplied in the kit on the 25 pin serial port on the rear of the server If you are using the 9 pin serial port you must first install a 9 to 25 pin adapter see the following note NOTE When using the 9 pin se...

Page 649: ...E When using the 9 pin connector install a 9 to 25 pin adapter between connector and software key Customer Supplied 9 to 25 Pin Adapter Typical 14 25 1 1 6 9 5 13 VIEW C VIEW C VIEW C VIEW B VIEW D Standard 6 conductor Line Cord 1 NC 2 GND 3 RD 4 TD 5 RTS 6 CTS 1 NC 2 TD 3 RD 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 7 GND 20 DTR 1 NC 2 RD 3 TD 4 DTR 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 9 NC 1 6 14 25 1 13 1 6 9 5 VIEW B VIEW C VIEW ...

Page 650: ...ck on the system end of the house wiring Plug the other end of the line cord into the appropriate system serial data port 4 If a connection problem occurs refer to section 2 4 for a signal interconnect diagram Using this diagram and an ohmmeter you can trace through all of the circuit paths between the server and system to verify that you made the correct connections CAUTION A standard 6 conductor...

Page 651: ...5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 NC GND RD TD RTS CTS NC NC NC NC TD TD RD TD RD RD TD RD RTS RTS DTR RTS CTS CTS GND CTS DSR DSR DSR DSR GND GND RTS CTS GND DTR DTR NC DTR NC GND TD RD CTS RTS NC GND RD TD RTS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Jack Standard 6 Conductor Line Cord NOTE A signal roll over occur...

Page 652: ... 10 When finished press ESCAPE twice 11 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 2 6 Installing The Software This section covers installation of the software on the LAN server 1 Verify that the server includes Novell NetWare version 3 11 or higher If not follow the installation instructions provided with your version of NetWare and install it at this time 2 ...

Page 653: ...l be shown as UNKNOWN 3 1 2 Using The Active Session Information Menu Selecting the Active Session Information menu option provides the following options 1 Display Active Sessions 2 Display Monitored Calls 3 Display Monitored Devices 3 1 2 1 Displaying Active Sessions Selecting the Display Active Sessions option shows a list of all active sessions for the active serial port Sessions are displayed ...

Page 654: ...dify these parameters as follows 1 Using the cursor keys select the parameter you wish to modify 2 Select a new value 3 Press Esc to save your new values NOTE The new values become effective the next time you load the DXP driver see section 2 2 Installing The Software 3 1 3 4 Opening A Link Selecting the open link option establishes a link to the system using the active serial port Any other activ...

Page 655: ...6 from the DB 9 side These pins are needed for establishing communications handshaking between the server and the DXP system 4 CTS RTS flow control not selected on the DXP system port 5 Line cord connected to the wrong port on the server 6 Incorrect baud rate selected on the DXP system 7 Incorrect active port selected in driver administration Access denied to Telephony Services Software key not co...

Page 656: ...ort requires one single pair cable two wire Connection between the external analog IST equipment and the ATI D 1PT requires Another single pair of wires The ATI D 1PT provides modular connectors to allow quick connections The ATI D 1PT circuit will drive a load with a maximum ringer equivalence number REN of 2 0 thus allowing more than one IST connection at each interface input Check the REN numbe...

Page 657: ... device Approximately 4000 feet with 26 AWG twisted pair cable and 300 ohm device load Approximately 500 feet if two IST devices are connected in parallel on same tip and ring pair Cable insulation resistance 30 000 ohms minimum Cable requirement ATI D to common equipment 2 pair twisted cable 25 feet maximum length Both common equipment station ports must always be connected to the ATI D for every...

Page 658: ...Height 2 375 inches Width 8 062 inches Length 11 125 inches Weight 4 lbs plus 2 lbs for packing material Industry Regulatory Standards FCC registered and listed for safety compliance as part of digital communications system FCC certified Part 15 class A Installing And Programming For ATI D 1PT IMI89 208 Installing The ATI D 1PT 3 ...

Page 659: ...Notify the shipper immediately of any damage found Verify that the package contains all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation 2 If a backboard is required at the mounting location attach it securely to provide a stable mounting surface 3 Use the base of the ATI D 1PT as a template or measure for mounting hole locations per the dimension details shown in illustration 4 ...

Page 660: ...Outline Dimensions In Inches Spacing For Mounting Hardware In Inches AW139 Detailing The ATI D 1PT Dimensions Installing And Programming For ATI D 1PT IMI89 208 Installing The ATI D 1PT 5 ...

Page 661: ...ce As stated previously the ATI D 1PT is an on premise device You must use an OPX long loop adapter if you wish to adapt the ATI D 1PT to support an off premise application An OPX long loop adapter connects to a single telephone line and can greatly extend the line s loop length the Proctor Model 46222 adapter for example can extend line length to 30 000 feet In addition such units can be used to ...

Page 662: ...e adapter and connect the opposite end of the cord to the OPX line Plug the adapter power cord into a standard 117 VAC 3 wire electrical outlet Interconnecting The ATI D 1PT Installing And Programming For ATI D 1PT IMI89 208 Installing The ATI D 1PT 7 ...

Page 663: ...nterfaced or you can program that station port for idle line preference and then assign several lines to the station port With either prime line automatic or idle line preference the IST has outside line dial tone for call origination when its user lifts its handset You can enable outside line ringing at the IST station port that you have programmed for either prime line automatic or idle line pre...

Page 664: ...e Use this procedure to choose the prime line 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or station name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 From prime line menu type line port number and press ENTER 7 When ...

Page 665: ...d press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Type any eight line port numbers type as n nn nnn or n nnn and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resum...

Page 666: ...o any time from one to 99 msec 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select timing and press ENTER 4 From timing menu type item number for line pulse make and press ENTER 5 Type desired time 1 99 and press ENTER 6 From timing menu type item number for line pulse break and press ENTER 7 Type desired time 1 99 and press ENTER 8 Press ESCAPE...

Page 667: ...press ENTER 8 Type line port number type as n nn nnn or n nnn and press ENTER 9 When finished press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 10 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Delayed Ringing Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at a station after waiting a short time period from when a c...

Page 668: ... ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press CONTROL E to edit 7 Type a for add or r for remove and press ENTER 8 Type line port number type as n nn nnn or n nnn and press ENTER 9 When finished press ESCAPE twice ...

Page 669: ... finished press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER Ring No Answer Rings This procedure sets the amount of rings that sound at one station port before the call rolls over to ring at another station port Any system feature that requires a ring no answer value for example call forwarding uses the setting that you program here The system de...

Page 670: ...ging for voice mail ports 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service number 1 32 that corresponds with class of service assigned to the IST and press ENTER 5 From COS programming menu type row number for IST distinctive ringing and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for feature sett...

Page 671: ...ports two off premise extensions Each off premise circuit can drive a load with a maximum ringer equivalence number REN of two 2 thus allowing more than one industry standard telephone connection at each off premise location if desired The OPX X will support virtually any industry standard telephone device such as 500 and 2500 type telephones cordless telephones answering machines and data modems ...

Page 672: ...m including telephony device Approximately 20 000 feet with 24 AWG twisted pair cable and 400 ohm device load Cable insulation resistance 30 000 ohms minimum Cable requirement OPX X to digital communications system 2 pair twisted Cable terminations 623 type 4 conductor minijacks Dialing Industry standard DTMF Dial pulse rotary with nominal make break ratio of 40 60 10 PPS Ringing cadence 1 second ...

Page 673: ...th 11 50 in Weight 8 lbs plus 2 lbs for packing material Industry Regulatory Standards FCC registered Key System CVW7WC 12829 KF E Hybrid Key System CVW7WC 16553 MF E FCC certified Part 15 class A UL listed Leased Line Specifications Facility interface code 0L13C Line conditioning Dry metallic Installing And Programming The OPX X IMI89 209 Installing The OPX X 3 ...

Page 674: ...ared holes are required Connecting tool for fastening wires to a type 66 connector block Crimping tool for 623 type modular plugs 2 2 Mounting The Cabinet 1 Unpack and carefully inspect the OPX X for shipping damage Notify the shipper immediately of any damages found Verify that the packages contain all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation 2 If a backboard is required...

Page 675: ...AW1002A 11 50 10 25 3 0 8 75 7 0 Detailing The OPX X Dimensions Installing And Programming The OPX X IMI89 209 Installing The OPX X 5 ...

Page 676: ... lines do not damage the system be sure gas discharge tubes or similar protection devices are installed and properly grounded in all connected TELCO lines 2 4 Verifying Proper Installation Use a voltmeter to check for the presence of either AC or DC voltage on the OPX1 and OPX 2 ports Make these voltage measurements with all system wiring installed and the AC power turned off 1 Measure for both AC...

Page 677: ...Connecting The Equipment Installing And Programming The OPX X IMI89 209 Installing The OPX X 7 ...

Page 678: ... through the digital communications system Open NOTE 1 This switch setting matches the system requirements It is not possible to perform voice signalling from a device connected through an OPX X to the common equipment NOTE 2 When you have programmed the system to allow the off premise device to have access to outside line you must also enable a signal delay to prevent transmission of extraneous D...

Page 679: ...preference and then assign several lines to the station port With either prime line automatic or idle line preference the IST has outside line dial tone for call origination when its user lifts its handset You can enable outside line ringing at the IST station port that you have programmed for either prime line automatic or idle line preference Alternately you can enable the ringing line preferenc...

Page 680: ...procedure to choose the prime line 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or station name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 From prime line menu type line port number type as n nn nnn or n nnn and pres...

Page 681: ...ions and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Type any eight line numbers type as n nn nnn or n nnn and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to res...

Page 682: ...ts to any time from one to 99 msec 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select timing and press ENTER 4 From timing menu type item number for line pulse make and press ENTER 5 Type desired time 1 99 and press ENTER 6 From timing menu type item number for line pulse break and press ENTER 7 Type desired time 1 99 and press ENTER 8 Press ES...

Page 683: ...and press ENTER 8 Type line port number type as n nn nnn or n nnn and press ENTER 9 When finished press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 10 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Delayed Ringing Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at a station after waiting a short time period from when...

Page 684: ...nd press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press CONTROL E to edit 7 Type a for add or r for remove and press ENTER 8 Type line port number type as n nn nnn or n nnn and press ENTER 9 When finished press ESCAP...

Page 685: ...When finished press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER Ring No Answer Rings This procedure sets the amount of rings that sound at one station port before the call rolls over to ring at another station port Any system feature that requires a ring no answer value for example call forwarding uses the setting that you program here The syste...

Page 686: ... 3 From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service number 1 32 that corresponds with class of service assigned to the IST and press ENTER 5 From COS programming menu type row number for IST distinctive ringing and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for feature setting 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing ...

Page 687: ...T1 DXPRI combination that provides the control is designated as DXPT1 PRI and the boards being controlled are designated as DXPT1 NFAS The NFAS boards do not require a DXPRI card as they are slaves to the master PRI board Throughout the remainder of this publication the term T1 PRI means a T1 board specifically configured for ISDN PRI operation be it either a DXPT1 PRI or a DXPT1 NFAS board Since ...

Page 688: ...s and Its Supporting Needs Since the DXP Plus supports a maximum of 240 lines and each T1 PRI board handles up to 24 channels you can install up to 10 boards in the DXP Plus system You can install these 10 boards in any available universal board slot in the main or expansion cabinets Of course any other line boards that you install such as loop start DID or multipurpose reduce the number of lines ...

Page 689: ...ernal source The DXOPT SYN card reports this condition by turning on the appropriate alarms on the T1 PRI board and DXOPT SYN card A loss of clock synchronization causes frame slips that result in data communications errors The DXOPT SYN card allows two timing references primary and secondary to be selected You can select either automatic or manual for maintenance mode In the automatic mode a loss...

Page 690: ... settings cause the green diagnostic lights to give information about PRi layer 3 and 3 operation The remaining 20 DIP switches labeled SW1 SW2 and LIU are for configuring the T1 PRI board to meet specific operating requirements The default setting for all of these switches is 0 except for LIU 2 which you should set to 1 This is the standard configuration for most customer applications However spe...

Page 691: ... 8 See Text For Settings 0 1 SW2 Default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 See Text For Settings See Text For Settings Diagnostic Switches and LEDs Default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 See Text For Settings 0 1 0 1 0 1 Setting The DIP Switches Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89 255 Configuring The T1 PRI Board 5 ...

Page 692: ...sruption Setting Switch Options SW1 1 Through SW1 8 Down Load PRI Code To Flash The DXPRI card has internal software that resides in FLASH memory that you can up grade from the DXP Plus serial data port You must set SW1 8 for down load or for normal operation SW1 DIP Switch Number Switch Position Function 1 top 0 default Reserved for future use 2 0 default Reserved for future use 3 4 5 0 default R...

Page 693: ...nal A weak receive signal causes a strong transmit signal and vice versa Use DIP switch LIU 2 to select either the manual or the automatic setting If you select the manual setting set the desired value with DIP switches LIU 3 and LIU 4 Normally 0 dB is used when connecting to a network interface box LIU DIP Switch Number Switch Position Function 1 top 0 default 1 RECEIVE SIGNAL SENSITIVITY 26 dB 3...

Page 694: ... external CSU default Set C R to be a one 1 bit if the network requires the T1 internal CSU to be classified as carrier equipment Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC 6 This is a method for checking the accuracy of data transmissions when using the ESF format This method uses a polynomial algorithm based on the content of a super frame of data When CRC 6 checking is enabled via DIP switch SW2 4 an alarm wi...

Page 695: ...r future use reserved reserved 4 0 default 1 CRC CYCLIC REDUNDANCY CHECK disabled enabled 5 0 default 1 FDL YELLOW ALARM DURING ANSI MESSAGES disabled enabled 6 0 default 1 B8ZS COFA LED DEFINITION COFA change of frame alignment B8ZS detect 7 8 0 0 default 0 1 1 0 1 1 MANUAL loop back REQUEST no loop back local loop back request remote loop back request payload loop back request Installing And Pro...

Page 696: ...is an appropriate grounding point since it should have a heavy ground wire connected between it and a good earth ground CAUTION Do not remove or install the services board while the DXP Plus is powered on or severe system problems may occur 4 Locate the services board loosen the retaining screws remove it from the main cabinet place it in a static protection bag and transport it to the static safe...

Page 697: ...nization Board Services Board PLUS008 Installing The Synchronization Card On The Services Board Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89 255 Installing The Synchronization Card On The Services Board 11 ...

Page 698: ...ISDN PRI lines supplied by the primary CO supplier Designate the primary board by placing straps on the services board and by setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface boards If your system has only one CO supplier you do not need to designate a secondary board however if the system has a second CO service supplier you must designate one T1 PRI board as the secondary board Choose thi...

Page 699: ...nsion UNV8 J or K 8 Upper Expansion UNV9 J or K 9 Upper Expansion UNV10 J or K 10 Upper Expansion UNV11 J or K 11 Lower Expansion UNV1 L or M 1 Lower Expansion UNV2 L or M 2 Lower Expansion UNV3 L or M 3 Lower Expansion UNV4 L or M 4 Lower Expansion UNV5 L or M 5 Lower Expansion UNV6 L or M 6 Lower Expansion UNV7 L or M 7 Lower Expansion UNV8 L or M 8 Lower Expansion UNV9 L or M 9 Lower Expansion ...

Page 700: ...ll one T1 PRI board in the main cabinet you must strap one pin pair A I on the services board s PRIMARY strap block This strap designates the main cabinet slot where you installed the T1 PRI board Example If you install a T1 PRI board in universal slot two in the main cabinet you must strap pin pair B on the PRIMARY strap block b If you install two or more T1 PRI boards in the main cabinet you mus...

Page 701: ...oth expansion cabinets Example If you install two T1 PRI boards in universal slots two and three in the upper expansion cabinet and you designate these boards primary and secondary respectively you must strap pin pair J on the PRIMARY strap block and strap pin pair K on the SECONDARY strap block You also must close SWA 2 and SWB 3 on the upper expansion cabinet s interface board 5 If the system re...

Page 702: ...ng Pairs A B C D E F G H I J K L M Secondary Clock Strapping Block PLUS009 J6 J7 Upper Cabinet Lower Cabinet Locating The Services Board Strapping Blocks IMI89 255 Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card 16 Configuring The Services and Interface Boards ...

Page 703: ...8 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 PLUS010 SWA SWB Note SWA 12 and SWB 12 are not used on Interface 2 upper cabinet SWA 11 12 and SWB 11 12 are not used on Interface 3 lower cabinet SWA and SWB switches not in use must be in off open position Locating The Interface Board DIP Switches Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89 255 Configuring The Services and Interface Boards 17 ...

Page 704: ... a good earth ground The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing it is a good practice to prepare a static safe work area on which to place the cabinet You should supply yourself with a static dischar...

Page 705: ...Ohm Resister Conductive Mat Static Discharge Wrist Stap Common Equipment Cabinet PLUS034 Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89 255 Installing Circuit Boards 19 ...

Page 706: ... PRI board at the right most board slot in the second or lower expansion cabinet The system reserves this slot for internal use 6 If you are installing the board in an operating system connect the free end of the pre charge cord that you installed in step 1 to the pre charge jack on the line board 7 Orient the board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage and press the board firm...

Page 707: ... any universal board slot Universal board slots 1 9 Universal board slots 1 10 DO NOT install boards in last slot on right in lower expansion cabinet Static discharge wrist strap Pre charge jack PLUS011A Installing The DXPT1 Board In The DXP Plus Cabinet Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89 255 Installing The T1 PRI Line Board 21 ...

Page 708: ...ane CAUTION When pressing circuit boards into place press them only at the extractor lever locations If you apply pressure at other locations you may damage the board assembly 4 Make a final inspection to ensure that the board assembly is oriented correctly and mated properly 5 Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the board assembly to the board cage 6 If applicable plug the power cab...

Page 709: ...BGM MOH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 COMDIAL OPBD3 OUT MAIN CABINET BATTERY OPBD2 ON OK STATUS OPBD1 PLUS006 PRI PRI SEC SEC UNLOCKED SOURCE DXOPT SYN MODE MANUAL AUTO MAN Installing The Services Board Assembly Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89 255 Installing The Services Board Assembly 23 ...

Page 710: ...twork interface box verify that there is standard lightning protection installed externally to the box on its network side Primary protection where the cable enters the building is necessary to prevent a fire hazard inside the building Detailing the Cable Requirements Normally the ISDN PRI connection to a central office is via a network interface box smart jack The box is usually small with an 8 p...

Page 711: ...ain Connector On DXPT1 Board 1 R1 R C1 Receive C1 Transmit T1 T 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Connecting The ISDN PRI Line To the T1 PRI Board Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89 255 Connecting The ISDN PRI Line To The System 25 ...

Page 712: ... you to select a default value for the Calling Number ID The system uses this number to identify the calling party in the following cases when you use the Calling Number ID Mode feature to specify board level identification when you do not program a calling number identification for a station see Station Programming for details and when the call is a line to line call through the system Calling Nu...

Page 713: ...ers from a list of NFAS boards that are not assigned to any other group To understand how to program a NFAS group list consider the example that follows below Assume the following parameters a CO has a DMS 100 switch that provides your system with five T1 circuits configured for NFAS service the CO representatives identify each circuit and specify interface numbers as 0 through 4 with interface nu...

Page 714: ...display is dependent on the length of the DID DNIS block name End the DID DNIS block name with a space if you desire a blank space between the name and the CO digits when they show on an LCD speakerphone s display Also the number of CO digits that will show in the display is dependent on the length of the DID DNIS block name Expected CO Digits Type quantity 0 7 of digits and press ENTER Obtain a b...

Page 715: ...f CO digits that you obtain from the telephone company Then you must enter the intercom number that you want to match with the first CO digit sequence in the string With this the system automatically matches the remainder of the CO digit string to consecutive intercom numbers beginning with the one that you entered You can edit the translation table by selecting the item number for each entry and ...

Page 716: ...he many other features that you can assign to a station there are several features that are specific to ISDN PRI service Signal Type The Signal Type feature selects the information transfer capability that the system requests during call setup for a specific station port The signal types that you can select include the following items Speech digitized speech only allows analog transmission echo ca...

Page 717: ...lict with existing numbers the system provides a block of unassigned numbers that you can use for renumbering At default the system assigns blocks of numbers in the following ranges 1001 1480 personal intercoms 4001 4480 5000 5039 group intercoms 5040 5999 unassigned 600 899 feature codes 9 line group 1 There are two features used with ISDN PRI service that have no defaulted dialing code Use this ...

Page 718: ...ity of the ones pulses marks alternates between plus and minus with a zero space represented by no pulse A bipolar violation occurs whenever two successive pulses are of the same polarity This alarm LED indicates a bipolar violation BPV has occurred It is important to note that BPV errors are not passed through regeneration points This alarm indicates a receive problem Cyclic Redundancy Check red ...

Page 719: ... frequency is out of tolerance 1 544 Mhz 200 Hz or that no valid ISDN PRI line is connected MANUAL red LED This LED when lit indicates that the manual mode has been selected via the AUTO MANUAL mode switch on the DXOPT SYN card When you select the manual mode normally for maintenance troubleshooting you can select either the primary or secondary timing reference by setting the PRI SEC switch on th...

Page 720: ...l RLB Remote loop back active l LLB Local loop back active l PAYL Payload loop back active Signalling message from DXP Signalling message to DXP Future feature T1 PRI in network mode Not currently defined Not currently defined On D channel layer 2 is down D channel message to network D channel message from network Synchronization Card LED Label Error Or Status Condition When Led Is Lit PRI Timing ...

Page 721: ...FA Remote Loopback Local Loopback Payload Loopback Primary Secondary Unlocked Status Manual DXOPT SYN Card Diagnostic Switches and LEDs DXPT1 Board PLUS007d cdr Viewing The Alarms And Indicators Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89 255 Viewing The Alarms And Indicators 35 ...

Page 722: ...gnalling Channel Associated Signalling is a method of signalling where all signalling occurs on the channel being controlled Examples of CAS are loop start and T1 lines CCS Common Channel Signalling Common Channel Signalling is a method of signalling were all signalling for a group of channels occurs on one channel ISDN is a CCS protocol COFA Change of Frame Alignment When switch SW2 6 is off the ...

Page 723: ...he clock source primary or secondary for the DXOPT SYN card the remote equipment terminates the reference signal because the network receive circuit is open in local loop back You initiate local loop back by setting the appropriate SW1 switches The main purpose of local loop back is to verify the T1 PRI board s ability to synchronize properly Loop back Payload The loop back payload feature is an E...

Page 724: ...DXCPU cpu board When it does this slips occur Repeater A repeater is a amplifying device that central office technicians place at approximately one mile intervals along a T1 PRI circuit to boost the T1 PRI signal The T1 PRI specifications allow a maximum of 50 repeaters along a communications path Slip This term describes the condition that exists when the transmit 1 544 MHz clock is different fro...

Page 725: ...requency 6 Hz attenuates 20 dB per decade above corner Surge Protection 1 AMP fuse and transient protection for metallic 6 volts P P Longitudinal tip ring and chassis ground protection 1500 volts minimum Elastic Store Two frames no frame loss when slipping Compliance FCC Part 68 Doc FCC Part 15 UL 1489 CSA safety USOC 6 0Y FIC 04DU9 1SN Yellow Alarm Type Alternating bytes all zeros and all ones pr...

Page 726: ...sconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back up assembly from the digital communications system s main cabinet power supply however when necessary you can remove a DXPT1 board from an operating system If you must do this connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the pre charge port on the power supply During step 5 you will connect the o...

Page 727: ...entation of the chip that you just removed 5 Press the chip into place in the socket CAUTION Do not bend any of the chip s pins so that they do not make contact with the socket 6 Inspect the modified DXPT1 board for proper installation and return it to its static protection bag 7 Refer to the paragraph titled Installing The T1 PRI Line Board and re install the modified DXPT1 board in the system 8 ...

Page 728: ...DP I I I I and FX Series Digital Communications Systems Understanding The Visual Man Machine Interface COMDlA ...

Page 729: ...VMMI With Windows 95 7 Making the Programming Connection 8 Using VMMI Software to Archive and Restore the Database 9 Using VMMI Software to Build a New Database Up Grading the System Software on the DXP Plus Activating System Software on the FX Series Turning On the FX Series System Software Completing the FX Series System Start Up Procedure Up Grading The System Software on the DXP Converting the...

Page 730: ...area A double click on a main element collapses its expanded menu VMMI allows you to directly connect to the communications system and program it on line Alternately you can program a database off line save it and down load it in the communications system at a later date When you make programming changes on some of the VMMI menus note that the program places a K to the right of a changed item to d...

Page 731: ...Once you locate the topic you can click on it to jump directly to its discussion Often the discussion windows provide additional jump paths that allow you to quickly review related topics These jump paths may take several forms They may appear as separate large windows that you can scroll through as you read the information or they may appear as small windows that appear in the middle of the windo...

Page 732: ... mouse Double clicking is pressing your left mouse button twice in rapid succession Dragging the Mouse Dragging or moving a window consists of three steps 1 pressing and holding the left mouse button 2 moving the mouse 3 releasing the mouse button Dragging allows you to move the position of a window on the screen You can position help windows on the screen to give yourself a better view Determinin...

Page 733: ... remotely through a telephone line to the DXP Plus using customer supplied modems at both the PC and the DXP Plus common equipment The DXP Plus includes its own modem that you can connect between the CPU board s modem port and an outside telephone line NOTES LSerial Modem Port 1 Maximum distance between each ofthe two dedicated serial data ports and its external data equipment is 25 feet Ez 1 2 3 ...

Page 734: ...a serial data printer you can add a communications card to the DXP and connect the programming PC to a serial data port that the card provides See your DXP System Hardware Instructions the Volume I binder for complete installation details You can connect the PC remotely through a telephone line to the DXP using customer supplied modems at both the PC and the DXP common equipment The Comdial DXMDM ...

Page 735: ...terface VMMI for system database programming NOTE If you use pcANYWHERIP for remote operation of the computer portion you must use VMMI to select either COM I or COM 2 as the internal modem s data pipe port and you must configure this data pipe port for 19 200 baud RTYCTS control eight data bits one stop bit and no parity bit Of cow se the cable connection 4 must match the data pipe port selection...

Page 736: ... Run window type Ahetup and OK your entry The install window gives a default file location to receive the program however you can enter a different file location if you wish OK the default file location or your new entry The install window gives a default location of the VMMI program disk however if you have installed the disk in a different drive enter that location OK the default location or you...

Page 737: ...ou are connected remotely through a modem To speed up the data transfer process you should use a data speed of 19 2 Kbs kilobits per second for the DXP Plus and FX Series and 9600 bit per second for the DXP If you plan to operate at this higher data speed first connect at the default rate then use the VMMI programming menu to change the data parameters of the system and finally use the Switch drop...

Page 738: ...ve operation to use and OK your choice Since the database can be quite large you should chose a location on your computer s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the database 7 The system automatically archives its database To retrieve a database 1 Turn on your PC and load the Windows software 2 Select the VMMI program from the Windows menu screen 3 From the VMMI window select ...

Page 739: ...your computer s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the database Use the VMMI menus and program the database parameters Save your results for loading into the system The system prompts you for the file name at this point To load the new database in the system 1 Connect your PC to the communications system 2 Turn on your PC and load the Windows software 3 Select the VMMI progr...

Page 740: ...ations system 1 Turn on your PC and load Windows 2 Select the VMMI program from the Windows screen 3 From the VMMI window select the Switch pull down menu 4 If you have not previously archived the system database do so now a From the Switch pull down menu select Archive Database b Choose a storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice Since the database can be quite large yo...

Page 741: ...owing the key s s al number and the current magic number of the installed key 3 Contact Comdial Distributor Services at l 800 669 2663 to order the system software At the same time you can order any of the following application features that you desire FXSSW WOl includes VVP 5 user wideopen office and 5 user wideopen call FXSSW W02 includes VVP 50 user wideopen office and 25 user wideopen call FXS...

Page 742: ...sure that the telephony port is configured for 9600 baud eight data bits and one stop bit Click the I m ready Enable the FX Now button This action enables the FX Series system software The system returns the update utility window that now shows a completion code value to indicate that the procedure is finished Verify that the completion code matches the completion code that the Comdial representat...

Page 743: ...henever someone restarts the FX Series system To run the Start Up utility locate the Start Up icon on the Windows 95 a desktop and double click it with your computer mouse StartUpi i _ i Wl up C Once the utility finishes running you must exit the Windows 95 program and restart the computer This action is often referred to as rebooting the computer When the computer restarts and after you take care...

Page 744: ...rd drive The saved database can include any or all of the following data system information station parameters line parameters toll restriction and automatic route selection parameters and system speed dial numbers but it does not include the SMDAKMDR records If you need these SMDNSMDR records you must make a printout of them before you perform the database storage This is necessary because this s...

Page 745: ...ccordingly Refer to the Comdial publication IMIOl 005 Handling Of Electrostatically Sensitive Components for general information Specific handling precautions are also included in this installation instruction The expanded memory card DXRAM EXPC and the system software memory card DXPSW DLRC are supplied in static protection bags Do not open a static protection bag prior to installation time When ...

Page 746: ...MI Providing Static Prote on At The Cabinet Location ESD Protective Common Point Ground Mat Typical Ground 3D Protective Worksurface ESD Protective v Mat Creating A Static Safe Work Area Up Grading the System Soft ware on the DXP 17 ...

Page 747: ...rk area At the static safe work area with your wrist strap in place remove the DXCPU 68K circuit board the new DXRAM EXPC expansion memory card and the new DXPSW DLRC software memory card from their static protection bags Refer to illustration and remove the currently installed memory cards from the DXCPU 68K board Orient the DXCPU 68K board and the new memory cards as shown in the illustration an...

Page 748: ...rcuit Card DXCPU Circuit Board 4 WI 40 Machine Screw 4 Lockwasher DXPSW XXXXX l 4 Hex 4 40x M F Spacer 625 Long Connectors A 4 Lockwasher WA I I IDXFLAM XXXXX I I 1 1 n rnnnectnrs I 1 1 114 Hex 4 40 __ _ ___ __ Front M F Spacer 625 Long Panel 4 Lockwasher L C I I 4 40 Hex Nut 3X A I Installing The Memory and Softwag Cards ...

Page 749: ...lear sequence After the master clear sequence is complete the indicators on the DXCPU 68K and DXSRV boards turn on steady and the indicators on the station and line boards wink ON for four seconds and OFF for four seconds 3 After power up set DIP switch 8 to its OFF position 4 Press the RESET button on the CPU board to reset the system NOTE The system performs the automatic master clear one time f...

Page 750: ...Upgrade DXP025 DXCPU 68K DXRAM xxx DXS W xxx Locating DIP Switch 8 and the Reset Button Restoring the Converted Database to the DXP Connect your PC to the DXP and use VMMI to restore the translated 1OA database to the DXP Note that with VMMI you do not need the XMODEM communications program that you needed to store the current database Up Grading the System Software on the DXP 21 ...

Page 751: ...80 1 1UNVIO LINE1 I I I 25 32 1UNVll LINE2 I I 117 24 j UNVl2 LINE3 9 16 LINE4 1 8 Product Code Of installed Board Station Line I Number Number Of Slot Of Slot I 81 96 121 128 97 l 12 113 120 113 128 105 l 12 129 144 97 104 145 160 89 96 161 176 81 88 177 192 73 80 b Using your charted information answer the prompts on the Select Board Type window The prompts first asks for all installed station b...

Page 752: ... Product Code Of installed Board 11 I 1 32 AlJX2 I I 12 I 32 13 1 32 I 14 1 32 I I 15 1 32 16 1 32 17 l 32 1 18 1 32 I I I9 l 32 2OC I 32 DXP Plus Main Cabinet Universal Slot Designation Enter Product Code Of Installed Board 1 l 32 IAUX 2 l 32 I 1 3 1 32 I I 4 l 32 5 l 32 6 l 32 17 1 32 I I 1 8 1 32 I I 9 I 32 DXP Plus Lower Expansion Cabinet Universal Slot Designation 21 l 32 AUX 1 Enter Product ...

Page 753: ...Digital Communications System Programming Instructions This publication reflects software releases through 2 A Printed in U S A COMDWm IMI66 123 01 8195 ...

Page 754: ...CERTIFBEC IS0 sooa Corndial s Quality Management System 1s Certified To The IS0 9001 Standard 3 AtoZ K E L L A T R O N I C S INC ii ...

Page 755: ...atabase 1 7 Using VMMI Software To Perform The Board Configuration 1 8 Configuring The Windows Terminal Emulation 2 Reviewing General Programming Considerations 3 Understanding Keyboard And Terminal Definitions 3 1 Reviewing The Keyboard Definitions 3 2 Reviewing the Control Key Definitions 3 3 Reviewing The Terminal Mode Definitions 4 Reviewing The Command Prompts And Error Reporting 4 1 Reviewin...

Page 756: ...eters 7 Programming Sfafion Features 7 1 Programming Station Class Of Service Features 7 2 Programming Station Features 7 3 Square Non Square System Button Mapping By Station 7 4 Telephone Types Phone Types 7 5 Copy Model COS Station Button Map Block Programming 8 Programming Line Features 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 Line Programming Line Group Programming Copy Model Line Block Programming Lin...

Page 757: ... 1 Toll Restriction Example 1 11 2 Toll Restriction Example 2 11 3 Toll Restriction Flow Diagram 11 4 Restriction Level Programming 11 5 Toll Groups Programming 11 6 Restricted Numbers Programming 11 7 Exception Number Programming 72 Enabling Automatic Route Selection 12 1 Automatic Route Selection Diagram 12 2 ARS Enable 12 3 Line Groups for ARS 12 4 Route Tables ARS 12 5 Costing Information ARS ...

Page 758: ...Voice Announce Programming 14 4 PC Attendant Position Programming 14 5 Voice Mail Programming 14 6 Modem Setup 15 Configuring The System s Board Layout 15 1 Understanding The Board Configuration Feature 15 2 Examining The Board Status 15 3 Adding Boards To The System 15 4 Deleting Boards From The System 15 5 Moving Boards Within The System vi Table Of Contents ...

Page 759: ...a port required for communications with DXP Plus l mouse that is supported by Microsoft Windows software optional but highly recommended for Microsoft Windows operation l dual scan active matrix color monitor highly recommended VGA monochrome acceptable l Microsoft Windows version 3 11 or later l Microsoft MS DOS operating system version 3 1 or later You will also need Comdial s Visual Man Machine...

Page 760: ...he DXP Phs includes its own modem that someone on site can connect between the CPU board s modem port and an outside telephone line NOTE Do not perform a system software upgrade through a modem connection NOTES D 3 3 J L Serial Modem Port 1 Maximum distance between the two dedicated serial data ports and the external data equipment is limited to 25 feet 2 Some data devices require L Maintenance Po...

Page 761: ...w gives a default file location to receive the program however you can enter a different file location if you wish OK the default file location or your new entry The install window gives a default location of the VMMI software disk however if you have installed the disk in a different drive enter that location OK the default location or your new entry The status window appears on the screen and th...

Page 762: ... Bits None Flow Control None However Comdial engineers recommend that you use a baud rate of 19 2 kilobaud to speed up the data transfer process You can exit the VMMI program and use the Windows terminal emulation programming to reprogram the serial data parameters of the maintenance port to this faster baud rate see Sections 1 8 5 0 and 6 4 for details 8 If you use the Windows terminal emulation ...

Page 763: ... 1 I 4 If you have not previously archived the system data base do so now a From the DXP pull down menu select Archive Database 9 CTli b Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice Since the data base can be quite large you should chose a location on your computer s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data base c The system automat...

Page 764: ...XP Data Base I When a DXP contains system software that is at a revision level earlier than 8 A you must upgrade that DXP s database before you can translate it into a DXP Plus database To do this employ an XMODEM data communications program to store the database on a magnetic diskette or on your computer s hard drive Then employ a revision 8 A or later PCMMI program obtainable from Comdial s bull...

Page 765: ...base save is automatic however depending upon the baud rate the down load may take 5 25 minutes Restoring The DXP Database 1 Load the revision 8 A or later PCMMI program that you obtained from the Comdial bulletin board service into your PC and start the program 2 If the saved DXP database is on a diskette install the diskette in your PC floppy disk drive 3 Press CONTROL T for the main menu 4 From...

Page 766: ...g a Make a record of the DXP s physical board configuration You can use the configuration record that you recorded using IMI40 089 Configuring The DXP Hardware Or you can create a reference chart by entering product codes in the following table b Using your charted information answer the prompts on the Select Board Type window The prompts first asks for all installed station boards beginning with ...

Page 767: ...nged board layout use your mouse to move the board images to the slots that you would rather that they occupy Make a record of these board locations so that you or your installer can physically install the boards to match your plan DXP Plus Upper Expansion Cabinet Universal Slot Designation lO 132 AUXl 11 132 AUX2 Enter Product Code Of Installed Board 15 1 32 16 132 17 132 7 19 132 20 132 DXP Plus...

Page 768: ... chose a location on your computer s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data base The system automatically archives its data base and prompts you to OK the action To retrieve a data base 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turn on your PC and load the Windows software Select the VMMI program from the Windows menu screen From the VMMI window select the DXP pull down menu From the DXP pull do...

Page 769: ...m the Open Data Base File window select the DXP Plus database and OK your choice The VMMI program presents a screen graphic that depicts the the DXP Plus boards installed in their current configuration If you do not care for the board layout use your mouse to move the board images to the slots that you would rather that they occupy Make a record of these board locations so that you or your install...

Page 770: ...Bits None None Flow Control None None When you set the DIP switch to OFF you can program the DXP PEus data port configuration to different parameters Prepare the terminal emulation for communications by following the procedure detailed below 1 From the Windows Program Manager select the Accessories window 2 From the accessories window select Terminal 3 From the Terminals window select the Settings...

Page 771: ...ired response that you must make l Some menus contain more than one page On these menus you can press and hold the CONTROL key while you type the N key to display the next page or type P to display the previous page l Each prompt requires a response followed by a Carriage Return RETURN A more common label for this control on most PC keyboards is ENTER l Most menu responses usually consists of a on...

Page 772: ...st press the ESCAPE key and type a y followed by the ENTER key to save the change l Punctuation and Symbol keys Except for comma which is a field delimiter use the punctuation and symbols on the keyboard just as you use the alphabetic keys l RETURN or ENTER key Use this key to terminate the response to a command prompt or to end the editing of a data field The system ignores a RETURN without any p...

Page 773: ...of data for those database items that fill more that one screen There will always be an on screen note when this key is valid This key is identical to the Control N key except that it displays the previous page of information When you press this key the system will redraw the current screen display Usually you use this key when the terminal display is configured in brief mode This key will return ...

Page 774: ...tion of each item one at a time for viewing or editing When you use the ESCAPE key to exit the database information screen the system displays the next item in the list When you use CONTROL C to exit the screen all list processing stops and the prompt display returns When you use CONTROL T to exit the screen the system stops all list processing and displays the top level menu l Multiple Choice Que...

Page 775: ...I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I COMDIAL DIGITAL EXPANDABLE REVXJCX Note that the main menu shows the currently installed software release number t d From the main programming menu choose the type of programming that is required Type the number of the choice and press ENTER Main Menu 1 System 2 Stations 3 Lines 4 Intercom Numbers 5 SMDA SMDR 6 Toll ARS 7 Printouts 8 Diagnostics ...

Page 776: ...Perform SYSTEM CLOCK procedure Sets time displayed at LCD speakerphones to current time I Set the system clock even ifno LCD speakerphones are used If analog telephones or consoles are employed use TELEPHONE TYPES procedure to identify telephone types to station ports If digital stations are installed they automatically identify themselves to ports at power up however if they are not installed unt...

Page 777: ...rt Serial Data Port Parameters 6 4 l Subdued Off Hook Voice Announce SOHVA Programming 6 5 l SpeedDial Programming 6 6 l System Clock Time and Date 6 7 l SystemTiming 6 8 l System Parameters 6 9 l Paging Programming 6 10 l Change Password Password Programming 6 11 l Feature Renumbering 6 12 AtoZ K E L L A T R O N I C S INC System Features Programming 6 1 ...

Page 778: ...set of parameters that reflect a hybrid or PBX like system arrangement This means that multiline telephones have no direct line appearances in their button maps however they do have two unique group intercoms assigned to their button maps and to their hunt lists With master clear mode 3 option the system assumes a set of parameters that does not map any station buttons assigns no group intercom ac...

Page 779: ...ng returns one or all station COS sets to the default configured parameters Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From the system menu select defaults and press ENTER 4 From the defaults menu select station COS and press ENTER 5 Type l 32 to enter class of service to be defaulted Enter the numbers for the COS sets to be defaulted n n nn or...

Page 780: ...NTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select defaults and press ENTER 4 From defaults menu select lines and press ENTER 5 Type line port number l 240 or name 6 Enter the numbers for the lines to be defaulted n n nn or enter a range of numbers n nnn 6 1 7 Tables Default Description Various system wide operating features depend upon tables of informa...

Page 781: ... station Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select defaults and press ENTER 4 From defaults menu select clear system status log and press ENTER 5 Select system Tl El or both and press ENTER 6 Press ESCAPE to end 6 1 10 Voice Prompts Programming Default Description If your system includes a Digial Voice Announcer DVA you can...

Page 782: ...defaults and press ENTER 4 From defaults menu select software reset and press ENTER 5 Press ESCAPE to end 6 1 12 Onboard Software Upgrade Description Comdial engineers currently reserve this feature for their internal use 6 2 Terminal Setup Display Configurations Description You must match the system to the type of terminal setup that you use for programming Programming 1 1 Press CONTROL T for mai...

Page 783: ...e item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for feature setting 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end To program LCD Messages 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu type item number for feat...

Page 784: ... for feature and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end 6 3 3 Message Waiting Message Wait Originate Description When you enable this feature a station user can dial a feature code to control the message waiting light at another station Programming 1 Pre...

Page 785: ... installed in expansion cabinet 1 the interface board installed in expansion cabinet 2 the auxiliary board installed in the main cabinet The full compliment of 16 undedicated serial data ports requires four installed communications cards There are programming actions that you take to provide serial data port operation You must match the data port number with the installation location that you choo...

Page 786: ...ription You can change the baud rates data bits stop bits parity and flow control for each serial data port in the system to match the data device that you connect there Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select serial ports and press ENTER 4 From serial ports menu type item number for main port services port or for auxilia...

Page 787: ...SPACE BAR for feature setting and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end 6 5 2 SOHVA Tone Bursts SOHVA Beeps Description You can choose the number of tone bursts that each telephone user hears preceding a SOHVA message to be from one to six Programmi...

Page 788: ...Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER EXAMPLE As illustrated in the following menu programming action enables group 12 to transmit to groups 3 5 and 7 System default enables each group to transmit and receive with itself and enables group 16 to transmit and receive with all groups S O H V A R e c e i v e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 O s 2 0 3 ...

Page 789: ...5 Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER to accept setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 6 6 2 Speed Dial Groups Description The system provides 500 system speed dial numbers These numbers are divided into 50 groups with 10 numbers available in each group Assign none one or a range of groups n nn t...

Page 790: ... 6 6 2 and 12 6 Beginning with software release 8 B you can alternately choose the intercom to be automatically selected for speed dialing This enhancement allows you to store intercom selection along with feature codes as speed dial numbers for true one button access to features for example store INTERCOM l 1 and INTERCOM l at two locations for system wide availability to music on and music off T...

Page 791: ...ection 7 1 6 Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select timing and press ENTER 4 From system timing menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER to accept setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing an...

Page 792: ...til after the system sounds the extended dialing tone burst before they engage automatic dialing for example press speed dial buttons or saved number redial button at their stations Also if analog telephone users take their telephones off hook and then wait to begin manually dialing until after the system sounds the extended dialing tone burst the system will entend the length of the manually dial...

Page 793: ...ime before a held call recalls to a station Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select timing and press ENTER 4 From system timing menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER to accept setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject...

Page 794: ...r provides this delay This programming procedure determines the duration of the pause The person who stores the speed dial number must press the telephone s HOLD button at the point in the number digit sequence where he or she needs the pause for example g pause 1 8049782200 See Section 6 7 for speed dial programming Programming 1 s Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and ...

Page 795: ...s and press ENTER 3 From system menu select timing and press ENTER 4 From system timing menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER to accept setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 6 8 11 Internal lnterdigit Dialing Description A timer starts running wi...

Page 796: ...original station Programming 1 D Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 Form main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select timing and press ENTER 4 From the system timing menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for time and press ENTER to accept setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and...

Page 797: ...ts Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select timing and press ENTER 4 From system timing menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for time and press ENTER to accept setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 6 8 17 ...

Page 798: ...TER 5 Press SPACE bar for minimum time and press ENTER to accept setting 6 Press ENTER to select maximum flash time line item 7 Press SPACE bar for maximum time and press ENTER to accept setting 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 6 8 19 Voice Mail DTMF Tone Description The system provides a means by which you can set the length of the DTMF tones that...

Page 799: ... msec Refer to Section 8 1 8 to enable pulse dialing Programming 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Press CONTROL T for main menu From main menu select system and press ENTER From system menu select timing and press ENTER From system timing menu type item number for line pulse make and press ENTER Type desired time l 99 and press ENTER From timing menu type item number for line pulse break and press ENTER Type des...

Page 800: ... r to resume editing and press ENTER 8 Press ESCAPE to end 6 9 2 Automatic Attendant Immediate Transfer Description You should choose the automatic attendant immediate transfer mode for voice mail transfers It allows the system to release the voice mail port as soon as someone answers the transferred call However if you turn on the voice mail screen and confirm options see the voice mail programmi...

Page 801: ... resume editing and press ENTER to end 6 9 4 Automatic Route Selection Dial Tone Description You can select one of three ARS dial tones that you hear whenever you enter the ARS access code 0 0 0 Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select system parameters and press ENTER 4 Select ARS dial tone from the system parameters and ...

Page 802: ... changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 6 9 6 System Status Reporting Description Use this procedure to enable system status reporting If you enable status reporting the system will notify certain designated stations when system status conditions occur and turn on an status light at those stations Refer to the Section 7 3 procedure to map a status light at a telephone Prog...

Page 803: ...ice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 6 9 8 Major Alarm Alerting Description Use the following instructions to enable the Tl El alarm alerting feature Use the Section 6 13 3 procedure to program the status reporting and alarm alarting parameters Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system ...

Page 804: ...y IST station port you must change the IST ringing per phase feature to 8 A setting of 32 allows up to 48 industry standard telephones per cabinet main cabinet and expansion cabinet to ring simultaneously A setting of 16 reduces this simultaneous ringing total to 24 telephones per cabinet This programming selection is on a system wide basis See Section 7 2 35 for other industry standard telephone ...

Page 805: ...u select system and press ENTER 3 From the system menu select system parameters and press ENTER 4 From the system parameters menu select feature and press ENTER 5 Type personal intercom number for station and press ENTER 6 Press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end To change the operator dialing code use the following procedure 1 Pr...

Page 806: ...a station can not select a line until after the system has returned the line to idle Refer to Section 8 1 10 to set the time that the system waits before it makes a line idle after a station releases it from busy Programming 1 0Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select systems and press ENTER 3 From system menu select system parameters and press ENTER 4 From system parameters menu type...

Page 807: ...ginal location the console assignment follows the telephone to the new location even though the console is no longer located physically near the telephone If you relocate the console you must connect it to the desired staion port and use the Section 7 4 and Section 7 2 26 procedures to program it for use at the new port The relocation feature also applies to relocated digital telephone boards howe...

Page 808: ...ting and press ENTER to accept setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 6 9 17 Ring Back Tone Description By default when callers call an intercom party they receive an intercom ring back tone to tell them that the called intercom station is ringing Also when callers call over the CO line they receive a CO style r...

Page 809: ...t system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select system parameters and press ENTER 4 From the system parameters menu select day 1 day 2 or night ringing begin or end times and press ENTER 5 Type times in 24 hour format hhmrn and press ENTER 6 Press ENTER repeatedly if needed to place cursor at next time desired setting 7 Repeat step 5 and press ENTER 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all times are se...

Page 810: ...ystem parameters menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER to accept setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 6 9 20 Serial Ports II 18 Select Description The communications card provides serial data ports for interfacing such items as open architecture...

Page 811: ... ESCAPE 12 Repeat steps 8 l 1 for receive stations and press ENTER 13 When finished press ESCAPE twice 14 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 15 Repeat steps 4 15 for each zone or press ESCAPE to end Operation Press INTERCOM and dial 70 for zone 1 all call or dial 71 77 for zones 2 8 6 10 2 Paging Access Paging Access Time Description If you have assign...

Page 812: ...in menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service number l 32 and press ENTER 5 From COS programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for feature setting 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 ...

Page 813: ...s You can arrange for a relay to track the ringing of the direct delayed day 1 day 2 or night ringing modes Typically installers wire these relays to control loud bells or other external ringers Users upon hearing the external ringers can dial feature codes to answer the call that is ringing on the associated lines Programming 1 Press CONTROL T to return to main menu 2 From main menu select system...

Page 814: ... 240 n nnn or n nn nnn and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE once and repeat steps 5 7 for next ring type or press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER Operation Directed call pickup press INTERCOM 4 then dial extension of ringing telephone Group call pickup INTERCOM 4 Line pick up with relay assigned press INTERCOM and dial relay code 66 68 or ...

Page 815: ...ination that you pick The default system manager station entry code is as follows INTERCOM button 746 You can change the default password portion of this station entry code the 6 portion to a custom value of up to 15 digits Thus a new station entry could be as follows INTERCOM button K 74 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn SC You can also change the feature code portion of the system manager station entry the 74 seq...

Page 816: ...ollow this procedure Programing 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select feature renumbering and press ENTER 4 From the feature renumbering menu select station programming and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu select row number for system manager or attendant and press ENTER 6 Type new feature code up to four digits can incl...

Page 817: ...menu select system and press ENTER 3 From system menu select feature renumbering and press ENTER 4 From feature renumbering menu select feature catagory and press ENTER 5 From feature catagory menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Type new code and press ENTER NOTE The number block of 504 5999 is unassigned at default Use it for code renumbering 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 T...

Page 818: ...ct enabled select major alarm alerting and press space bar to select enabled 5 When finished press ESCAPE twice 6 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 7 Press ESCAPE to end Relays External Tl El Alamo Reporting Description Assign one of the four relays located on the central processor board to alert system users if a Tl El alarm occurs Typically installe...

Page 819: ...shed press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE to end 6 13 3 Programming The Major Alarm Alerfing Parameters Description Use the following instructions to program the audible alarms for the various Tl El system errors Programming 1 Press CONTROL T to return to main menu 2 From main menu select system and press ENTER 3 From ...

Page 820: ... printouts and press ENTER 3 From printouts menu select status log printout and press ENTER 4 Type s for screen printout or p for hard copy printout through the SMDA SMDR data printer and press ENTER NOTE Press CONTROL C to stop a printout to the VDT screen when necessary This action will not stop printout to a data printer 5 When printout is finished press ESCAPE to return to printouts menu 6 Rep...

Page 821: ...hen using the Tl El option Therefore you may need to select a low setting such as Loss 2 for the voice level receive parameter when programming this feature for Tl El lines that are being used exclusively for voice transmission Further if you choose a setting to increase the receive gain you should carefully examine speakerphone operation It is possible to select a receive gain that will under cer...

Page 822: ...apping by Station Square Non Square System 7 3 l Phone Types Telephone Types 7 4 l Copy Model COS Station Button Map Block Programming 7 5 NOTE When you program the station features always per orm the Telephone Types procedure Section 7 4 before you perform the Button Mapping procedure Section 7 3 d AtoZ K E L L A T R O N I C S INC Station Features Programming 7 l ...

Page 823: ...the system will allow him or her to make any future outgoing calls See Section 10 8 for an exception to forced account code entry Programming 1 D 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press CONTROL T for main menu From main menu select stations and press ENTER From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER Type class of service number l 32 and press ENTER From the COS programming menu type item number for acco...

Page 824: ... changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Automatic Hold On Lines Description The system automatically places a current outside call on hold when a station user presses another line or intercom button Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the stations menu...

Page 825: ...When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Operation Music source one on INTERCOM 11 off INTERCOM 1 Music source two on INTERCOM X 12 off INTERCOM 1 7 1 4 Call Cost Display Display Of Costed Calls Description If you have arranged for the system to employ call costing Sect...

Page 826: ...re in this section titled Cull Forward RNA Ring On Busy Enhanced Call Forwarding Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 From the COS programming menu select the class of service to be programmed and press ENTER 5 From the COS programming menu type the item number for the styl...

Page 827: ...ing the Section 9 3 2 procedure to ensure that this call forward feature will function properly Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From the station programming menu type item number for featur...

Page 828: ...tem number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE BAR to enable feature choose yes and press ENTER for ITCM FWD To menu 7 From the ITCM FWD To menu type intercom number to receive forwarded calls and press ENTER for FWD Type 8 Press SPACE BAR to enable either personal calls or all calls and press ENTER 9 When finished press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resum...

Page 829: ... to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Operation Park call INTERCOM ic 91 through 99 for orbits 91 99 Pick up parked call INTERCOM 9 1 through 99 Call Park Recall Description A call that is left in a park orbit longer than the length of time that you program with this feature will automatically return to a hold recall condition at the parking stat...

Page 830: ...t changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Operation INTERCOM K 4 then dial intercom number of ringing or on hold station Call Pick Up Group Description Use this procedure to place a number of stations in a call pick up group so that one station can answer a call ringing at any other station in the group Programming 1 Pr...

Page 831: ...s n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end 7 1 9 Tracker Access Description Assign tracker access to a particular station intercom or group of intercoms using the following class of service COS programming The default is yes for COS 1 and COS32 Refer to Section 14 2 for further Tracker programming Programming 1 s Press CONTROL T...

Page 832: ...E twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Camp On Automatic Call Back Ring Description After you use Section 7 1 8 to enable a call waiting tone use this procedure to set the duration of the camp on automatic ringback ring that the system sounds when it returns a camp on call to the original sta...

Page 833: ...or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Do Not Disturb Override Description This feature allows a station to override a do not disturb condition at another station Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service numbe...

Page 834: ...nu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service number l 32 and press ENTER 5 From the COS programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for feature setting 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4...

Page 835: ...ty Description If you use idle line preference programming to give a station the ability to automatically connect to an idle assigned line when the user takes the handset off hook take this programming action to set the priority in which the system chooses the idle lines for use You can place up to eight lines in this priority list Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu selec...

Page 836: ...ion users to set a message at their stations that will be displayed on calling LCD speakerphones You can use the second part of this procedure to program the actual LCD messages Alternately The attendant can program the LCD messages using procedures found in the attendant guide Also refer to Section 6 3 2 Programming To enable feature for class of service 1 D Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From m...

Page 837: ...ssign a Response Message button to the telephone however users can do this for themselves if they need the button Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service number l 32 and press ENTER 5 From COS programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 7 When f...

Page 838: ...CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service number l 32 and press ENTER 5 From COS programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for feature setting 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing an...

Page 839: ...ting and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end 7 1 22 Paging Transmit Description Use this procedure to give a class of service of stations the ability to transmit voice announcements to one or all other station handsets and monitor speakers For other paging requirements refer to Section 6 ZO Also refer to paging access Section 6 8 6 Programming I Press CONTROL T for m...

Page 840: ...er than or equal to the route access level that you assign to the route the system allows the station to access the route Otherwise the system will not accept the dialed number and sounds an error at the station s speaker or handset The route access level allows some stations to gain access to the more costly routes in a route table while denying it to others Just as you program each route from le...

Page 841: ... the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service number l 32 and press ENTER 5 From the COS programming menu type item number for day restriction level and press ENTER 6 Type l 8 for restriction level 7 Press ENTER for night restriction level and type l 8 for restriction level 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8...

Page 842: ...ation This feature does not allow users to pick up exclusive hold calls or calls that are in the process of being transferred Also the feature does not allow users to send a directed call hold to a station where its user is scanning the currently held calls In addition this feature allows users to place a call on hold at another station and have this call appear to be the one that has been on hold...

Page 843: ...where the toll restriction is based on the DISA authorization code that is associated with a particular class of service Remote day and night exception numbers allow DISA callers to dial numbers that their toll restriction normally prevents them from dialing If a toll restriction table exception number matches one of the exception numbers that you assign using this procedure the DISA caller is all...

Page 844: ...sume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 10 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end 7 1 32 Line Originafe Description This feature provides station access to a line for call originating purposes for an entire class of service of stations Also refer to Section 7 1 31 Both that feature and this one must be turned on for a line to be fully usable Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From m...

Page 845: ...m number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press CONTROL E 7 Type a for add r for remove and press ENTER 8 Type line port l 240 n nn nnn or n nnn to be removed or added and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE three times 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Periodic Line Tone Time Description After you enable...

Page 846: ...u type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press CONTROL E 7 Type a for add r for remove and press ENTER 8 Type line port l 240 n nn nnn or n nnn to be removed or added and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE three times 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Maximum Call Duration Time Description Aft...

Page 847: ...ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end 7 1 36 Line Group Queue Description Use this procedure to give a station the ability to queue for an idle line in a line group Refer to Section 8 2 for other line group considerations Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu sele...

Page 848: ...ps 4 8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end Line To Line Connect Duration Description After you have given a station the ability to set up an unsupervised conference between two lines use this procedure to set the maximum amount of time that an unsupervised conference can continue between two lines When the time out occurs the system recalls the station from where the user enabled the unsupervised ...

Page 849: ...iderations q With this feature disabled IST users can flash the hookswitch while on an outside line and generate a hookflash signal on the outside line however they cannot flash the hookswitch to obtain an intercom dial tone The Section 7 2 35 procedure sets the hookflash signal time This time determines whether the IST hookflash signal is long enough to recall the outside line dial tone or short ...

Page 850: ... 7 When finished press ESCAPE 8 Press CONTROL N as necessary to display line number for forced account code and press ENTER 9 Type item number for forced account code and press ENTER 10 Press SPACE BAR for feature setting 11 When finished press ESCAPE twice 12 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end 7 1 41 Allow Busy Display Display Of Busy Status De...

Page 851: ...lume On impacf Telephones Description You can program the handset volume feature on Impact telephones to offer the station user more choices in selecting the handset volume level locally from his or her telephone Normally users have up to 8 volume levels that they can select However when you program the high level the user s handset volume choices increase to 13 Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for m...

Page 852: ... to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE to end 7 1 45 Quick Transfer Description The quick transfer feature allows users to perform an automatic screened or unscreened transfer of an incoming line call without pressing their telephone s TRANSKNF button The transfer occurs automatically as soon as the user who answers the call dials the intercom number or access code f...

Page 853: ...m main menu select stations and press ENTER From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER Type class of service number l 32 that corresponds with class of service that you wish to modify and press ENTER From COS programming menu type row number that corresponds with Enhanced LCD Display and press ENTER Press SPACE bar for feature setting When finished press ESCAPE twice Type y to accep...

Page 854: ...n the display of an LCD speakerphone as a identification aid A full name is composed of a maximum of 20 characters and shows in some voice mail and open architecture interface applications You can compose a valid name from any alpha numeric character however the first character of a display name must be an alphabetic character You can also add station names by following the procedure described in ...

Page 855: ... A speed dial set is a group of 10 speed dial locations The system allocates three speed dial sets to each telephone as a default but you can allocate up to 10 sets to a telephone if you wish When a DSS5LF console is operated as a companion to a telephone you can allocate speed dial sets at the companion telephone that the system will then share with the console The system reserves one speed dial ...

Page 856: ...unt List Description Place personal intercom and group intercom numbers in a list with this programming procedure Calls to a busy hunt list number will search the list for an idle number at which to ring Up to eight intercom numbers are allowed in a hunt list These can be all group intercom numbers or one personal intercom number and seven group intercom numbers See Section 9 for other intercom nu...

Page 857: ...station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name of station being programmed and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Type a for add or r for remove and press ENTER 7 Type group intercom numbers type nnnn nnnn nnnn or type nnnn nnnn and press ENTER 8 When finished press ESCAPE three times 9 Type y ...

Page 858: ...umber or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE BAR for desired value and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Prime Line Description Use this procedure to...

Page 859: ...u can create an intercom hot line telephone by assigning one telephone s personal intercom number as the prime intercom of another telephone When the user takes this programmed telephone ojf hook it automatically calls the other telephone Programming 1 D Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 ...

Page 860: ...e y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end 7 2 IO Call Announce Beeps Call Announce Tone Bursts Description You can set the number of call announce tone bursts to be a value of from one to five and you can do this for each station in the system Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu ...

Page 861: ...ded To Description Use this procedure to assign the intercom number of a station to receive another station s forwarded calls Programming 1 D Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select station and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for station you wish to program and press ENTER 5 From s...

Page 862: ...e that this call forward feature will function properly at station Refer to Section 7 1 5 for other call forwarding considerations Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From the station programmi...

Page 863: ... ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type the item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press CONTROL E for edit 7 Type a for add or r for remove and press ENTER 8 Type line port number l 240 type as n nn nnn or n nnn and press ENTER 9 When finished press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to ...

Page 864: ...m or r to resume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 10 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Day 2 Ring Description Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at stations during the day 2 ringing mode time period Refer to the paragraph below titled Day I Day 2 and Night Ringing Begin and End Times to set the beginning and ending times of this ringing Programming 1 P...

Page 865: ...peration The ringing arrangement that you configure here is the arrangement that is active both during the automatic night ringing time period and whenever the attendant manually activates the night transfer of ringing operation Do note that the attendant commanded night ringing period supercedes the automatic night ringing period Refer to the above paragraph titled Day I Day 2 and Night Ringing B...

Page 866: ...nn to serve feature at this station and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE three times 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 9 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Ring No Answer Rings Description This procedure sets the amount of rings that sound at one station port before the call rolls over to ring at another station port Any system fea...

Page 867: ... resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Operation INTERCOM k k 4 then dial ring code l 8 7 2 14 LCD Contrast Digital Telephones Only Description Adjust the intensity of the display on digital LCD speakerphones with this procedure The user can also change the display contrast at his or her telephone using instructions provided in the system user s ...

Page 868: ...ture value and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Operation INTERCOM 03 then dial the extension Making A Station Service Observable Description Allow a station to be service observed Programming 1 0Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu s...

Page 869: ...From station programming menu type item number for Day or Night exception number 6 Type exception numbers O 32 n nn or n nn or type 0 for none 7 Press ENTER for Night or Day exception number and repeat step 6 8 When finished press ESCAPE twice 9 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 10 Press ESCAPE to end 7 2 17 SOHVA Beeps SOHVA Tone Bursts Description Y...

Page 870: ...s 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end 7 2 19 Busy On SOHVA Description At default the system returns a ring back tone to users who make SOWA calls to busy stations however this procedure allows you to arrange for telephone users to receive a busy signal instead of the ring back tone This feature lets non LCD telephone users know that a called station is busy Programming 1 Press CONTROL T f...

Page 871: ...ess ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Operation INTERCOM 4 7 2 21 Thru Dialing Through Dialing Description This procedure allows DTMF tones that are generated by an external device connected to the system through necessary interface equipment to pass through the system and out to any line connection Programming 1e Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select...

Page 872: ...abandons it The system shortens the ringing of another call to model 8024S 8124S 8012S and 8112s speakerphones that are busy in the speakerphone mode to one quick tone burst however if these telephones are busy in an off hook manner non speakerphone mode the system still subdues the ringing of the second call to a lower volume and allows the call to continue to ring at this subdued volume until th...

Page 873: ...ure and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE BAR to turn ringer off set option to yes and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end 7 2 25 Disabled Station Disable Description Disable a station port with this feature Refer to Section 7 4 for the procedure for marking the station port as undefined after you disable ...

Page 874: ...r none up to four allowed and press ENTER 9 When finished press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 11 Repeat steps 4 10 for each station or press ESCAPE to end 7 2 27 Programming Port Database Programming Station Description This procedure assigns limited database programming ability to a station NOTE You must ensure that there is an LC...

Page 875: ...igned name of station being programmed and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for desired setting and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end 7 2 29 Headset Description This proce...

Page 876: ...rom main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for setting and press ENTER 7 Type personal intercom number for alternate attendant if needed and press ENTER 8 Type pe...

Page 877: ...ng and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 10 for each station or press ESCAPE to end DTMF Extended Dialing Tone Length Description Use this programming feature to set the length of the DTMF tones The system generates DTMF tones of extended length when users take their telephones off hook...

Page 878: ...teractive button support If you replace any of these LCD speakerphon lay telephone the system recognizes it as such and does not assign interacti ce the system allows you to enable interactive buttons with station programrr not provide a means for assigning interactive buttons with the button maPr you have enabled the interactive buttons you can look at the button assig utton mapping procedure and...

Page 879: ... Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 8 Repeat steps 3 7 for each station or press ESCAPE to end 7 2 34 Transfer Ring Cadence Description A telephone user can select the ringing cadence that announces a transferred line call They have two choices as follows Ring cadence one provides a 2 sec on 4 sec off tone Ring cadence two provides a 0 5 sec 5Ssec off ...

Page 880: ... tone bursts repeated at 800 ms intervals Programming 1 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 2 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 3 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for IST and press ENTER 4 From the station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar to enable or disable feature yes enable no disable...

Page 881: ...sume editing and press ENTER IST Distinctive Ringing Description An industry standard telephone can sound one ring cadence for intercom calls and a different ring cadence for outside calls or it can sound the same ring cadence for both types of calls You must select one of these ringing styles on a station class of service basis All industry standard telephones with the same class of service have ...

Page 882: ...ss SPACE bar for maximum time and press ENTER to accept setting 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER IST Ringing Per Phase Description Programming While the installer typically connects one industry standard telephone per IST station port he or she can connect two industry standard telephones per IST station port however the telephones will share the s...

Page 883: ...e of two different ways depending upon how you program this feature q With this feature disabled IST users can flash the hookswitch while on an outside line and generate a hookflash signal on the outside line however they cannot flash the hookswitch to obtain an intercom dial tone The previous Section 7 2 35 procedure titled IST Flash Time sets the hookflash signal time This time determines whethe...

Page 884: ...s and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar to toggle between choices of 21 Hz and 25 Hz 6 When finished press ENTER 7 Press ESCAPE twice to end 7 2 36 Ring Back On Busy Description With this feature enabled when someone calls another telephone and the calling party is busy on an outside line the caller hears a ring back tone not a busy tone When the caller is using a non display telephone he or she has n...

Page 885: ...assigned name and press ENTER Screen presents current button map for review 5 Type first level button code Ll L25 0 9 and press ENTER 6 Type mnemonic of feature from list below and press ENTER Press and hold SHIFT and type 7 for mnemonic definitions press any key to return to button map NOTE If you press ENTER withoutfirst typing a mnemonic the system blanks that button Users can program blanked b...

Page 886: ...tercom button accesses personal intercom number intercom number button group intercom number or station DSS LCD messaging button enables disables LCD message feature line group button 1 16 accesses one of 16 line groups line button l 240 accesses one of 240 lines lock button prevents allows station use prevents station use until someone dials an authorization code meet me page button answers a pag...

Page 887: ...tion 6 Type the station port number f 480 and press ENTER 7 Press ESCAPE to end ExecuTech Telephone Types Comdial Express Telephone Types l2xlm4s 23Line 6620 6620E 66208 6620T 19 Line 6116X 6116s 6016s 22Line 6614 6614E 66148 6614T 10 Line 6110X 61 lOS 6010s 17 Line 66OOE 6600s 2Line 6102X ProprietarySingleLine 6701X Proprietary Single Line 6701X 3ZButton Console DB32S 3ZButton Console XB32X 70 Bu...

Page 888: ...endant interactive button support Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the station menu select model station and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name of source station and press ENTER 5 Type personal intercom numbers or previously assigned names of destination stations nnn nnn or nnn nnn and press...

Page 889: ...ilot number for hunt group 6 Type item number for options member list or delete hunt group and press ENTER 7 6 1 Options Stat on Hunting Pilot Extension Description This is the extension number that callers use to call or route calls to this hunt group This number is analogous to a station s personal intercom or extension number and follows the same numbering plan restrictions Programming 1 Press ...

Page 890: ...d press ESCAPE twice 10 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER Full Name Description The hunt group s full name is the 20 character alpha numeric name of the group that is used by OAI applications Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu type item number for hunt groups and press ENTE...

Page 891: ...d of time since completing the last call that was routed to it by the station hunting feature In the case of stations with equal idle times such as at system startup the system picks the first of the grouped stations with equal idle times If that station does not answer within the call advance time the system delivers the call to the station with the next longest idle period Ring AR Station Huntin...

Page 892: ...ESCAPE three times 12 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER Delayed Ring Description Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at a station hunt group after waiting a short time period from when a call appears Delayed ringing sounds during day 1 day 2 time periods during the night ringing mode and during the manual night transfer o...

Page 893: ... to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 13 Repeat steps 4 12 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Day 2 Ring Description Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at stations during the day 2 ringing mode time period Refer to the paragraph titled Day I Day 2 and Night Ringing Begin and End Times to set the beginning and ending times of ...

Page 894: ...ER 7 Type item number for night ring and press ENTER 8 Press CONTROL E for edit 9 Type a for add or r for remove and press ENTER 10 Type line port number l 240 type as n nn nnn or n nnn and press ENTER 11 When finished press ESCAPE three times 12 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER Day 1 Day 2 And Night Ringing Begin And End Times Description With this ...

Page 895: ... for options and press ENTER 7 Press SPACE BAR to enable or disable the feature y enable and press ENTER 8 When finished press ESCAPE twice 9 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER OverFlow Vestination Description In the case of no answer or if all stations in the hunt group are busy the system routes hunt group calls to a designated overflow destination T...

Page 896: ...ions depending upon whether you have enabled the queue ringing calls feature With the queue ringing calls feature enabled the overflow time determines how long an unanswered hunt group call remains in queue before the system routes the call to an overflow destination With the queue ringing calls feature disabled the overflow time determines how long a call will ring at hunt group stations before t...

Page 897: ... main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu type item number for hunt groups and press ENTER 4 Type number for hunt group l 64 and press ENTER 5 For new hunt groups type pilot number for hunt group 6 Type item number for options and press ENTER 7 Type item number for recall time and press ENTER 8 Press SPACE BAR to choose time and press ENTER 9 When finished pr...

Page 898: ...s ENTER 5 For new hunt groups type pilot number for hunt group 6 Type item number for member list and press ENTER 7 Type the letter code to choose the action you wish to take a add r remove i insert and press ENTER NOTE To add a station at the beginning of the group press ENTER 8 At the prompt type the intercom number or station name and press ENTER Use CONTROL N and CONTROL P to display the next ...

Page 899: ...rogramming 8 2 l Copy Model Line Block Programming Line 8 3 l Direct Inward Dialing DID Support 8 4 l GroundStartLineSupport 8 5 l Loop Start Line Support 8 6 l TieLineSupport 8 7 l Direct Inward System Access Programming O s e 8 8 Line Features Programming 8 l ...

Page 900: ...escription Condition the line port as to the type of line or function that the port serves Programming 1 ePress CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From lines menu select line programming and press ENTER 4 Type line port number l 240 or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From the line programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press ...

Page 901: ...tercom number The system also sends the called number information to the SMDR SMDA line report and makes the information available to devices that are connected to the DXP Plus s Open Architecture Interface OAI As a single service if the call routes to an LCD speakerphone the speakerphone s display shows the name that you programmed in the DID DNIS translation table If you have programmed no name ...

Page 902: ...f silence It repeats this tone burst sequence every 5 seconds Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From the lines menu select line programming and press ENTER 4 From line programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for feature setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject ...

Page 903: ... the costing to begin as soon as the call arrives in the system begin after the user answers the call or begin after a programmed delay Plus you can pick the call rate table that you want the system use when it costs the call Refer to Section I2 for other automatic route selection programming considerations Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select lines and press ENT...

Page 904: ... be noticeably higher when using the Tl option Therefore you may need to select a low setting such as Loss 2 for the voice level receive parameter when programming this feature for Tl lines that are being used exclusively for voice transmission Further if you choose a setting to increase the receive gain you should carefully examine speakerphone operation It is possible to select a receive gain th...

Page 905: ...time independently in one msec increments to any time from one to 99 msec Programming 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Press CONTROL T for main menu From main menu select system and press ENTER From system menu select timing and press ENTER From timing menu type item number for line pulse make and press ENTER Type desired time l 99 and press ENTER From timing menu type item number for line pulse break and press ...

Page 906: ... and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each line port or press ESCAPE to end 8 1 11 Positive Disconnect Time Description When a station drops a line after its user has finished using it the system waits a programmable length of time before it allows another station to access that line This time delay helps prevent such conditions as call collision The system holds the line status light on during ...

Page 907: ...he central office Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select line and press ENTER 3 From line menu select line programming and press ENTER 4 From line programming menu type item number to select feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for desired setting and press ENTER 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing ...

Page 908: ...g action to match the line port to the feature You must also assign the caller ID lines to the stations and assign special purpose station buttons to control the feature Refer to Section 14 I for complete caller ID programming details Programming 1 0 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From the lines menu select line programming and press ENTER 4 Type ...

Page 909: ...ess ENTER 5 Type the identification ID number and press ENTER 6 Press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 8 Repeat steps 3 7 for each line or press ESCAPE to end Description Programming Use the following programming instructions to enable or disable DISA capability on lines 1 through 240 Also use the DISA Voice Options 1 through 4 to sele...

Page 910: ...to give a station access to line groups Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select COS programming and press ENTER 4 Type class of service number l 32 and press ENTER 5 From COS programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Type line groups l 16 0 none type as n n nn or n nn and press ENTER 7 When finis...

Page 911: ...L T for main menu 2 From the main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From the lines menu select model line and press ENTER 4 Type line port number l 240 or name of model line to be copied and press ENTER 5 Type line port numbers of lines to match model and press ENTER Type line port numbers as n n nn or n nn 6 Press ESCAPE to end Line Features Programming 8 13 ...

Page 912: ...connection and prepares for the incoming call The CO does not send ringin since the DXP Plus generates it internally and sends it to the stations After the DXP Plus receives all of the address digits it translates them based on the appropriate DID block translation table and attempts to place the call to the desired station To assure that the caller will always hear ringback prior to the call bein...

Page 913: ...ssume DID block two is configured as delay start tone dial has a 3 digit string and is named SERVICE Example 2 Ed s Telephone Mart starts with 20 CO numbers 555 2320 to 555 2339 Only one DID block is used and is configured as wink start pulse dial with a 2 digit string As the company grows they add another 20 CO numbers 555 3420 to 555 3439 You cannot simply add these numbers to the existing DID b...

Page 914: ...fter the wink occurs and the line polarity returns to normal the CO will begin sending the dialing digits If the CO does not see the wink within 4 to 8 seconds heavy traffic timings it may route the call to network reorder or retry the call on another line Typically a CO will try to dial two times A second failure will result in network reorder Wink start protocol is the best choice for its combin...

Page 915: ...ecommendations and requirements of the CO determine whether the CO will send address digits by DTMF tones or by loop pulse rotary dialing Always choose DTMF tones if possible Programming Refer to Section 8 4 3 ANI Delivery Description Enable or disable the DXP Plus to process ANI information that is delivered by the long distance common carrier as a Tl feature on dial 800 and dial 900 lines Refer ...

Page 916: ...lay Also the number of CO digits that will show in the display is dependent on the length of the DID DNIS block name Control Signalling Press SPACE bar for protocol choice and press ENTER Expected Digits Type quantity O 7 of digits and press ENTER Dialing Mode Press SPACE bar for choice and press ENTER AN1 Delivery Press SPACE bar for Yes or No and press ENTER DISA Voice Options Type DVA message i...

Page 917: ... an assigned extension number you can assign the same extension number to several CO digit sequences if you wish Name As an option you can enter a seven character name for each CO digit sequence in the string If you assign a name the system will use it for LCD display during signalling Dav Number This personal or group intercom number is the one that the system will ring when a DID DNIS call arriv...

Page 918: ...e numbers in the DID DNLS block than the screen can show9 the system places them on underlying pages Press and hold CONTROL and type N or P to display each next or previous page The tab e will form the screen so the CO digits are displayed in sequential order You can add additional entries to the end of the table that will appear in sorted order the next time you access the table 8 When finished p...

Page 919: ...lephone This is very important in applications where the system costs the calls Also since the signalling protocol indicates which end requests the line it helps prevent call collisions and glare and thus is useful in applications where there is a high volume of incoming and outgoing calls occurring on the same lines Ground start lines are standard protocol for remote networking and are useful for...

Page 920: ...ature setting and press ENTER to accept setting Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all required parameters 10 Press CONTROL and type N and the system will display the menu page 2 of line programming menu NOTE The programming items shown on menu page 2 are for the line port type that you selected in step 7 These items will be different for each line type 11 12 13 From menu page 2 of line programming menu typ...

Page 921: ...ng Mode Abandon Hold Release Positive Disconnect Time Toll Groups DTMF Level Busy Lead Disconnect Supervision Caller ID Active Voice Mail ID Line Group Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From the lines menu select line programming and press ENTER 4 Type line port number l 240 or previously assigned name and press ENTER The system display...

Page 922: ...tocols of E and M signalling They are known as immediate signalling wink signalling and delayed signalling You must program the desired protocol type to match that provided by the CO or the remote equipment Immediate Signalling With this signalling method the called DXP Plus answers as soon as the calling DXP Plus initiates the call This signalling method is usually used if the line is programmed ...

Page 923: ...e extension that will automatically ring when the tie line is seized by the calling DXP Plus If you do not enter an extension the system will ring the dial 0 station and if it is unavailable the system will return dial tone to the caller Intercom Dialing Alternately you can program the system for intercom dialing mode so that as soon as users access the tie line they will hear dial tone Upon heari...

Page 924: ... SMDR SMDA line report and makes the information available to devices that are connected to the DXP Plus s Bpen Architecture Interface AI When you assign ANI to lines that callers reach by diahng access codes the DXP P us processes all incoming digits as AN1 digits until it encounters the delimiter The DXP Plus then processes the remainder of the incoming digits as DNIS call routing digits When yo...

Page 925: ...ll lines to any desired toll group or combination of toll groups as needed See Section II for complete toll restriction programming details Programming Refer to Section 8 7 5 DTMF Level Description Adjust the audio level of the tie line s DTMF signals to a low 5 db medium 0 db or high 3 db setting Certain sites may require a higher db level to over come line conditions that could interfere with re...

Page 926: ...n for feature setting and press ENTER to accept setting 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all required parameter choices 10 Press CONTROL and type N and the system will display the menu page 2 of line programming menu NOTE The programming items shown on menu page 2 are for the line port type that you selected in step 7 These items will be different for each line type 11 0 From menu page 2 of line program...

Page 927: ...mount of time that the line remains locked out from use after invalid conditions occur such as when a caller repeatedly dials an invalid authorization code Select the timeout period for DISA extensions that ring without answer RNA Select the maximum timeout period for the reminder tone that sounds during an in process call when the DISA caller is using an outside line and the system has no disconn...

Page 928: ...with either personal or group intercom numbers therefore when a DISA caller enters his or her authorization code the code alerts the system as to what features to make available to the caller Once callers access features with authorization codes the access remains in effect until any idle time exceeds the authorization code time out period Use this programming procedure to assign or modify authori...

Page 929: ...y have access to an outside line where the toll restriction is based on the DISA authorization code that is associated with a particular class of service Remote day and night exception numbers allow DISA callers to dial numbers that their toll restriction normally prevents them from dialing If a toll restriction table exception number matches one of the exception numbers that you assign using this...

Page 930: ...ng Intercom Numbers o Understanding Station Numbering 9 1 l Modifying Intercom Numbers 9 2 l Adding Intercom Numbers 9 3 l Removing Intercom Numbers 9 4 l Renumbering Intercom Numbers 9 5 3 AtoZ K E L L A T R O N I C S INC Intercom Number Programming 9 1 ...

Page 931: ...t contains slots another 21 30 Therefore even if the first encountered station board is located in slot five of the main cabinet the system still assigns logical number one to the first station provided by that board During installation you can skip slots For example you can install 16 station digital station boards in only slots one and 30 if you wish In this case slot one yields logical station ...

Page 932: ... s intercom numbers are at default however you can select any four digit intercom number if you remove dialing conflicts that the system prompts you about 6 Type display name a z A Z O 9 punctuation special characters and so forth and press ENTER A display name can be up to seven characters long 7 Type full name a z A Z O 9 punctuation special characters and so forth and press ENTER A full name ca...

Page 933: ...intercom and group intercom numbers in a list with this programming procedure Calls to a busy hunt list number will search the list for an idle number at which to ring Up to eight intercom numbers are allowed in a hunt list These can be all group intercom numbers or one personal intercom number and seven group intercom numbers Do not place the same group intercom number in more than one hunt list ...

Page 934: ...ss ENTER 5 Press ESCAPE to end 9 5 Renumbering intercom Numbers Description Use this procedure to renumber one intercom number or a block of intercom numbers NOTE Ifyou remove or renumber an intercom number be sure that you do not use the old intercom number in button mapping hunt lists call forwarding and similar applications Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for the main menu 2 From main menu select...

Page 935: ...etail Accounting and Reports fSMDA SMDR Proaramminal l SMDABMDRParameters 10 1 l SMDAReports 10 2 l Account Codes Forced with Positive Verification 10 3 l Emergency Numbers 10 4 l Authorization Code 10 5 Call Costing and SMDAASMDR Programming 10 1 ...

Page 936: ... 7 Press CONTROL T for main menu From main menu select SMDA SMDR and press ENTER From SMDA SMDR programming menu select SMDAISMDR parameters and press ENTER From SMDA SMDR parameters menu type item number for feature and press ENTER Press SPACE BAR for feature value When finished press ESCAPE twice Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end IO 1 3 SMDR ...

Page 937: ...n n left nnn nn right Value month day SMDA Records time call was initiated 24 hour station number account code two lines if greater that 8 digits call duration minutes and tenths or NOANS call cost call type I incoming 0 outgoing not currently used ring time incoming call line number caller ID line Format Justification nn nn left nn nn left nnnn right nnnnnnnn right nnn n right nnn nn left n left ...

Page 938: ...23 12 32 09 23 X2 34 163 175 117 194 154 139 188 154 143 188 203 144 154 154 154 154 184 140 161 205 2 9 0 0 0 4 2 4 0 2 14 2 2 0 0 3 0 9 0 3 1 1 6 1 0 5 1 1 5 7 0 1 1 0 14 2 2 6 0 5 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 4 1 0 1 0 5 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 9 0 0 0 0 I I 0 0 I 0 I I 0 I I I I I I I I I 0 I 0 3 18 0 1 88 82 110 0 1 102 74 o o 5 0 2 17 75 0 0 5 0 0 16 0 0 8 0 2 18 0 0 17 0 1 21 0 1 16 0 ...

Page 939: ...to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end 10 1 6 Account Code Display And Account Code Display Time Description As a feature to LCD speakerphone users a message appears in the telephone s display to prompt the user to enter an account code during incoming and outgoing calls If the system does not require such a prompt for example because the account code feat...

Page 940: ...te SMDA records from the system memory Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select SMDAKMDR and press ENTER 3 From SMDhVSMDR programming menu select SMDA SMDR parameters and press ENTER 4 From SMDA SMDR parameters menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE BAR for feature value 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject th...

Page 941: ...e y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end IO 1 II SMDR Record Description When you enable this feature the system stores SMDR records for the specified line Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From lines menu select line programming and press ENTER 4 Type line port number l 240 or name and press ENTE...

Page 942: ...rds to the serial data port This report is not in groups as is the station line or account code reports but rather is in a chronological order You can view the number of free records or you can delete all stored SMDA records to insure that only the latest SMDA reports are being stored or to provide a known starting port for record storage You can do this from your programming terminal or make this...

Page 943: ...hoose the day and time that the printout is desired Choose the type and detail of each report Dictate whether the call records are to be erased from the system memory after they are printed Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select SMDAISMDR and press ENTER 3 From the SMDAKMDR menu select automatic reports and press ENTER 4 Type row number to select desired report and...

Page 944: ...NE GROUP SUMMARY __D ___ _D_ _o___o________ LINE GROUP ACCESSES FAILURES m m o 3 p w 1 731 12 4 8 0 5 0 0 9 0 8 10 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 __D D_ ___D _o _DDDD Do poD 10 IQ Call Costing and SMDABMDR Programming ...

Page 945: ...e y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end 10 3 2 Account Code Display And Account Code Display Time Description As a feature to LCD speakerphone users a message appears in the telephone s display to prompt the user to enter an account code during incoming and outgoing calls If the system does not require such a prompt for example because the account code ...

Page 946: ...edure to assign up to 1000 account codes each up to 16 digits in length see Section 103 3 Alternately use this procedure to remove previously assigned account codes from the system Add or remove one account code at a time or an entire block of account codes all at once To assign numbers that user s can dial without entering an account code refer to Section 10 4 Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for ma...

Page 947: ...ssary to display line number for forced account code and press ENTER 9 Type item number for forced account code and press ENTER 10 Press SPACE BAR for feature setting 11 When finished press ESCAPE twice 12 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end 10 4 Emergency Numbers Description When the system requires an account code a telephone user must enter it...

Page 948: ... e Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select SMDAISMDR and press ENTER 3 From SMDABMDR menu type item number for authorization codes and press ENTER 4 From authorization code menu type line number to add remove or modify authorization codes and press ENTER 5 Type authorization code up to 6 digits and press ENTER NOTE You can include a two second pause as part of the authorization code ...

Page 949: ...restricted from dialing a certain telephone number on a certain line can if programming permits dial that number on another line that is not restricted As a user dials a number from a station that has toll restriction assigned the toll restriction feature first makes a comparison between the dialed number and the telephone number entries on the toll restriction table It compares the dialed number ...

Page 950: ...5 7 out of state numbers over lines assigned to toll groups 16 and 17 8 international numbers over lines assigned to toll group 1 and those numbers with a restriction level of always deny All toll restricted stations can dial 1800 numbers on all lines No toll restricted station can dial 1900 numbers on any line Note that the feature allows dialing on lines that are not in the toll group As illustr...

Page 951: ...tion Level Exceotion Number 1212 7 5 1213 6 6 978 2 NONE 911 ALWAYS ALLOW NONE A toll restriction arrangement such as this example permits the following dialing conditions the president and the executivecan dial all numbers the executive can dial any 1 212 prefixed number any 1 213 prefixed number remember match any digit 978 numbers and 911 any numbers with restriction level equal to or less than...

Page 952: ...Allowed Compare Restriction Level of Matched Number with Restriction Levels of Station Class of Service Eight 8 levels plus always allow and always deny m One level assigned for each C O S type or assign allow all or deny all Compare Exception Number of Matched Number with Exception Number of Station Thirty two 32 exception numbers m One per Toll Table entry m Up to 32 per station YES I l 4 Toll R...

Page 953: ...hose with the least and then note the station ports that you plan to each category Arrange the toll restriction numbers into these categories so that they correspond to the required dialing freedoms Assign restriction level numbers to each category Also list those numbers that every station must be allowed to dial such as 911 as always allow and list those numbers that should never be dialed such ...

Page 954: ...veral or all lines to any desired toll group or combination of toll groups as needed Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From lines menu select line programming and press ENTER 4 Type line name or line number and press ENTER 5 From line programming type item number for toll groups and press ENTER 6 Type group number O 32 and press ENTER 7 Whe...

Page 955: ...gn different routing and toll restriction parameters to each of these entries There are several applications for this feature One application is in international dialing where different toll restriction parameters apply depending upon whether the caller dialed 0 or 011 In this case you can enter 0 pause to access local lines and 01 to access international lines Another application is with tie line...

Page 956: ...nd press ENTER 4 From system parameters menu select toWARS dialing pause and press ENTER 5 Press SPACE bar for feature setting 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER To enter restriction number digits 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select TOLL ARS and press ENTER 3 FromTolVARS menu select restriction t...

Page 957: ...umber to toll restriction table line entry with this procedure 1 Assign an exception number of 0 to 32 to each listed restriction number that may need it 2 Press CONTROL T for main menu 3 From main menu select TOLL ARS and press ENTER 4 From toll restriction menu select restriction tables and press ENTER 5 From the restriction table menu type row number and press ENTER 6 Press TAB to position curs...

Page 958: ...nd how to modify a number and costing information based entirely upon the programming of the system NOTE When the ARS feature is active never program a direct line appearance to a station If a station user selects a line directly at his or her station the system will not route the call using the ARS feature For an overview of automatic route selection refer to Section 12 I Enabling Automatic Route...

Page 959: ...ied 1No Test for Route Table Entry on Toll Restriction Table Route Call Via Route Table 32 No Select Route Table Equal oe Greater Than I I I Pi L 1 Modify Dialing Number Test for Costing Information Complete Dialing Allowed Costing Reported to SMDA cpJso53 12 2 Automatic Route Selection Programming ...

Page 960: ...Some examples of lines that have similar characteristics and should be grouped together into line groups are as listed below outgoing WATS lines to a particular area FX lines to a frequently called area similar AT T long distance lines similar MCI lines A line group can consist of only one line for example if only one FX line exists put it into a separate line group Doing this allows the ARS featu...

Page 961: ...re in addition to them Either way you can enter a maximum of 400 toll restriction and or ARS numbers Each entered number can be up to 16 digits long and can be comprised of digits O 9 Plus the match any digit if needed NOTE When the system accepts a number entry into the toll restriction table it re orders all of the table entries The system places a 0 after all other digits in the entries Also it...

Page 962: ...ROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select TOLL ARS and press ENTER 3 From the TOLL ARS menu select route table and press ENTER 4 Type l 32 to select route table to be programmed and press ENTER 5 Type l 6 to select route number and press ENTER 7 Press TAB key to position cursor at route status column 8 Press SPACE BAR for feature value and press ENTER 9 Press ESCAPE 10 Repeat steps 5 through...

Page 963: ...RS will try the next route of the route table Once again the route access level is tested This process is repeated up to a maximum of 6 times If the station has access to at least the first route but is unable to dial out because all lines are busy it will receive a busy tone in the handset or speaker The station can then camp on the route so it will ring when a line in the route table becomes ava...

Page 964: ...eeded to access it Programming To program the access level for the route 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select TOLL ARS and press ENTER 3 From the TOLL ARS menu select route tables press ENTER 4 Type l 32 to select route table to be programmed and press ENTER 5 Type l 6 to select route number and press ENTER 6 Press TAB key to position cursor at route access column 7 Type l 4...

Page 965: ... Washington DC area and that this is the way that ARS is going to route the call Finally assume that the route table route contains a modify digit table index number that points to the following modify digit table ADD AMCKJNT 0 DIGITS TO ADD n a DELETE AMOUNT 4 This situation results in the system deleting l 202 DELETE AMOUNT 4 from the beginning of the number and adding 0 digits ADD AMOUNT 0 This...

Page 966: ...CAPE twice 12 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end 13 Press ESCAPE to return to main menu Assigning Modify Digit Table To Route Description Use this procedure to assign modify digit tables to routes Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select TOLL ARS and press ENTER 3 From the TOLL ARS menu select route table and press...

Page 967: ...lumn 7 Type dollar and cents value nn nn of the surcharge 8 Press TAB key to position cursor to tier 1 cost column 9 Type tier 1 cost nn nn 10 Press TAB key to position cursor to tier 1 time column 11 Press SPACE BAR to select desired time 12 Press TAB key to position cursor to tier 2 cost column 13 Type tier 2 cost nn nn 14 Press ENTER to accept entries 15 Press ESCAPE 16 Repeat steps 5 15 for ea...

Page 968: ...m the main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From the lines menu select line programming 4 Type line port number l 240 or name and press ENTER 5 From the line programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 From cost incoming prompt press SPACE bar for desired feature setting and press RETURN 7 From incoming cost delay prompt press SPACE bar for desired feature setting and press ...

Page 969: ...ting and press ENTER to end To arrange for the system to process each station s personal speed dial numbers through the ARS feature 1 0 From the stations menu select button mapping and press ENTER 2 Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for first station to be programmed and press ENTER Button map with current assignment appears on screen 3 Type button code Ll L25 0 9 for butto...

Page 970: ...outs and press ENTER 3 From printouts menu select desired printout category and press ENTER 4 Type s for screen printout or p for hard copy printout through the SMDA SMDR data printer and press ENTER NOTE Press CONTROL C to stop a printout to the PC screen when necessary This action will not stop printout to a data printer 5 When printout is finished press any key to return to category menu and re...

Page 971: ...vices 0 Caller ID Programming 14 1 l Tracker Paging System 14 2 l Digital Voice Announce Programming 14 3 l PC Attendant Position Programming 14 4 l Voice Mail Programming 14 5 l ModemSetup 14 6 Peripheral Devices Programming 14 l ...

Page 972: ... has already viewed a record thus preventing redundant returns 14 1 I Defeting Viewed RNA Record for Caller ID Description When the system makes caller ID RNA information available to a group of stations any station user in the group can review the information by pressing the telephone s CID button When he or she does this the system removes the record from that telephone but continues to flash th...

Page 973: ...hen caller identification ID information is available from the central office take this programming action to match the line port to the feature You must also assign the caller ID lines to the stations and assign special purpose station buttons to control the feature Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select lines and press ENTER 3 From the lines menu select line prog...

Page 974: ...that ring at their stations while they are away The system stores caller ID RNA records and allows users to review them by pressing the CID button and return those calls that need returning by pressing the SAVE button The feature also denotes the identification of the last station that reviewed the records thus helping prevent multiple call backs to the same number After users review the caller ID...

Page 975: ...rough 4 and press ENTER 6 From tracker unit options menu select the serial port where the Tracker base station will be connected 1 through 18 and press ENTER 7 Toggle the second field with the SPACE bar to enable disable the Tracker Paging System option and press ENTER 8 Toggle the third field with the SPACE bar to select PC Attendant 1 through 4 or none and press ENTER 9 When finished press ESCAP...

Page 976: ... Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 13 Press ESCAPE to end 14 2 3 Making initial Tracker Pager Assignments Description Use the following programming instructions to select intercom numbers to assign pager types and to assign individual pagers to a Tracker base station Use this programming method to make many assignments quickly when first installing th...

Page 977: ...accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 8 Press ESCAPE to end NOTE To activate this feature assign this COS to the desired intercom numbers See Programming Station Features in Section 7 2 74 2 5 Page Recall Description This timing feature determines the amount of time that a Tracker page remains in a Tracker page orbit before recalling to the paging station Programmi...

Page 978: ...nutes Using system attendant programming you can divide this two minute period as necessary among the four messages or use the entire two minutes for one message These pre recorded messages play during an in process call and prompt callers to dial a single digit to reach a particular intercom number or feature code For each message type you can assign up to ten intercom numbers or feature codes an...

Page 979: ...DISA line 4 6 to receive and respond to messages associated with the customer service department Sales Department DISA Line 1 DISA Voice Option 1 DISA Line 2 DISA Voice Option 1 DISA Line 3 DISA Voice Option 1 f Customer Service Deoartment DISA Line 4 DISA Voice Option 2 DISA Line 5 DISA Voice Option 2 DISA Line 6 DISA Voice Option 2 DVALDISA Application You can enhance the security of DISA by usi...

Page 980: ...aller such as welcome greeting day main greeting menu choices recall busy recall no answer DVA Index Number10 Welcome Greeting I DVA Index Number 14 Day Night Menu I You have reached ABC company Dial 1 for Service Dial 2 for Advanced Features9 Dial 3 for Assistance I Group ITCM 2 ISA Access 3 Station Number iervice Department 411 phones ring and flash group ITCM DvA Index Number Dial your Authoriz...

Page 981: ...u have reached ABC company I I I m sorry that extension doesn t answer Dial 1 to track IndexPrompt22 Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant Recall No Answer I Dial 3 to leave a message in the voice mail box 1 t8 2 Extension Number 3 Voice Mail Port number 1 Index Prompt 14 Day Night Menu I If you are calling from a tone dial telephone you may dial the extension number at any time I m sorry t...

Page 982: ...rompts them to dial a code to continue the connection This message prompts callers to dial a code before the system routes their call When used with telephony services this dialed code causes a screen showing caller s identification and data to appear on computer at called station s location System plays the message requesting the dialed entry after a welcome message and before a day menu message ...

Page 983: ...by voice message The caller then enters his or her call back number and the symbol to complete the page Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select peripherals and press ENTER 3 From peripherals menu select voice DVA and press ENTER 4 Enter voice message number and press ENTER NOTE You may need to refer to step 5 of the following programming instructions to obtain the voice...

Page 984: ... the system distributes the messages in both units If someone later removes one unit from service the on y messages that will play are those stored in the remaining DVA To locate which DVA stores which message use Section 16 2 2 to obtain a DVA status report Programming To record a DVA message 1 D Press INTERCOM and dial o 061 D 2 Choose voice source dial 1 to speak message into handset dial 2 to ...

Page 985: ...ial 10 42 to choose next message type to copy NOTE If your installer has connected more than two DVAs to the system the system automatically selects the DVA that will receive the copied message Likewise the system automatically selects the DVA that it uses for playing back the message to a caller Additional DVAs become a shared resource for the system s memory and are not dedicated to particular l...

Page 986: ...ROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select peripherals and press ENTER 3 From peripherals menu select PC attendant and press ENTER 4 Type PC attendant number l 4 and press ENTER 5 Type item number for station port and press ENTER then type l 480 for station port s Importantaisconnect any telephone that is currently installed there 6 For line pair type odd even number pair that corresponds to loca...

Page 987: ...more than one stations s intercom hunt list Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select station programming and press ENTER 4 Type personal intercom number of PC attendant position or previously assigned name and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for intercom hunt list and press ENTER 6 Type per...

Page 988: ...APE to return to main menu 10 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 11 From stations menu select station OS programming menu and press ENTER 12 Type class of service number l 32 and press ENTER 13 From the COS programming menu type item number for line group access and press ENTER Remember use CONTROL N to find the correct screen 14 Type 16 and press ENTER 15 When finished Press ESCAPE tw...

Page 989: ...d Delete button for the user to press to erase a message after he or she has read it or sent it to the data printer Quit button for the user to press to end a text messaging session Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From the stations menu select button mapping and press ENTER 4 Type prime intercom number or previously assigned name a...

Page 990: ...NTER 4 Type attendant number 14 and press ENTER 5 From PC attendant menu select button mapping and press ENTER 6 Press CONTROL E for button map of function keys and press ENTER 7 Type button number Ll L12 and press ENTER 8 Type mnemonic type for a description of mnemonic if you need it for desired feature and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 until all feature button are programmed 10 When finish...

Page 991: ... station ports the ATI D IPI interface device used with the digital station ports or the DXIST station board used with industry standard telephone ports you must identify the station ports where these devices are connected Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From the main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From station menu select phone types and press ENTER 4 Type row number for sta...

Page 992: ...l port differently For instance you can name them VW VM2 VM3 and VM4 however do not name each port VM without personalizing it further with a unique suffix such as 1 2 3 4 or A B C D for example Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select stations and press ENTER 3 From stations menu select voice mail and press ENTER 4 From voice mail menu type the row number for the voice ...

Page 993: ...ogrammed and press ENTER 5 From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER 6 Press SPACE bar for desired setting and press ENTER 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 8 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 9 Repeat steps 4 8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end Immediate Transfer Description You should choose the automatic atte...

Page 994: ...ton mapping 7 When finished press ESCAPE twice 14 5 5 Arranging Voice Mail Ringing Options Description Programming The DXP Plus system automatically enables ringing line preference at the voice mail station ports With this feature enabled the voice mail system s automatic attendant will answer calls You can use direct delayed or night ringing features to determine how quickly or when it does this ...

Page 995: ...ENTER 4 From the line menu select item number for feature and press ENTER 5 Type the identification ID number and press ENTER 6 Press ESCAPE twice 7 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 8 Repeat steps 3 7 for each line or press ESCAPE to end 14 5 7 Enabling Extended DTMF Tones For Voice Mail Use Description The system provides a means by which you can se...

Page 996: ...tem when a station answers a voice mail transferred call This action can alert the voice mail system to disconnect and leave the parties connected Busy If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is busy on a call the DXP Plus sends this DTh4F digit to the voice system When the voice mail system receives this digit it can abandon the transfer reconnect to the call and offer the cal...

Page 997: ...ail and press ENTER 4 From the voice mail menu select integration digits and press ENTER 5 From the integration digits menu type row number for item and press ENTER 6 Type entry and press ENTER 7 Repeat step 6 until finished 8 When finished press ESCAPE twice 9 Type y to accept changes n to reject them or r to resume editing and press ENTER 10 Press ESCAPE twice to return to main menu Peripheral D...

Page 998: ...ou can use the system manager programming from the programming station to reset the modem To do this enter the system manager programming mode and dial a Normally you do not program the initialize string because it defaults with the necessary values for DXMDM operation however you may adjust the rings before answer value if necessary To do this set the SO value to the desired number 1 one ring 2 t...

Page 999: ...d Layout l Understanding The Board Configuration 15 1 l Examining The Board Status 15 2 l Adding Boards To The System 15 3 l Deleting Boards From The System 15 4 l Moving Boards Within The System 15 5 Board Layout Programming 15 1 ...

Page 1000: ...ical line numbers 1 8 and slot 30 yields logical line numbers 9 17 Each installed board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity For example a 16 station board requires 16 timing circuits an eight line loop start line board requires eight circuits and a fully configured Tl trunk board requires 24 timing circuits In the DXP plus each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits Because of this ...

Page 1001: ...ic of added board and press ENTER 6 When finished press ESCAPE twice 15 4 Deleting Boards From The System Description When you delete a circuit board from the system the system will not recognize that board s absence until you take this programming action Programming 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu 2 From main menu select board configuration and press ENTER 3 From board configuration menu select a...

Page 1002: ... 6 9 3 12 2 7 1 42 12 3 12 4 6 8 4 7 2 30 6 8 15 10 5 1 10 5 6 9 2 14 5 3 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 8 7 1 8 1 5 Automatic Reports SMDA 10 2 1 Automatic Route Selection 6 9 3 Automatic Route Selection Diagram 12 1 Automatic Route Selection Dial Tone 6 9 4 Automatic Route Selection Enabling 12 Automatic Route Selection for Speed Dial Numbers 12 6 Automatic Route Selection Hookflash Restriction 7 1 44 Automa...

Page 1003: ...B Database Programming Station 7 2 27 Day 1 Day 2 and Night Ringing Begin and End Times 6 9 18 7 2 13 Day 1 Ring 7 2 13 Day 2 Ring 7 2 13 Day Exception Number Night Exception Number 7 2 16 Day Exception Number Night Exception Number Remote 7 1 30 8 4 5 Day Restriction Level Night Restriction Level 7 1 25 Day Route Access Night Route Access 7 1 23 Default Button Map 6 1 5 Default Class Of Service 6...

Page 1004: ...g Exclusive Hold Executive Override Block Executive Override Enable Disable Executive Override Programming Expected CO Digits 8 1 2 8 1 2 10 4 12 8 8 2 7 1 46 7 2 23 1 0 11 7 7 1 12 7 1 13 7 1 13 7 1 13 8 4 2 6 8 3 7 2 31 145 7 6 10 9 F Feature Code Changing The 6 11 2 Feature Mnemonic List 7 3 1 Feature Renumbering 6 12 Flash Recall 6 8 8 Flexible Ringing Assignments 7 2 13 7 6 1 Forced Account C...

Page 1005: ... Answer 7 1 31 Line Block Programming 8 2 3 Line Default 6 1 6 Line Disable 8 1 3 Line Disconnect Automatic Camp On Line Feature Programming Line Group Access Line Group Programming Line Group Queue Line Group Queuing Line Groups for ARS Line Name Line Originate Line Programming Line To Line Connect Duration Line To Line Transfer Line Type LineNoice OptionlDVA Relationships Understanding The Lines...

Page 1006: ...ewing General Programming DISA Authorization Codes Programming For Peripheral Devices Programming Intercom Numbers Programming Line Features Programming Port Programming Station Class Of Service Features Programming Station Features Programming System Features Programming The Tl Parameters Programming Toll Restriction 7 2 13 7 4 7 2 20 8 1 11 7 2 8 7 2 8 7 2 8 7 2 8 13 13 8 1 5 10 2 8 8 3 14 9 8 7...

Page 1007: ... Station Service Observe Initiating Service Observing 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 1 3 6 4 6 9 20 7 2 15 7 2 15 7 2 15 Services DTMF Highway 6 9 19 Single Line Proprietary Telephone TAP Button 7 2 22 Single Line TAP 7 2 22 SMDA Attendant Delete 10 1 8 SMDA Report Examples 10 2 3 SMDA Reports 10 2 SMDAISMDR Parameters 10 1 SMDA SMDR Printer Port 10 1 9 SMDAISMDR Programming 10 SMDR Print Parameter 10 1 3 SMDR R...

Page 1008: ...First 7 2 9 Tone Length 6 8 4 7 2 31 Tone Or Music On Hold 7 1 19 8 1 4 Tone Or Voice Signalling 7 2 9 Tracker Access 7 1 9 Tracker Paging System Options Programming 14 2 1 Tracker Paging System Programming 14 2 Transfer Ring Cadence 1 2 34 Transfer To Voice Mail Button Assigning 14 5 4 Translate A DXP Database Using VMMI Software To 1 5 u Understanding Station Numbering 9 1 Unsupervised Conferenc...

Page 1009: ...Digital Communications System Programming Records The record charts included in this publication reflect software releases through 11A R Printed in U S A IMI66 125 03 3 97 ...

Page 1010: ... However this is not always possible as the combinations of accessories and features are too varied and extensive to insure total feature compatibility Accordingly some features identified in this publication will not operate if some other feature is activated Comdial disclaims all liability relating to feature non compatibility or associated in any way with problems which may be encountered by in...

Page 1011: ...Enabling Status Reporting and Major Alarm Alerting 2 14 2 14 T1 Status Logging 2 14 2 15 Major Alarm Alerting 2 15 3 Station Records 3 1 3 1 COS Programming 3 2 3 2 Station Programming 3 3 3 3 Button Mapping and Telephone Types 3 4 3 4 Copy Model COS 3 26 3 5 Copy Model Station 3 27 3 6 Copy Button Map 3 28 3 7 Hunt Groups 3 29 4 Line Records 4 1 4 1 Line Programming 4 2 4 2 Line Group Programming...

Page 1012: ... 7 1 Restriction Tables 7 2 7 2 Staion Restriction Level 7 3 7 3 Toll Groups 7 4 7 4 Route Tables 7 5 7 5 Modify Digit Tables 7 13 8 Printout Records 8 1 8 1 Printout Records 8 2 9 Peripherals 9 1 9 1 Caller ID Records 9 2 9 2 Tracker Records 9 3 9 3 Voice DVA Records 9 5 9 4 PC Attendant Records 9 6 9 5 Voice Mail Records 9 7 9 6 Modem Setup 9 8 10 Board Configuration 10 1 10 1 Board Configuratio...

Page 1013: ...ndex at the end of this publication to locate a programmable feature by name Since the Diagnostics menu item does not require any record keeping this publication contains no entry tables for it For a discussion of the system diagnostics see IMI89 239 Understanding The System Diagnostics that you can find under the troubleshooting section of your system hardware binder Main Menu 1 System 2 Stations...

Page 1014: ...Defaults 2 Terminal Setup 3 LCD Messages 4 Save Restore Database use VMMI 5 Serial Ports 6 SOHVA Table 7 Speed Dials 8 Time and Date 9 Timing 10 System Parameters 11 Paging Zones 12 Change Password 13 Feature Renumbering 14 T1 E1 Status Log Parameters 15 Major Alarm Alerting Enter Selection 1 13 2 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 System Records 2 1 ...

Page 1015: ...LCD Messages Number Message 16 Characters Maximum 01 B a c k a t 02 C a l l 03 A s k T h e m T o H o l d 04 T a k e A M e s s a g e 05 I W i l l C a l l B a c k 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Default bold italic entries IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 2 2 System Records ...

Page 1016: ...Aux Data Port 13 Aux Data Port 14 Aux Data Port 15 Aux Data Port 16 Baud Rates 150 300 600 1200 1800 2400 4800 9600 Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Parity None Even Odd Flow Control None Xon Xoff CTR DTR Defaults Data Port 1 9600 9600 8 1 None None Data Port 2 2400 2400 7 2 None None Data Ports 3 10 19 200 19 200 8 1 None None Data Ports 11 18 9600 9600 8 1 None None 2 3 1 Modem Setup Feature Default ...

Page 1017: ...ook Voice Announce Groups S O H V A R e c e i v e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 S 2 O 3 H 4 V 5 A 6 7 T 8 r 9 a 10 n 11 s 12 m 13 i 14 t 15 16 Default IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 2 4 System Records ...

Page 1018: ...100 199 for dialing codes 100 199 Enter line number line group number prime line last line used Beginning with software release 8 B you can assign intercom as a preselect choice Enter 1 128 for line or enter 1 16 for line group Enter 32 digits maximum enter P for pause and F for hookflash DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 System Records 2 5 ...

Page 1019: ... dialing codes 200 299 Enter line number line group number prime line last line used Beginning with software release 8 B you can assign intercom as a preselect choice Enter 1 128 for line or enter 1 16 for line group Enter 32 digits maximum enter P for pause and F for hookflash IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 2 6 System Records ...

Page 1020: ... dialing codes 300 399 Enter line number line group number prime line last line used Beginning with software release 8 B you can assign intercom as a preselect choice Enter 1 128 for line or enter 1 16 for line group Enter 32 digits maximum enter P for pause and F for hookflash DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 System Records 2 7 ...

Page 1021: ... dialing codes 400 499 Enter line number line group number prime line last line used Beginning with software release 8 B you can assign intercom as a preselect choice Enter 1 128 for line or enter 1 16 for line group Enter 32 digits maximum enter P for pause and F for hookflash IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 2 8 System Records ...

Page 1022: ... dialing codes 500 599 Enter line number line group number prime line last line used Beginning with software release 8 B you can assign intercom as a preselect choice Enter 1 128 for line or enter 1 16 for line group Enter 32 digits maximum enter P for pause and F for hookflash DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 System Records 2 9 ...

Page 1023: ...n 25 min 30 min Camp on Auto Callback Ring 0 sec 10 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 45 sec 1 min 1 5 min 2 min 3 min 4 min Out Dial Delay Time 500 ms 1 sec 1 5 sec 2 sec 2 5 sec 3 sec 3 5 sec 4 sec 4 5 sec 5 sec Authorization Code Time 0 sec 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec IST Ring Timeout 1min 1 25 min 1 5 min 1 75 min 2 min 3 min 4 min Never IST DTMF Ring Timeout 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 ...

Page 1024: ...S Control Disabled Enabled Line Disconnect Auto Camp on Disabled Enabled Automatic Station Relocation Disabled Enabled Default Relocation Response No Yes Ringback Tone Tone 1 Tone 2 Day 1 Begin Time 24 Hour None Hour Minute Day 1 End Time 24 Hour None Hour Minute Day 2 Begin Time 24 Hour None Hour Minute Day 2 End Time 24 Hour None Hour Minute Night Begin Time 24 Hour None Hour Minute Night End Ti...

Page 1025: ...External Paging Port Assigned 0 No 1 yes Default zone 1is all call zones 2 8 not assigned This means stations 101 292 are assigned to both transmit and receive in zone 1 and none are assigned in any other zone Also no external paging port is assigned 2 9 Relays Relay 1 Record Direct Ring LInes 1 128 Delayed Ring Lines 1 128 Day 1 Ring Lines 1 128 Day 2 Ring Lines 1 128 Night Ring Lines 1 128 Relay...

Page 1026: ... Line Group 8 86 Personal Ring Tone 3 43 Line Group 8 87 Personal Ring Tone 4 44 Line Group 10 88 Personal Ring Tone 5 45 Line Group 11 89 Personal Ring Tone 6 46 Line Group 12 60 Directed Station Hold On 90 Line Group 13 61 Service Observe 03 Line Group 14 62 Speed Dial Programming 1 Line Group 15 63 Directed Station Hold Off 90 Line Group 16 64 Voice Announce Block On 2 Page and Line Answer from...

Page 1027: ...ar Error Alarm Trigger 0 255 None 1 Sec 2 Bipolar Error Logging 0 999 See Note A 3 CRC Error Alarm Trigger 0 255 None 1 Sec 4 CRC Error Logging 0 999 See Note A 5 Slip Errors 0 999 See Note B 6 PLL Errors 0 999 See Note A 7 Transmit Slip Errors 0 999 See Note B 8 Loss of Sync 0 999 See Note B 9 Blue Alarms 0 999 See Note B 10 Loss of Signal 0 999 See Note B 11 Primary Sec Sync Ref Switch 0 999 See...

Page 1028: ...Note B 7 Blue Alarms 0 999 See Note B 8 Loss of Signal 0 999 See Note B 9 Primary Sec Sync Ref Switch 0 999 See Note B 10 Sync Phase Lock Error 0 999 See Note B 11 Yellow Alarms 0 999 See Note B 12 Red Alarms 0 999 See Note B Defaults Thresholds 0 Time Periods 1 Sec for Error Types 1 2 and 4 and 1 Min for Error Types 3 and 5 12 NOTE A Choices are 1 5 30 Sec 1 5 10 Min 1 Hr NOTE B Choices are 1 5 1...

Page 1029: ...tion menu type selection number for feature and press ENTER Stations 1 COS Programming 2 Station Programming 3 Button Mapping 4 Phone Types 5 Copy Model COS 6 Copy Model Station 7 Copy Model Button Map 8 Hunt Groups Enter Selection 1 7 3 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Station Records 3 1 ...

Page 1030: ...Day Route Access 1 4 4 4 1 Night Route Access 1 4 4 4 1 Day Restriction Level 1 8 1 1 1 Night Restriction Level 1 8 1 1 1 System Speed Dial Groups NONE 1 20 1 20 1 20 None Station Monitoring YES NO No Yes No Directed Station Hold YES NO Yes Yes Yes Remote Station Disable YES NO Yes Yes Yes Remote Day Exception Numbers NONE 1 32 None None None Remote Night Exception Numbers NONE 1 32 None None None...

Page 1031: ...swer Rings None 1 6 4 4 3 Personal Ringing Tone 1 8 Defaults with each station port number LCD Contrast 1 8 5 5 5 Initiate Service Observe Yes No No No No Service Observable Yes No No No No ARS Day Exception No None 1 32 1 3 1 3 1 3 ARS Night Execption No None 1 32 1 3 1 3 1 3 SOHVA Beeps 1 6 6 6 6 SOHVA Groups None 1 16 None None None Busy On SOHVA Yes No No No No Pickup Group None 1 16 1 1 1 Thr...

Page 1032: ...ecord Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Li...

Page 1033: ... Auto Redial Button Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE ...

Page 1034: ...e Btn Auto Redial Button Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL ...

Page 1035: ...TION Account Code Entry Alternate Attendant Btn Answer Button Auxiliary Page Btn Auto Redial Button Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN ...

Page 1036: ...utton Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn Headset Mode Hold Button Intercom ...

Page 1037: ...ton Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn Headset Mode Hold Button Intercom Bu...

Page 1038: ...tn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn Headset Mode Hold Button ...

Page 1039: ...utton Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn...

Page 1040: ...de Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn Headset Mode Hold But...

Page 1041: ...tion Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn Headset Mode H...

Page 1042: ...xiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION...

Page 1043: ...utton Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DES...

Page 1044: ...tton Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESC...

Page 1045: ...Button Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DE...

Page 1046: ...utton Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn Headset Mode Hold Button Intercom Button Intercom...

Page 1047: ...Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn Headset Mode Hold Button Intercom Button Interco...

Page 1048: ...r ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn Headset Mode Hold Button Intercom Button Intercom Number Btn...

Page 1049: ...on Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE PARK PRVCY DESCRIPTION Group Listen Btn Group Pick Up Btn He...

Page 1050: ... Btn Auto Redial Button Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL P...

Page 1051: ...Button Auxiliary Page Btn Auto Redial Button Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MU...

Page 1052: ...Auto Redial Button Auxiliary Record Btn Auxiliary Ring Button Authorization Code Btn Both Button Camp On Button Caller ID Button Do Not Disturb Button Directed Call Pick Up DSS Status Button Executive Override Feature Button Forward All Button Forward Personal Forward All RNA Btn Forward Personal RNA Btn BUTTON GPLSN GPKUP HDST HOLD ITCM I LCDMS LNG LN LOCK MMEPG MSGWT MUSC NIGHT OAI OVERFL PAGE P...

Page 1053: ...tercom Button Intercom Number Btn LCD Messaging Btn Line Group Btn 1 16 Line Button 1 128 Lock Button Meet Me Page Btn Message Waiting Btn Music Source 1 2 Night Mode Button Open Architecture Btn Overflow Button Paging Zone Btn 1 8 Park Orbit Button 1 9 Privacy Button BUTTON QUEUE RLSE RSP S OBS SAVE SDIAL SILNT SOHVA SPLIT SRIAL SYSST TAFS TBUSY TRACK VABLK VOLSV XVM DESCRIPTION Queue Button Rele...

Page 1054: ...3 4 Copy Model COS Block Programming Record For Class Of Service Model Class Of Service Matching Class Of Service IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 3 26 Station Records ...

Page 1055: ...de Station Block Programming Record For Stations Copy this chart as needed for each station board Model Station Intercom Number or Name Matching Stations DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Station Records 3 27 ...

Page 1056: ...on Map Block Programming Record For Button Mapping Copy this chart as needed for each station board Model Station Intercom Number or Name Matching Stations IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 3 28 Station Records ...

Page 1057: ...low Destination Any valid ext None DID DNIS Display No Yes No Multiple Call Handling No Yes No Call Advance Time 20 sec 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 50 sec 1 min 1 5 min 2 0 min 2 5 min 3 0 min 3 5 min 4 0 min 4 5 min 5 0 min Overflow Time 1 min 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 50 sec 1 min 1 5 min 2 0 min 2 5 min 3 0 min 3 5 min 4 0 min 5 0 min 6 0 min 8 0 min 10 min 12 min 15 min Recall Time 2 min 30 ...

Page 1058: ...ress ENTER From the line menu type selection number for feature and press ENTER Lines 1 Line Programming 2 Line Group Programming 3 Copy Model Line 4 DID DNIS Block Programming 5 DISA Configuration Enter Selection 1 5 4 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Line Records 4 1 ...

Page 1059: ... Route 1 32 32 Pad Level Transmit Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal Pad Level Receive Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal Dialing Mode Tone Pulse Tone Abandon Hold Release 50 msec 350 msec 350 msec Positive Disconnect Time 400 msec 500 msec 800 msec 2 sec 1 sec 1 6 sec 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec 5 sec Toll Groups 0 32 1 DTMF Level Low High Normal Normal B...

Page 1060: ...ec 12 sec 18 sec 24 sec 30 sec 36 sec On Ans No Delay Incoming Cost Route 1 32 32 Pad Level Transmit Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal Pad Level Receive Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal Incoming Alert Signal Ring Required Ring Optional Ring Req Dialing Mode Tone Pulse Tone Toll Groups 0 32 1 DTMF Level Low High Normal Normal Busy Lead Yes No N...

Page 1061: ...coming Cost Route 1 32 32 Pad Level Transmit Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal Pad Level Receive Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal Connect Mode Direct Metalic Carrier Central Office Direct Control Signalling Delay Start Immediate Start Wink Start Wink Line Access Hot Line Extension Hot Line Ext Dialing Dialing ANI Delivery Yes No No Call Announ...

Page 1062: ...e 2 None Source 1 Ringback On Transfer Yes No No Privacy Release Yes No No SMDR Record Yes No Yes Cost Incoming Yes No No Incoming Cost Delay No Delay 6 sec 12 sec 18 sec 24 sec 30 sec 36 sec On Ans No Delay Incoming Cost Route 1 32 32 Pad Level Transmit Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal Pad Level Receive Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal DID D...

Page 1063: ...ingback On Transfer Yes No No Privacy Release Yes No No SMDR Record Yes No Yes Cost Incoming Yes No No Incoming Cost Delay No Delay 6 sec 12 sec 18 sec 24 sec 30 sec 36 sec On Ans No Delay Incoming Cost Route 1 32 32 Pad Level Transmit Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal Pad Level Receive Gain 2 Gain 1 Nom Loss 1 Loss 2 Loss 3 Loss 4 Loss 5 Nominal DID DINS Block 1 4 1 Cal...

Page 1064: ... Access 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Default Group 1 lines 9 16 Group 2 lines 17 21 Group 3 lines 25 32 Groups 4 16 no lines assigned 4 3 Block Programming Record For Lines Model Line Matching Lines DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Line Records 4 7 ...

Page 1065: ... 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Enter either DXPCO LP4 or DXPCO LP8 for board type Bd Type Port Number Name Grp 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 4 8 Line Records ...

Page 1066: ...5 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Line Records 4 9 ...

Page 1067: ...8 1 CFOS Enable Yes No No Information Digits Yes No Mark each block to match your desired setting Feature Choice Default Option Block Number 1 4 Block Name 7 char max Control Signalling Wink Start Immediate Start Delay Start Wink Expected CO Digits 0 7 7 Dialing Mode Tone Pulse Tone ANI Delivery Yes No No DISA Voice Options 1 4 1 Alternate Routing Extension 0 nnnn Alternate Routing Ring Code 1 8 1...

Page 1068: ... block Copy this blank sheet as needed to provide a record for every CO digit sequence DID Block_______________ CO Digits Name Day Itcm Number Night Itcm Number Ring Code Default ring code 1 for all intercom numbers DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Line Records 4 11 ...

Page 1069: ... 2 5 10 15 or 30 minutes 10 minutes RNA Timeout 0 through 9 rings see note below table 3 rings Maximum Reminder Timeout 2 5 10 15 or 30 minutes 10 minutes Route Drop Invalid Access Drop NOTE The RNA timeout number of rings with no answer you select here must be less than the RNA rings that you select on the station programming record Section 3 2 IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 4 12 Line Rec...

Page 1070: ...bers and press ENTER From the intercom numbers menu type selection number for feature and press ENTER Intercoms 1 Modify Intercoms 2 Add Intercoms 3 Remove Intercoms 4 Station Intercom Renumber Enter Selection 1 4 5 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Intercom Records 5 1 ...

Page 1071: ...062 Bd Type Port Number Name COS Df lt As gnd 63 1063 64 1064 65 1065 66 1066 67 1067 68 1068 69 1069 70 1070 71 1071 72 1072 73 1073 74 1074 75 1075 76 1076 77 1077 78 1078 79 1079 80 1080 81 1081 82 1082 83 1083 84 1084 85 1085 86 1086 87 1087 88 1088 89 1089 90 1090 91 1091 92 1092 93 1093 94 1094 95 1095 96 1096 97 1097 98 1098 99 1099 100 1100 101 1101 102 1102 103 1103 104 1104 105 1105 106 ...

Page 1072: ...7 248 1248 Enter DXDST 8 DXDST 16 DXAST 8 DXAST 16 DXIST 8 or DXIST 16 Bd Type Port Number Name COS Df lt As gnd 125 1125 126 1126 127 1127 128 1128 129 1129 130 1130 131 1131 132 1132 133 1133 134 1134 135 1135 136 1136 137 1137 138 1138 139 1139 140 1140 141 1141 142 1142 143 1143 144 1144 145 1145 146 1146 147 1147 148 1148 149 1149 150 1150 151 1151 152 1152 153 1153 154 1154 155 1155 156 1156...

Page 1073: ...1 372 1372 Enter DXDST 8 DXDST 16 DXAST 8 DXAST 16 DXIST 8 or DXIST 16 Bd Type Port Number Name COS Df lt As gnd 249 1249 250 1250 251 1251 252 1252 253 1253 254 1254 255 1255 256 1256 257 1257 258 1258 259 1259 260 1260 261 1261 262 1262 263 1263 264 1264 265 1265 266 1266 267 1267 268 1268 269 1269 270 1270 271 1271 272 1772 273 1273 274 1274 275 1275 276 1276 277 1277 278 1278 279 1279 280 1280...

Page 1074: ...d Type Port Number Name COS Df lt As gnd 373 1373 374 1374 375 1375 376 1376 377 1377 378 1378 379 1379 380 1380 381 1381 382 1382 383 1383 384 1384 385 1385 386 1386 387 1387 388 1388 389 1389 390 1390 391 1391 392 1392 393 1393 394 1394 395 1395 396 1396 397 1397 398 1398 399 1399 400 1400 401 1401 402 1402 403 1403 404 1404 405 1405 406 1406 407 1407 408 1408 409 1409 410 1410 411 1411 412 1412...

Page 1075: ...s ENTER From the SMDA SMDR menu type selection number for feature and press ENTER SMDA SMDR Programming 1 SMDA SMDR Parameters 2 Automatic Reports 3 Account Codes 4 Emergency Numbers 5 Authorization Codes Enter Selection 1 9 6 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 SMDA SMDR Records 6 1 ...

Page 1076: ... where appropriate Report Print Day None Daily Sunday through Saturday Report Print Time 24 Hour Format hh mm 00 00 Station Report No Report Detail Summary Detail Summary Account Report No Report Detail Summary Detail Summary Line Report No Report Detail Summary Detail Summary Department Report No Report Detail Summary Detail Summary Print All Report Yes No Delete After Print Yes No Default values...

Page 1077: ... ______________ Account Code Record up 1000 entries allowed copy this chart as needed Active Number Active Number Active Number Active Number Active Number Default no account codes assigned DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 SMDA SMDR Records 6 3 ...

Page 1078: ...1 911 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Enter 1 16 digits Default bold italic entry 6 6 Authorization Codes Itcm No Code Itcm No Code Itcm No Code Itcm No Code IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 6 4 SMDA SMDR Records ...

Page 1079: ...mber for TOLL ARS and press ENTER From the TOLL ARS menu type selection number for feature and press ENTER Toll ARS 1 Restriction Tables 2 Route Tables 3 Modify Digit Table Enter Selection 1 3 7 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Toll ARS Records 7 1 ...

Page 1080: ...l record space Dialed Number Restriction Exception Route Costing Toll Level Number Table Group 0 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 The Route Costing Table records are not needed unless you program call costing or ARS for the system Default bold italic entries IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 7 2 Toll ARS Records ...

Page 1081: ...7 2 Station Restriction Level Restriction Level Class Of Toll Stations level Service Category Assigned Allow All 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Deny All DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Toll ARS Records 7 3 ...

Page 1082: ... Toll Groups Toll Lines Assigned To Each Toll Group Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 7 4 Toll ARS Records ...

Page 1083: ...TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 4 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE GROUP 1 16 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 1 16 SURCHARGE nn nn TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE ROUTE TABLE 3 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 RO...

Page 1084: ... sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 7 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE GROUP 1 16 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 1 16 SURCHARGE nn nn TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 5 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE...

Page 1085: ...E sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 11 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE GROUP 1 16 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 1 16 SURCHARGE nn nn TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 9 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LI...

Page 1086: ... sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 15 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE GROUP 1 16 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 1 16 SURCHARGE nn nn TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 13 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LI...

Page 1087: ... sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 19 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE GROUP 1 16 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 1 16 SURCHARGE nn nn TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 17 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LI...

Page 1088: ... sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 23 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE GROUP 1 16 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 1 16 SURCHARGE nn nn TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 21 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LI...

Page 1089: ... sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 27 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE GROUP 1 16 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 1 16 SURCHARGE nn nn TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 25 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LI...

Page 1090: ... sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 31 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LINE GROUP 1 16 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 1 16 SURCHARGE nn nn TIER 1 COST nn nn TIER 1 TIME sec TIER 2 COST nn nn ACTIVE WITH TONE ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE NOT ACTIVE ROUTE TABLE 29 SPECIFICATION ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 LI...

Page 1091: ...IGITS TABLE 4 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS 0 20 QUANTITY OF DELETED DIGITS 0 10 MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 5 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS 0 20 QUANTITY OF DELETED DIGITS 0 10 MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 6 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS 0 20 QUANTITY OF DELETED DIGITS 0 10 MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 7 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS 0 20 QUANTITY OF DELETED DIGITS 0 10 MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 8 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADD...

Page 1092: ... NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS 0 20 QUANTITY OF DELETED DIGITS 0 10 MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 13 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS 0 20 QUANTITY OF DELETED DIGITS 0 10 MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 14 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS 0 20 QUANTITY OF DELETED DIGITS 0 10 MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 15 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS 0 20 QUANTITY OF DELETED DIGITS 0 10 MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 16 NUMBER SEQUENCE OF ADDED DIGITS...

Page 1093: ...ER From printouts menu type selection number for feature and press ENTER Printouts 1 System 2 Station 3 Lines 4 Intercom Number 5 SMDA SMDR 6 Toll ARS 7 Peripherals 8 Complete System Data 9 Abort Printouts Enter Selection 1 8 8 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Printout Records 8 1 ...

Page 1094: ...out Records Record desired printouts System Station Lines Intercom Numbers Ext Name Group Intercom SMDA SMDR Toll ARS Peripherals Complete System Data IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 8 2 Printout Records ...

Page 1095: ...menu and press ENTER From selected peripheral menu type selection number for feature and press ENTER Peripherals 1 Caller ID 2 Tracker 3 Voice DVA 4 PC Attendant 5 Voice Mail 6 Modem Setup Enter Selection 1 6 9 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Peripherals Records 9 1 ...

Page 1096: ...ns Delete Viewed Records Yes No Abort Ring Time 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Mark blocks to indicate programming choices Default bold italic entries 9 1 2 Caller ID Local Call Table Row Number IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 9 2 Peripherals Records ...

Page 1097: ...acker Base Station Serial Data Port 1 18 Remote Installation Status None PC Attendant Enabled Disabled 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Defaults Serial Port 1 Remote Installation None Status Disabled DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Peripherals Records 9 3 ...

Page 1098: ...t As Needed For Additional Record Space Station Pager Number Enable Tracker Pager Model Tracker Base Station Intercom Name Yes No P1000 P2000 P3000 P4000 1 2 3 4 Default None Assigned IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 9 4 Peripherals Records ...

Page 1099: ...d For Additional Voice Messages Message Type Prompt Digit Extension Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Default None Assigned DVA Voice Option Number_______________ DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Peripherals Records 9 5 ...

Page 1100: ...EPG meet me page button MSGWT message waitng button MUSC music source button 1 2 NIGHT night mode button OAI open architecture button OVERFL overflow button PAGE paging zone button 1 8 PARK park orbit button 1 9 PRVCY privacy button QUEUE queue button RLSE release button RSP response button 1 30 S OBS service observe button SAVE dynamic save button SDIAL speed dial button SILNT silent ringer butto...

Page 1101: ...15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Default No intercom numbers assigned or linked 9 5 2 Integration Digits Feature Record Default Follow Extension ID 2 Intercom Answer Confirmation 1 Busy 2 Do Not Disturb 3 Incoming Intercom Answer 9 Disconnect A DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Peripherals Records 9 7 ...

Page 1102: ...9 6 Modem Setup Feature Default Record Data Port 1 18 2 Initialize String Alphanumeric String AT S0 1 M0 Q1 E0 IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 9 8 Peripherals Records ...

Page 1103: ...or desired peripheral menu and press ENTER From board configuration menu type selection number for feature and press ENTER Board Configuration 1 Status 2 Add 3 Delete 4 Move Enter Selection 1 4 10 DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66 125 Peripherals Records 10 1 ...

Page 1104: ...on 10 AUX1 11 AUX2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Main Cabinet Slot Location Board Description 1 AUX 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lower Cabinet Slot Location Board Description 21 AUX1 22 AUX2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 IMI66 125 DXP Plus Programming Records 10 2 Board Configuration ...

Page 1105: ... Day 2 Ring 3 3 Day Restriction Level 3 2 Day Route Access 3 2 Default Forward Type 3 3 Delayed Ring 3 3 DID Line Types 4 5 DID DINS Block Programming 4 10 Options 4 10 Translation Table 4 11 DigiTech 24 Line LCD Speakerphone Mapping Record 3 14 DigiTech 24 Line Telephone Button Mapping Record 3 15 Direct Ring 3 3 Directed Station Hold 3 2 DISA Configuration Programming 4 12 Disabled 3 3 Do Not Di...

Page 1106: ... 3 2 IST Hold Cofiguraion 3 3 L LCD Contrast 3 3 LCD Messages 2 2 LCD Messaging 3 2 Line Answer 3 2 Group Access 3 2 Group Programming 4 7 Group Queue 3 2 Originate 3 2 Programming 4 2 Records 4 1 4 8 Line Out Softkey Option 3 3 Line To Line Transfer 3 2 M Major Alarm Alerting 2 15 Maximum Call Duration 3 2 Meet Me Page 3 2 Message Deposit 3 2 Message Wait Originate 3 2 Modem Setup 2 3 Modify Digi...

Page 1107: ...2 4 3 3 Speed Dial Records 2 5 2 9 Sets 3 3 Station Monitoring 3 2 Name 3 3 Programming 3 3 Records 3 1 Restriction Level 7 3 Subdued Off Hook Voice Announce Groups 2 4 3 3 System Line Record 4 8 System Parameters 2 11 Records 2 1 Speed Dial Groups 3 2 T T1 Status Logging 2 14 Terminal Setup 2 2 Through Dialing 3 3 Timing 2 10 Toll Groups 7 4 TOLL ARS Records 7 1 Tone First 3 3 Tracker Access 3 2 ...

Page 1108: ...03 PLS present the 11A revision information as separate sheets that if you wish you can insert in your system manuals R This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation the Company and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel The information in this manual is subject to change without notice While every effort has been made to eliminate errors the Company disclaims liabi...

Page 1109: ...rphone 2122X 22 Line Monitor Telephone 8112S 12 Line Speakerphone 2101N Single Line Proprietary Telephone 8112N Multiline Proprietary Telephone DU32X 32 Button DSS BLF Console 8101N Single Line Proprietary Telephone IB64X 64 Button DSS BLF Console ExecuTech Telephones 6620E 23 Line Monitor Telephone 6714S 14 Line Speakerphone 6620T 23 Line Speakerphone 6714X 14 Line Monitor Speakerphone 6614E 22 L...

Page 1110: ... Places a line on hold Stores pauses in number sequences while programming Allows you to scroll through multiple held calls on display Interactive Buttons Provide quick and easy access to system and call processing features Provide straightforward button programming without dialing codes the interactive buttons themselves however are not programmable Intercom Button Selects an intercom line Initia...

Page 1111: ...e Monitor Telephone 2022S 22 Line LCD Speakerphone 2101N Single Line Proprietary Telephone unisyn11 cdr 1 2 4 A C I O X L M O D OLD A I CM C M unisyn05 cdr 1 2 4 A C I O X L M O D OLD A I CM C M unisyn01 cdr unisyn09 cdr DU32X 32 Button DSS BLF Console R TAB003 PLS page 5 DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Telephone Features 11A ...

Page 1112: ...9 08 8 90 1 13 4 78 3 94 UNIS029 TAB003 PLS page 6 GCA40 130 DXP Plus General Description 11B Telephone Features ...

Page 1113: ...on SPKR Button Message Waiting Light Hold Button TAP Button ITCM Button Feature Buttons Line Buttons and DSS Buttons Volume Control Microphone Opening 1 2 4 A C I O X L M O D OLD A I CM C M TAB003 PLS page 7 DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Telephone Features 11C ...

Page 1114: ...ick Up Directed Call Pick Up Group Call Pick Up System Call Transfer Screened Call Transfer Unscreened With Automatic Camp On Call Waiting Tone Caller ID Caller ID RNA Camp On With Automatic Call Back Camp On Call Waiting Camp On No Answer Clear Major Alarm Ring Central Message Desk Central Processor Switched Data Port Configuration Centrex Compatible Common Audible Ringer Interface Conferencing M...

Page 1115: ...d Protection Pause Time PBX Centrex Central Office Compatible Personal Intercom Number Paging Access Periodic Line Tone Personal Intercom Number Preference Personalized Ringing Tone Pooled Line Access Power Failure Transfer Preselection Prime Line Printer Interface Privacy Privacy Release Private Lines Program Printout Programmable Button Flexibility Programming Port Pulse Tone Switchable Quick Tr...

Page 1116: ... When programmers enable this feature option the format of the digit string changes from the ANI DNIS format to a format that includes a two digit code that indicates the presence of ANI digits I ANI DNIS where I equals the two digit string The ANI digit string indicates the calling party s telephone number The DNIS digit string identifies the call destination station TAB003 PLS page 11 GCA40 130 ...

Page 1117: ...roup parameter ARS Delayed Dialtone DXP Plus software 11A adds a delay option for ARS Dialtone Dial Tone 4 When the telephone user selects an outside line there is a 1 second delay before dialtone is presented to the caller The dialtone frequency is the same as the system intercom dialtone but the delay gives the impression a fresh dialtone for outbound dialing TAB003 PLS page 13 DXP Plus General ...

Page 1118: ...als DTMF tones through the intercom path Use station parameter programming to set the extension to receive DTMF digits End to End signaling can be enabled on any station port and is useful when connecting voice mail systems or door boxes TAB003 PLS page 15 GCA70 130 DXP Plus General Description 76A Understanding The Features ...

Page 1119: ...llows you to enable or disable the stutter intercom dialtone received at a station to indicate a message waiting You can program this item as a station COS parameter TAB003 PLS page 17 DXP Plus General Description GCA40 130 Understanding The Features 83A ...

Page 1120: ...and the boards being controlled are designated as DXPT1 NFAS The NFAS boards do not require a DXPRI card as they are slaves to the master PRI board Throughout the remainder of this publication the term T1 PRI means a T1 board specifically configured for ISDN PRI operation be it either a DXPT1 PRI or a DXPT1 NFAS board Since central office protocols differ the DXPRI card supports several protocol a...

Page 1121: ...ts Of course any other line boards that you install such as loop start DID or multipurpose reduce the number of lines available for T1 PRI service and thus reduces the number of T1 PRI boards you can install Whenever you install one or more boards and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source the usual case you must install one synchronization card DXOPT SYN on the servi...

Page 1122: ... country that uses E1 lines selecting this option will allow the DXP Plus to cost calls by monitoring the metering pulses originating from the central office SMDA Report On Answer The SMDA Report On Answer feature enhancement for DXP 11A adds the option to create a report entry only for answered outbound calls When this feature is enabled outbound calls initiated on lines which provide answer supe...

Page 1123: ...u wish you can insert in the appropriate system manuals Printed in U S A R This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation the Company and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel The information in this manual is subject to change without notice While every effort has been made to eliminate errors the Company disclaims liability for any difficulties arising for the int...

Page 1124: ... code delivered by the subscriber service however DNIS identifies the number that the caller dialed Systems can make use of these two services in different ways One use is to show the ANI or DNIS information on the display of an LCD speakerphone Through programming action you can set the system for which bit of information ANI or DNIS that you wish to have display priority or you can set the syste...

Page 1125: ...e PCIU to use the serial data path between it and the user supplied PC to send messages to the PC and to the telephone s display Making the PCIU Visual Call Manager operational requires only that installers make the proper connections as described in IMI89 286 Installing The Personal Computer Interface Unit and load the SPI and VCM software on the user supplied PC There are no telephone system sof...

Page 1126: ...station port equipment as undefined so that the system will not test the port for a specific type of equipment and will not include the port in any menu presentations NOTES 1 Depending upon which equipment you choose the system will present different sub menus that allow you to further define the equipment as to the quantity of lines it can serve whether it is a speakerphone whether it is a DSS BL...

Page 1127: ...d login permits programmers to use 11A VMMI software to execute certain programming features on an 11B system or use 11B VMMI software on 10A systems Restricted login permits the programming of the following critical features across software revision platforms archive any database restore any database that has the same revision software as does the system to which the VMMI is connected up grade sy...

Page 1128: ...ase during a system software upgrade Installers can choose to maintain the existing data base by first archiving the data base then upgrade the software and finally restore the database after the upgrade is complete Alternately installers can choose to allow the system to clear the existing database with the master clear operation TAB004 PLS p11 GCA40 130 General Description ...

Page 1129: ...wever there are four additional now available DTMF integration digits that are used to signal call progress information to the Comdial V V P voice mail system The system defaults these values during a master clear operation and they will save across databases from one system to another These defaulted values are applicable exclusively for Comdial V V P voice mail systems and are detailed below Log...

Page 1130: ...onnect To menu item connect VMMI to the system and return to the Switch pull down menu b From the Switch pull down menu select the Archive Database menu item c Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice Since the data base can be quite large you should chose a location on your computer s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data ba...

Page 1131: ...Digital Communications System General Description For Software Release 12A Printed in U S A GCA40 200 02 10 97 This publication reflects software release 12A R ...

Page 1132: ...eature compatibility Accordingly some features identified in this publication will not operate if some other feature is activated Comdial disclaims all liability relating to feature non compatibility or associated in any way with problems which may be encountered by incompatible features Notwithstanding anything contained in this publication to the contrary Comdial makes no representation herein a...

Page 1133: ...0 System Speed Dial Names 10 Digits Q and Z Position 10 Using Dial By Name 11 Hold Recall Inhibit 11 Flexible System Speed Dial Support 11 Impact Telephone New Model Support 12 ISDN Features 15 Programmable Speakerphone Functionality 15 Reserved DTMF Receivers 15 Station Blocking 16 VMMI Designation Label Printing 16 Chapter 3 Programming The 12A Features 17 Upgrading The DXP Plus Software 17 Tabl...

Page 1134: ...ions are as follows Automatic Redial Feature Data Interface Unit Support Dial By Name Digits Q And Z Position Hold Recall Inhibit Flexible System Speed Dial Support Impact Telephone New Model Support ISDN Features Programmable Speakerphone Functionality Reserved DTMF Receivers Station Blocking System Speed Dial Names VMMI Designation Label Printing 1 Introducing Software Release 12A GCA40 200 Intr...

Page 1135: ...on user starts a redial on some of the numbers in the stored list only the places in the list occupied by numbers not currently being redialed remain available for new number addition When the user starts the ARD feature the telephone will redial the stored number With multiple ARD the telephone will redial all stored numbers one at a time in the order that they are stored in the queue until a the...

Page 1136: ... it cancels the ARD action after it redials the number If neither call answer nor user activity occurs the system terminates the call and retries the call unless the maximum number of retries has been reached If the line provides busy detection the system disconnects the call and provides a five second busy tone to the calling station In this situation the calling station remains in the redial mod...

Page 1137: ...or remote control of the DIU from station ports other that the local station port for example those stations in the DIU s security group by assigning a DATA button to those stations as well however the system blocks their remote command when the local station port is busy with a call Installers assign control capability to a system station either the local station port or a remote port by mapping ...

Page 1138: ...g to the DIU 2 Mark two locations for the mounting screws as follows a make the first mark b measure 3 13 16 inches horizontally from the first mark and make the second mark 3 Install two 8 x 3 4 inch screws in the wall at the marked locations Tighten the screws until the screw heads are 1 4 inch from the surface of the wall 4 Place the DIU on the wall with the screw heads inserted into the slots ...

Page 1139: ...Measuring The Mounting Holes Installing The Mounting Screws Explaining The Software 12A Features GCA40 200 Describing The 12A Features 7 ...

Page 1140: ...D on the DIU will be on to indicate power is being supplied to the DIU 4 Plug one end of a standard line cord into the connector labeled LINE on the DIU Plug the other end of the line cord into the digital station port connector NOTE DIU power loss will create the same symptoms as the disconnection of the DIU from the system If this occurs plug the multiline digital telephone directly into a digit...

Page 1141: ...lephone Model 8012S Illustrated Impact To KSU Station Port To Common Equipment Cabinet dsu04 cdr Station Port Connection Making The DIU Cable Connections Explaining The Software 12A Features GCA40 200 Describing The 12A Features 9 ...

Page 1142: ...tifying names for searching through the list of system speed dial entries for system speed dialing When users make a sequential search through the stored index of names the system searches the list as it was entered If system use requires a uniquely sorted list programmers or system attendants must arrange the list in the desired sequence as they store the entries Programming System Speed Dial For...

Page 1143: ...up within a preprogrammed time limit the call rings the user s telephone again The preprogrammed time limit is a programmable item that installers set for the entire system Beginning with software release 11C the system provides a programming option that allows installers to prevent a call that is on hold at a station from ever recalling from the hold condition In other words it extends the hold r...

Page 1144: ...ntercom button assignment from the telephone Moving Fixed Feature Buttons On The New Impact Telephone Models Some Impact telephone models have a block of buttons located along the lower right hand edge of the housing that are the equivalent of fixed buttons on other telephone models To add user convenience to installations using these telephone models installers can rearrange the features that the...

Page 1145: ... A M OLD CO I COM M A X I 4 L M O D 1 A C 2 COMDIAL 8201N A M OLD CO I COM M A X I 4 L M O D 1 A C 2 COMDIAL 2 A C 1 D M O L 4 I X COMDIAL I M A CO OLD A M A 8324F 8324S 8324F 8324S 8312S COMDIAL X I 4 L M O D 1 A C 2 M A A OLD CO A M I 8412F COMDIAL M A X I 4 L M O D 1 A C 2 A OLD CO A M I 1 Viewing The New Impact Telephone Outlines Explaining The Software 12A Features GCA40 200 Describing The 12...

Page 1146: ...1N and IB24X 8324F 8312S 8324S and IB48X 9 065 6 315 8 819 8 819 4 442 3 283 1 550 image_2 cdr Viewing The New Impact Telephone Dimensions GCA40 200 Explaining The Software 12A Features 14 Describing The 12A Features ...

Page 1147: ...ake the programming choice installers must contact the service provider to obtain the facility coding value for the provided service The facility coding value is a number between 0 and 31 and this supplied number is the programming entry that installers use as their programming choice Alternately they can enter a 32 to tell the system that there is no supplied ISDN service Programmable Speakerphon...

Page 1148: ...8201N Single Line Proprietary Telephone IB48X 48 Button DSS BLF Console IB24X 24 Button DSS BLF Console The application automatically creates designation labels for telephone assignments stored within an existing database Plus installers can manually customize the automatically created labels as well as create labels for other telephones that are not part of the installed database Once the applica...

Page 1149: ...o menu item connect VMMI to the system and return to the Switch pull down menu b From the Switch pull down menu select the Archive Database menu item c Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice Since the data base can be quite large you should chose a location on your computer s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data base d The...

Page 1150: ...ations Systems General Description for the Common Code Base Software Feature Set 15A Release 170 Printed in U S A GCA40 219 01 04 99 The information in this publication is applicable for software feature set 15A Release 170 R ISO 9001 Certified ...

Page 1151: ...ting 4 Board Programming 5 Programming For Caller ID 6 Call ID 6 Absorb Ring Time 6 Delete Viewed RNA Records 6 Caller ID RNA 6 CID Button 6 Save Button 6 Dial By Name Support For Non Display Telephones 7 Programming The Dial By Name Feature For Non Display Telephones 7 Daylight Saving Time 8 Programming The Daylight Saving Time Feature 8 E911 Caller ID Support For System Stations 8 Programming Fo...

Page 1152: ...onfiguration 14 Network Extension Provisioning 14 System Networking Feature Enhancements Stand Alone Feature 15 Basic Impact Attendant Support 15 Dial Zero Extension 15 Directed Call Pickup 15 DSS BLF Support Network Station Monitor 15 Programming For Network DSS BLF Support 16 Ten Node Networking 16 Transfer To Voice Mail 16 Programming For The Transfer To Voice Mail Networking Feature 16 VVP Ser...

Page 1153: ...et 15A or as stand alone features are named in the following list Feature Set 15A Features Call Forward To Hunt Groups Centrex Message Waiting with Caller ID DXP DXP Plus only Dial By Name Support For Non Display Telephones Daylight Savings Time E911Caller ID Support Ground Start Line Board Impact FX Only Idle System Restore Industry Standard Telephone Circuit Board For Avalon Pull Cord Support Im...

Page 1154: ...t components and an upgrade label and it is available through the normal distribution supply channels Detailing The Software Considerations The PCMMI off line programming procedure is no longer available with Release 170 software A windows based Visual Man Machine Interface VMMI programming system with help files now replaces the PCMMI The DXP database must be at least revision 9A before you can t...

Page 1155: ...n the system telephones and causes a message waiting display to appear on proprietary LCD speakerphones The service provider sends two different message signals to the digital communications system line number with message waiting status OFF or line number with message waiting status ON If the message wait status is OFF the system makes no attempt to process message waiting information When the sy...

Page 1156: ...interactive buttons on LCD speakerphones Users press CALL button to call first message in a message queue and press CLEAR to both clear current message and display next message if multiple messages await MW Light indicator on industry standard telephones IST Installers must assign a message waiting line as the station s prime line User dials 00 to retrieve messages Programming For Centrex Message ...

Page 1157: ...x Message Waiting lamp indications Board Configuration Under BOARD CONFIGURATION SLOT ASSIGNMENTS or BOARD CONFIGURATION CABINET VIEW installers configure the circuit board that supports the Centrex Message Waiting signalling Board Programming As an option some CO s may generate and send Abbrevated Incoming Message Wait Ring to the system if a system station s line was busy when the CO left a mess...

Page 1158: ...stem deletes the records as station users view them Caller ID RNA If a station with assigned caller ID lines receives a call but does not answer the system automatically archives the information Under STATIONS STATION PROGRAMMING RINGING ASSIGNMENTS CALLER ID RNA installers can program any station in agroup of stations to receive caller ID RNA information With this feature enabled station users ca...

Page 1159: ...mmable The system compares the dialed characters with the name field and if it finds a complete match it initiates the system speed dial of the number associated with that name For non display telephones the system dials the first match it finds If there existed similar names in the index the first match may not be the desired one The feature works best for non display telephones if all the names ...

Page 1160: ...fication ANI of individual system telephones for E911 purposes This software enhancement allows a user provided proxy device that installers connect to the system to transmit the location of system stations that originate an E911 call Programming For E911 Caller ID Support Program the following VMMI items to fully enable the E911 Caller ID Support E911 Line Marking Under LINE LINE PROGRAMMING LINE...

Page 1161: ...ards out of service before it begins a database restore operation VMMI displays a warning that the system is taking all boards out of service before it begins the database restore operation and that the system will reset itself after the restore is complete IST Board For Avalon Pull Cord Support Impact FX only Engineers have designed a new industry standard telephone IST circuit board that interfa...

Page 1162: ...ion Programming Interface API which requests and carries out basic services performed by the computer and telephony portions of the system to an API that the FXS system supports Typical API requested services include call control services such as these following items receive ring events off and on hook hookflash dial digits and so forth The SCbus interface board mounts in any universal board slot...

Page 1163: ...s under port programming are limited to disabling the port or configuring it as a station port Phone Types While the default value is none on the STATIONS STATION PROGRAMMING PHONE TYPES menu for SCbus ports configured as stations installers can choose any digital station type valid in the data base OAI Links Installers can reserve the Scbus port for use only by an OAI application using a specifie...

Page 1164: ...the ring monitoring feature This recall ring monitor enhancement is active as the default setting for a station Note that the copy station procedure will not copy ring monitor capability except for the recall ring monitor setting Operating A Ring Monitoring Arrangement Whenever a monitored telephone rings for a call the associated DSS BLF on a monitoring station flashes The display on a monitoring...

Page 1165: ...ffect for ring monitoring calls that is line calls have priority over intercom calls and recalls If the ring monitoring feature coincides with another direct delay ring situation then direct delay ringing light appearance takes precedence A monitoring station does not require a DSS BLF for a monitored station however the system uses that BLF light if available to indicate an audible ring monitor e...

Page 1166: ...en they check this control the system restricts the identification display of all connected calls With the control not checked all calls provide line identification display Calling Line ID Restriction Under SYSTEM NETWORKING NETWORK PROPERTIES installers select Calling Line Id Restriction to enable or disable the presentation of the call identification display during calling With the feature check...

Page 1167: ...ith call pick up station users can dial a code plus an intercom number of a ringing or on hold station and answer the call from the users station Software Release 170 extends this feature across the nodes of the network so that station users of one network node can pick up calls that are ringing at stations connected to another node on the network DSS BLF Support Network Station Monitor Any statio...

Page 1168: ...VISIONING ADD NODE EXTENSIONS and NETWORKING EXTENSION PROVISIONING REMOVE NODE EXTENSIONS the number of selectable nodes is 10 nodes Transfer To Voice Mail With the networking status enabled the system reserves voice mail port 32 for centralized voice mail on the hub This parameter has the following two consequences Installers must not use voice mail port 32 for local node voice mail when network...

Page 1169: ...Software Release 170 serial integration provided by the voice mail system to stations connected to the hub is also available to stations connected to node systems When there are voice mail systems connected to the nodes every station on a node uses serial integration provided by its local voice mail system through a voice mail port other than port 32 specifically ports 1 2 3 and so forth in that o...

Page 1170: ... DXPSW DLRC on the DXP s central processor unit If you need detailed instructions for installing this circuit board and card refer to the DXP System Hardware Instructions in your service literature To ensure that you execute the database conversion and software upgrade correctly you must perform the following detailed operations in the sequence listed below 1 Convert The Database 2 Translate The D...

Page 1171: ... Use this procedure to translate a DXP database which you have first converted to be compatible to software release 9x to be compatible with a common code base software release of 10A and later 1 From the VMMI window select the File pull down menu 2 Select Open As 3 From the Open database File window select the database that you wish to open and OK your choice A prompt asks you to confirm the tran...

Page 1172: ...xisting database you must archive it before you master clear the system You can then restore this database after you master clear the system Remember if this database is not at software release 10A or later you must convert and translate it Execute the following sequence of events exactly as they are stated here 1 On the DXPCPU 68K circuit board set DIP switch 8 to its ON position 2 Connect the DX...

Page 1173: ...connect VMMI to the system and return to the Switch pull down menu b From the Switch pull down menu select the Archive Database menu item c Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice Since the database can be quite large you should choose a location on your computer s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the database d The system autom...

Page 1174: ...ll a Comdial representative to obtain the system software keying code that the system uses to enable the software Download the latest xxxxxxxx bin file from the Comdial Online Support Server Reach the Online Support Server through the Comdial Internet home page on the worldwide web at www comdial com Once there follow the prompts to get to the Support Server and then to get to the location where y...

Page 1175: ...ation information a Stop the VVP voice mail manager service from the following location Start Settings Control Panel Select the Services icon highlight voice mail manager and click Stop b With the CTI application s hardware mechanism installed on the PC s parallel printer port locate the software key icon on the main desktop menu and double click on it If the icon is not available use the Start Pr...

Page 1176: ...eeded 12 If CTI applications are a part of the installation restart the Key Update Utility program using the same procedure detailed in step three enter the new CTI application magic number character sequence into the update utility and then click the Update Key button The utility menu shows a completion code value to indicate that the procedure is finished Verify that the completion code matches ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for DXP Plus Series

D-Link i2eye DVC-1000 Quick Installation G preview
i2eye DVC-1000
Brand: D-Link Pages: 6
Racal Instruments 1266 Manual preview
1266
Brand: Racal Instruments Pages: 64
HydroQuip BALBOA CS6000B Series Operation Manual preview
BALBOA CS6000B Series
Brand: HydroQuip Pages: 32
Aastra IntelliGate 2025 User Manual preview
IntelliGate 2025
Brand: Aastra Pages: 71
SMART Room System SRS-Lync-XL Assembly Manual preview
Room System SRS-Lync-XL
Brand: SMART Pages: 2
Xtrons D713GDAB User Manual preview
D713GDAB
Brand: Xtrons Pages: 24
Panasonic SC-HC37 Owner'S Manual preview
SC-HC37
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 20
Panasonic SC-HC302 Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-HC302
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 20
Panasonic SC-HC297 Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-HC297
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 20
Panasonic SC-HC212 Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-HC212
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 116
Panasonic SC-HC38 Owner'S Manual preview
SC-HC38
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 20
Panasonic SG-D16 Service Manual preview
SG-D16
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 22
Panasonic SG-1800 Service Manual preview
SG-1800
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 27
Panasonic SG-165 Service Manual preview
SG-165
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 33
Panasonic SG-1030L Service Manual preview
SG-1030L
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 15
Emerson ES28 Owner'S Manual preview
ES28
Brand: Emerson Pages: 22
Emerson ES27 Owner'S Manual preview
ES27
Brand: Emerson Pages: 22
Emerson ES13 Owner'S Manual preview
ES13
Brand: Emerson Pages: 27

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands